U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
Information Products Division |
U.S. Patent Classification System - Classification Definitions
as of June 30, 2000
Patents classified in a subclass may be accessed by either clicking on
the subclass number
preceding each subclass definition or on the
" " icon, below.
( please note that patents for some subclasses may not be available )
For classification search strategies, please refer to the
Classification Index
Explanation of Data web page.
(definitions have been obtained from the
Patents ASSIST CD-ROM which
is produced by the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office
Electronic Products Branch)
Class 359
OPTICS: SYSTEMS (INCLUDING COMMUNICATION) AND ELEMENTS
Class Definition:
GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER
A. This is the generic class for optical elements and
optical systems not elsewhere classified.
Among the optical elements included in this class are:
Lenses; Polarizers; Diffraction gratings; Prisms; Reflectors;
Filters; Projection screens; Optical Modulators; Optical
Demodulators; Optical Transmitters; Optical Receivers
B. Among the optical systems included in this class are:
Optical Communication; Compound lens systems; Light
reflecting signalling systems (e.g., retroreflectors);
Stereoscopic systems; Binocular devices; Systems of
lenticular elements; Systems involving light interference;
Glare reducing systems; Light dividing and combining systems;
Light control systems (e.g., light valves); Building
illumination with natural light; Systems for protecting or
shielding elements; Optical systems whose operation depends
upon polarizing, diffracting, dispersing, reflecting, or
refracting light; Kaleidoscopes
C. Further included are certain apertures, closures, and
viewing devices of a specialized nature which involve no
intentional reflection, refraction, or filtering of light
rays.
D. This class also includes optical elements combined with
another type of structure(s) to constitute an optical element
combined with a nonoptical structure or a perfection or
improvement in the optical element. This includes filters
with supports or frames; reflectors with handles, vehicles,
or controlling motors; and prisms with mountings. Also,
included are lenses with supports or mountings, lenses with
diverse art tools, instruments or machines, lenses with
casings and lenses with viewed object supports or viewed
object or field illumination. Additionally, included are
stereo-viewers with view changers, illumination or
supporting, mounting, enclosing or light shielding structure;
lenses with spacing structure such as barrels with or without
an additional support, handle or illumination; and optical
elements with moisture or foreign particle control.
E. Included here also are certain accessories or attachments
combined with optical elements such as blinds, shields,
shades, and caps or covers for preventing the accumulation of
dust, moisture, or other foreign material.
LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS
SUPPORTS OR MOUNTS FOR OPTICAL ELEMENTS AND SYSTEMS
Included here (359) also are supports, mounts, and frames
which are particularly adapted for use with optical elements.
The nominal recitation of a mirror or filter in combination
with such structure is generally not sufficient for
classification here, if the mirror or filter is treated as a
panel or lamina of general utility. Such panels with
associated components, such as frames, edging, backing, etc.,
mechanically and permanently assembled thereto are provided
for elsewhere. Supports for such panel type structures are
classified elsewhere. (See References to the Current Class,
below.) However, combinations of a detailed mirror with its
support are classified in this class. In the case of other
optical elements, such as prisms or lenses, the broad
recitation of the element in combination with the support or
mounting is sufficient for classification in this class. This
Class (359) provides for lenses, prisms, and filters
respectively with supports. (See Subclass References to the
Current Class, below.)
Stereo-viewer supports and mountings are provided for in this
class. (See Subclass References to the Current Class,
below.)
NONVISIBLE RADIATION
Included in this class are not only those elements which
operate in the visible portion of the spectrum, but also
those which operate in the near visible portion of the
spectrum (i.e., infrared and ultraviolet) in accordance with
optical principles. Systems which function in both the
visible and near visible portions of the spectrum are
classified here unless a specific structure is claimed as a
result of the utilization of invisible ray energy. Systems
whose operation is restricted to the nonvisible portion of
the spectrum are classified elsewhere. (See References to
Other Classes, below.)
OPTICAL SYSTEM INCLUDING PHOTOCELL
Generally, where a photocell is claimed as a part of the
optical system, the subject matter is excluded from this
class. Such subject matter is typically provided for with
the art for radiant energy or measuring and testing. However,
where a modulating signal is recovered from a modulated light
wave (as in an optical communication receiver or in an
optical demodulator), classification is in Class 359. (See
References to Other Classes, below.)
OPTICAL WAVEGUIDES
Optical waveguiding elements, per se, are classified in
elsewhere. Also, combinations of an optical waveguide with an
associated mechanical connecting device or a device coupling
light into or out of the optical waveguide are classified
elsewhere. (See References to Other Classes, below.)
OPTICAL MODULATION
An optical modulator, in general, is classified in this class
(359). However, optical modulation occuring solely within
the confines of an optical waveguide is excluded from this
class. Such subject matter is provided for in Class 385.
OPTICAL AMPLIFICATION OR FREQUENCY CONVERSION
A detailed optical amplifier/frequency converter, per se, or
such subject matter in combination with an additional
waveguide structure is classified in this class (359).
However, the nominal recitation of any type of optical
amplifier/frequency converter together with an additional
waveguide structure is classified elsewhere where such
combination meets the class requirements.
MEASURING AND TESTING
A claimed image forming optical system plus a reticle is
classified in this class. Sighting instruments for
determining geometrical relationships where no significant
optical system is claimed are classified elsewhere.
Measuring and testing systems which determine the optical
characteristics of light so as to measure materials and
provides for lens or reflective image former testing are
classified elsewhere. Eye examining and testing instruments
are classified elsewhere. (See References to Other Classes,
below.)
LASERS
Lasers and similar devices, per se, are excluded from this
class. See References to Other Classes for lasers and
similar devices when they function as a generator of coherent
electromagnetic waves in the optical range.
OPTICAL TELEMETRY
Optical telemetry includes the combination of an optical data
link between multiple locations together with a specific
sensor used in a particular environment. Since the overall
combination specifies an environment or specific sensor, the
environment or sensor will control the classification. The
following are examples of proper art areas for optical
telemetry:
(1) Wellbore telemetry including any type of radiant energy;
(i.e., optical, radio, etc.). (See References to Other
Classes, below.)
(2) An optical data link in combination with a specific
sensor, unless there is a place for the specific sensor in
another class. (See References to Other Classes, below.)
COMPOSITIONS AND STOCK MATERIAL
Where there is no shape or structure peculiar to optical
elements as in compositions or stock material, the subject
matter is excluded from this class. See References to Other
Classes, below, for classes that provide for these
compositions and stock material.
OPTICAL ELEMENTS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE
For Optical Elements Classified Elsewhere, see References to
Other Classes, below.
OPTICAL ELEMENTS COMBINED WITH DIVERSE TYPE ART DEVICES
An optical element combined with a diverse type art device
where the element results in an improvement or perfection of
the device is generally classified with the device. See
Subclass References to the Current Class, below, for a
reference to details of this distinction with reference to
lenses, and also for references to combinations of a
reflector and diverse type art device. The combination of an
optical element and an electric discharge device is provided
for elsewhere. See Class Definition, section D, above. (See
References to Other Classes, below.)
For Classes that are more common external classifications of
systems including or combined with optical elements, see
References to Other Classes, below.
METHODS OF MAKING OPTICAL ELEMENTS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE
For Methods of Making Optical Elements Classified Elsewhere,
see References to Other Classes, below.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
477 for stereo-viewer supports and mountings.
871 for combinations of a detailed mirror with its support.
811 831, and 892 provide for lenses, prisms, and filters
respectively with supports.
809 see (1) Note for details of the following distinction
with reference to lenses: an optical element combined with a
diverse type art device where the element results in an
improvement or perfection of the device is generally
classified with the device.
838 under "SEARCH CLASS" for numerous combinations of a
reflector and diverse type art device.
REFERENCES TO OTHER CLASSES
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
33, Geometrical Instruments, 227 for sighting devices for
determining geometrical relationships. (See Lines With Other
Classes and Within This Class, "Optical Elements Combined
With Diverse Type Art Devices.")
33, Geometrical Instruments, for sighting instruments for
determining geometrical relationships where no significant
optical system is claimed. (Lines With Other Classes and
Within This Class, "Measuring and Testing")
52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), provides for such
panels with associated components, such as frames, edging,
backing, etc., mechanically and permanently assembled
thereto. (See Lines With Other Classes and Within This
Class, "Supports or Mounts for Optical Elements and Systems,
" above.)
65, Glass Manufacturing, 385 for processes for forming
optical fibers, waveguides, or preforms; subclass 31 for
chemical glass etching; subclasses 37+ for glass lens making.
(See Lines With Other Classes, "Methods of Making Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.")
117, Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy Growth
Processes; Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and
non-coating apparatus for growing therein-defined
single-crystal of all types of materials, including inorganic
or organic. (See Lines With Other Classes, "Methods of
Making Optical Elements Classified Elsewhere.")
156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
99 for optically transparent glass sandwich making. (See
Lines With Other Classes, "Methods of Making Optical Elements
Classified Elsewhere.")
205, Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions Used Therein, and
Methods of Preparing the Compositions, subclass 71 for the
electroforming of a mirror or reflector and subclass 116 for
producing a mirror or reflector by electrolytic coating.
(See Lines With Other Classes, "Methods of Making Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.")
248, Supports, 466 provides for supports for panel type
structures. (See Lines With Other Classes and Within This
Class, "Supports or Mounts for Optical Elements and Systems,"
above.)
250, Radiant Energy, 200 for optical systems for controlling
or controlled by a photocell and subclasses 336.1 to 395 for
methods and apparatus for the detection of invisible,
radiation or the testing of material by invisible radiation
for the production, transmission, control or general
utilization of invisible radiant energy, including cathode
rays, ultra-violet rays and the radiations and emanations of
radio-active substances and the irradiation of material not
limited to particular arts. (See Lines With Other Classes
and Within This Class, "Optical Elements Combined With
Diverse Type Art Devices.'')
250, Radiant Energy, for systems whose operation is
restricted to the nonvisible portion of the spectrum. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Nonvisible
Radiation.")
250, Radiant Energy, 200 generally, where a photocell is
claimed as a part of the optical system. (See Lines With
Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical System
Including Photocell.")
252, Compositions, for compositions generally, 299.01
providing for compositions of liquid crystals and subclasses
582+ providing for other light transmission modifying
compositions. (See Lines With Other Classes and Within This
Class, "Compositions and Stock Material.")
264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes, 1.1 for optical article shaping or treating.
(See Lines With Other Classes, "Methods of Making Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.")
313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, 110 for an
electron lamp or discharge device having an optical device
structurally combined therewith. (See Lines With Other
Classes and Within This Class, "Optical Elements Combined
With Diverse Type Art Devices.")
340, Communications: Electrical, subclass 815.76 for lens
type indicator. (See Lines With Other Classes and Within
This Class, "Optical Elements Classified Elsewhere.'')
340, Communications: Electrical, 853.1 for wellbore
telemetry including any type of radiant energy; (i.e.,
optical, radio, etc.). (See Lines With Other Classes and
Within This Class, "Optical Telemetry," above.)
340, Communications: Electrical, 870.28 for an optical data
link in combination with a specific sensor. (See Lines With
Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical Telemetry,"
above.)
343, Communications: Radio Wave Antennas, 909 for radio
wave refracting means and filters. (See Lines With Other
Classes and Within This Class, "Optical Elements Classified
Elsewhere.")
348, Television, 195, 335+, 744+, and 832+ for optical
systems included in television systems. (See Lines With
Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical Elements
Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.")
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
159 for spectacle lenses. (See Lines With Other Classes and
Within This Class, "Optical Elements Classified Elsewhere.")
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
for spectacles and instruments for vision testing and eye
examining. (See Lines With Other Classes and Within This
Class, "Optical Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art
Devices.")
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
200 for eye examining and testing instruments. (Lines With
Other Classes and Within This Class, "Measuring and
Testing")
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, for optical systems used in
motion picture apparatus. (See Lines With Other Classes and
Within This Class, "Optical Elements Combined With Diverse
Type Art Devices.")
353, Optics: Image Projectors, for image projectors. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.")
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 396 for
measurements involving moire patterns caused by plural
optical grids relatively movable with respect to each other
and subclass 242.1 for moire pattern examination of mesh or
grid like material including knitted fabrics to determine the
number of threads, lines or the spacing between the lines.
(See Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.")
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, for methods and
apparatus for analyzing light, determining the optical or
nonoptical properties of materials, measuring optically
dimensions, determining optically spatial relations and
inspecting optically for flaws and imperfections, within the
scope of this class and not otherwise classifiable. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Device.")
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, provides generally for
measuring and testing systems which determine the optical
characteristics of light so as to measure materials and
provides in 124 for lens or reflective image former testing.
(Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Measuring
and Testing")
358, Facsimile and Static Presentation Processing, 400 for
optical systems included in facsimile systems. (See Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical Elements
Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.")
362, Illumination, 341 and 326+ respectively for reflecting
and refracting elements to be used with an artificial source
of illumination.
362, Illumination, appropriate subclasses for light sources
combined with optical light modifiers, especially subclass 19
for light sources with polarizers; subclasses 166+ and 293
for light sources with selected wavelength filters; subclass
268 for light sources combined with plural serial lens
elements; subclasses 296+ for light sources with reflectors;
subclasses 326+ and 341+ for refractors and reflectors,
respectively for use with light sources. (See Lines With
Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical Elements
Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.")
365, Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 64,
106+, 120+, 215+, and 234+ for systems and circuits utilizing
radiant energy. (See Lines With Other Classes and Within
This Class, "Optical Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art
Devices.")
372, Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for
oscillators of the quantum electronic type for generating
coherent electromagnetic waves in the optical range by
stimulated emission of radiation (e.g., lasers, irasers).
(See Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.")
372, Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for
lasers and similar devices, per se, when they function as a
generator of coherent electromagnetic waves in the optical
range. (See Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class,
"Lasers," above.)
378, X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, 145 for X-ray
beam control devices. (See Lines With Other Classes and
Within This Class, "Optical Elements Combined With Diverse
Type Art Devices.")
385, Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for light
wave transmitting devices. (See Lines With Other Classes and
Within This Class, "Optical Elements Classified Elsewhere.")
396, Photography, appropriate subclasses for still cameras.
(See Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.")
399, Electrophotography, 9 for diagnostics, subclasses 38+
for controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses
168+ for charging, subclasses 177+ for exposure, subclasses
222+ for development, subclasses 297+ for transfer,
subclasses 320+ for fixing, subclasses 343+ for cleaning, and
subclasses 361+ for document handling. (See Lines With Other
Classes and Within This Class, "Optical Elements Combined
With Diverse Type Art Devices.")
424, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, 59
for a sun or radiation screening or sun tanning composition
intended for topical application to a living body. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Compositions
and Stock Materia.")
427, Coating Processes, 162 for coating processes, per se,
wherein the product is an optical element. (See Lines With
Other Classes, "Methods of Making Optical Elements Classified
Elsewhere.")
428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 1.1
for miscellaneous liquid crystal articles and appropriate
subclasses for a metallic or nonmetallic stock material
product in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet
or a structurally defined or coated rod, strand, fiber flake
or other element and a nonstructural metallic or nonmetallic
composite web or sheet defined by the compositions of the
layers. Note subclass 910 (a cross-reference art collection)
for a product with molecular orientation. (See Lines With
Other Classes and Within This Class, "Compositions and Stock
Material.")
451, Abrading, 42 for a lens grinding process and subclasses
323 and 325 for a machine for grinding an optical lens. (See
Lines With Other Classes, "Methods of Making Optical Elements
Classified Elsewhere.")
505, Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material,
Process, 100 for high temperature (T[subscrpt]c[end
subscrpt] 30 K) superconducting material. (See Lines With
Other Classes and Within This Class, "Compositions and Stock
Materia.")
505, Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material,
Process, 150 for high temperature (T[subscrpt]c[end
subscrpt] 30 K) superconducting device, and particularly
subclasses 181+ for photoconductive, light transmissive,
light emissive, or light responsive device or component.
(See Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.")
505, Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material,
Process, 150 for high temperature (T[subscrpt]c[end
subscrpt] 30 K) superconducting device; and particularly
subclasses 181+ for photoconductive, light transmissive,
light emissive, or light responsive device or component.
(See Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.")
702, Data Processing: Measuring, Calibrating, or Testing,
subclass 40, 49, 134+, and 172 for the use of radiant energy
(e.g., X-ray, light, etc.) in a mechanical measurement
system, flow metering, temperature measuring system, or
system for measuring thickness or width, respectively, and
subclass 159 for measuring of linear distance or length by
reflected signal (e.g., ultrasonic, light, laser).
708, Electrical Computers: Arithmetic Processing and
Calculating, subclass 816 for optical correlation or
convolution and subclass 831 for electro-optical analog
integrators. This class will accept optical computers where
the resultant mathematical operation is in the form of an
electrical signal. For mathematical operations performed by
optical means, classification is in Class 359.
GLOSSARY:
BINOCULAR
Pertaining to the use of both eyes in the act of viewing.
BIREFRINGENT
Certain crystalline materials have their outer electrons
bound more strongly in one direction than another resulting
in the material having two refractive indices depending on
the direction of the oscillation. Such materials are termed
birefringent and, if an unpolarized light ray enters such a
material obliquely, it will be refracted into two different
linearly polarized rays having directions of polarization
which are normal to one another.
DICHROIC
As used in one sense, the term dichroic refers to (1) the
property of some materials to absorb to a greater degree one
or the other of the two orthogonal component vectors which
can be considered as constituting ordinary light. This
results in producing light polarized to a degree depending
upon the relative absorption of the two components. The term
dichroic is also used to refer to (2) an optical element
which will transmit light of one color and reflect other
colors with little light being absorbed. These elements are
usually composed of superimposed strata of dielectric
materials.
DIFFRACTION
A phenomenon resulting from the wave nature of light, e.g.,
light passing through a slit of decreasing width, forms a
narrower and narrower beam until the slit width approaches
the wavelength of light, after which further decreasing of
the slit width results in a beam having a larger and larger
divergence.
DIFFRACTION PATTERN
The intensity profile of a light beam after having passed by
a diffracting aperture or object.
DIFFUSE
Pertaining to the scattering or random deviation of
transmitted or reflected light.
HOLOGRAPHY
The optical recording of an object wave formed by the
resulting interference pattern of two (or more) mutually
coherent, component light beams. Generally, a coherent beam
is first split into two component beams, one of which
irradiates an object, the second of which irradiates a
recording medium. The diffraction or scattering of the first
wave by the object forms an object wave which proceeds to and
interferes with a second coherent beam (i.e., reference beam)
at the medium. The resulting pattern is a two-dimensional
(thin) or three-dimensional (thick) hologram of the object
wave, depending on the thickness of the recording medium.
IMAGE FORMER
An optical device capable of producing an image from light
rays proceeding from an object.
INTERFERENCE
The interaction of two light waves which, as a result of
their relative phases, produce a cancellation or
reinforcement of wave energy.
LIGHT, VISIBLE LIGHT
Visible light is radiation which stimulates the optical
receptors of the eye and has a wavelength from 3850 to 7600
Angstrom units. The term light is used to refer to
wavelengths in the above mentioned range and, often, also to
refer to the ranges immediately adjacent, i.e., the ultra
violet and infrared ranges which are nonvisible.
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
The conveyance of information from one location to another
via at least one optical transmitter and one optical
receiver. These are used to transfer the information with an
optical beam and this beam can be used in various
communication schemes to enable the most effective or desired
method of moving the information, including optical
multiplexing when plural information signals or plural
transmitters and receivers are utilized.
OPTICAL ELEMENT
A structure which performs a basic optical function, i.e.,
the structure, when exposed to or placed in the path of a
light beam, will cause refraction, diffraction, attenuation,
or blocking of the light or a modification in the character
or properties of the light. In lenses, the complete lens is
considered an optical element, while the individual masses of
a plural element lens are considered as lens elements or lens
components.
OPTICAL MODULATION
The change of some characteristic of an optical beam in
direct relation to a varying signal applied thereto. The
change may be temporal (e.g., amplitude, frequency, or phase)
or directional.
OPTICAL SYSTEM
A combination of two or more similar or diverse optical
elements which are optically related.
OPTICS, OPTICAL
The science of light and vision and the construction of
optical instruments.
POLARIZATION
In a beam of polarized electromagnetic radiation, the
polarization direction is the direction of the electric field
vector (with no distinction between positive and negative as
the field oscillates back and forth). The electric field
vector is always in the plane which is normal to the beam
propagation direction. At a given stationary point in space,
the electric field vector of a beam can vary with time at
random (unpolarized beam), can remain constant
(plane-polarized beam), or can rotate. In the latter two
cases, the beam is said to be "polarized" and can be thought
of as the resultant vector of two orthogonal component
vectors having equal amplitudes. If the phase difference of
the two component vectors is 0 degrees, the light is plane
polarized; if 90 degrees, the light is circularly polarized;
and if it is between 0 and 90 degrees, the light is
elliptically polarized. Elliptical and plane polarized light
can be converted into each other by means of birefringent
optical systems which retard one of the orthogonal component
vectors relative to the other.
REFLECTION
Light striking a surface and returning back into the medium
from which it came, at an angle equal but opposite to the
angle of incidence.
REFRACTION
The deviation of light which results when a ray of light
passes obliquely from a medium of one refractive index to a
medium of another refractive index.
RETROREFLECTION
Light striking a surface and returning back into the medium
in the reverse direction (i.e., a 180 degree change from its
original path).
SPECTRUM
The band of colors produced by separating a beam of white
light into its component frequencies.
TERMINAL IMAGE
The last image formed by a compound system.
ULTRAVIOLET/INFRARED
Electromagnetic radiation immediately above and below the
optical visible frequency spectrum is termed ultraviolet and
infrared, respectively. This entire range of frequencies is
encompassed by the term "light."
SUBCLASSES
Subclass:
1
HOLOGRAPHIC SYSTEM OR ELEMENT:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein apparatus for forming a record of the
phase and amplitude information of a wavefront where the
information can be used to reconstruct the original
wavefront; apparatus to reconstruct the original wavefront
from a record containing the phase and amplitude information
of this wavefront; or the record itself is recited.
(1) Note. This subclass is the generic locus for subject
matter relating to holography. However, where particular use
or application is claimed, classification is in the
appropriate use or application class.
(2) Note. Nominally claimed subject matter external to this
class in combination with holography is classified here.
Significantly claimed subject matter external to this class
in combination with holography is classified in the class
appropriate to the external subject matter.
(3) Note. Interferometers are excluded from this subclass
and are classified in Class 356, subclasses 345+.
(4) Note. Holos:graphic memories including those having a
nominal recitation of a photodetector or photocell are
included in this or the indented subclasses. Static
holos:graphic storage and retrieval systems having electrical
circuitry are classified in Class 365.
(5) Note. Dynamic holos:graphic storage and retreival
systems having eletrical circuitry are classified in Class
369.
(6) Note. Mere nominal recitation of developing, fixing,
bleaching, or etching a photos:graphic recording medium does
not exclude the subject matter from this class.
Holos:graphic systems including significant chemical
processing steps are classifed in Class 430, Radiation
Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or Product
Thereof.
(7) Note. Systems for making holos:graphic matched filters
are included in this and the indented subclasses.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
558 for correlation systems using holos:graphic matched
filters.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
73, Measuring and Testing, 603 and 656 for acoustic
holos:graphic testing and for holos:graphic interferometry in
which an object is acted upon during the test, as for
example, stressed or vibrated.
235, Registers, subclass 457 for holos:graphic coded record
sensors with particular circuitry to process electrical
signals.
250, Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses, for
holos:graphic systems that use radiation entirely outside of
the optical or microwave ranges and which is not acoustic,
and subclass 550 for photocell circuits and apparatus for
interference pattern analysis (e.g., holography).
283, Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses for holograms in
combination with credit or identification cards.
340, Communications: Electrical, subclass 980 for nonalarm
flight indicator visible in pilot's line-of-sight through
windscreen..
342, Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and
Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio Navigation), 176 for head up
display combined with radar.
345, Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface
Processing, and Selective Visual Display Systems, 7 for
heads-up displays with selective electrical control.
348, Television, 40 for television systems which use
holography.
355, Photocopying, subclass 2 for photos:graphic copying of
holograms by nonholos:graphic means.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 457 for
holos:graphic interferometry in general.
364, Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems, for
electrical computers or data processing systems which may use
holography.
365, Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 125,
216, and 235 for holos:graphic storage and retrieval of
information systems including significant and particular
electrical circuitry.
367, Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and
Devices, 8 for acoustic holography in general.
369, Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 103
for dynamic storage or retrieval using a holos:graphic
storage medium.
378, X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, subclass 36 for
X-ray holography or interferometry.
380, Cryptography, subclass 54 for this subject matter used
in a device for revealing concealed information.
382, Image Analysis, 210 for spatial filtering (e.g.,
holography) in a pattern recognition system.
396, Photography, for photography in general.
430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
Product Thereof, 1 for holos:graphic systems involving
significant chemical processing steps, composition, or
product.
600, Surgery, 101 for endoscopes.
Subclass:
2
Authentication:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
wherein a hologram is used to provide proof that a document
is not counterfeit or to make a document copy-proof.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
283, Printed Matter, for document authentification with
nominally recited holograms.
380, Cryptography, subclass 54 for modifying an optical
image in order to conceal or reveal a hidden message.
Subclass:
3
Having particular recording medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
in which details of the internal structure of a holos:graphic
recording medium is defined either physically or chemically.
(1) Note. An example of such a physical definition: "a
multilayer emulsion, each layer being sensitive to a
different color". A chemical defintion: "thermoplastic
tape".
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
Product Thereof, subclass 1 for holos:graphic processes
involving significant chemical processing steps composition
or product; and appropriate subclasses for radiation chemical
recording media, per se.
Subclass:
4
Recyclable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 3. Subject matter
in which the recording medium is of such a nature that the
recorded information can be erased to permit further
record-erase cycles.
(1) Note. Included here are photochromics, thermochromics,
dye cells, magnetic films, etc.
Subclass:
5
Magnetic material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 4. Subject matter
wherein the recording medium is a material which is alterable
by application of magnetic force.
Subclass:
6
Sandwich having photoconductor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 4. Subject matter
in which the recording medium is integral with a layer of
material which, when illuminated, undergoes a decrease in
resistance.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
257, Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors,
Solid-State Diodes), subclass 10, 11, 21, 53-56, 72, 113-118,
184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294, 414, 431-466, and 910
for light responsive active semiconductor devices.
Subclass:
7
Cyrstalline material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 4. Subject matter
in which the recording material is either a single crystal or
in polycrystalline form.
Subclass:
8
Having nonplanar recording medium surface:
This subclass is indented under subclass 3. Subject matter
in which an illuminated portion of the recording medium
surface is curved, as into a cylinder, or bent or folded
during recording or readout.
Subclass:
9
For synthetically generating a hologram:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
including means for providing a hologram of a single object
by other than a single exposure to the interference pattern
of light from the object as a whole and a reference beam.
(1) Note. Holos:graphic stereograms are considered
recordings of different images and are excluded from this
subclass.
(2) Note. Holos:graphic memories are excluded in which an
object beam is scanned so as to act as a page composer when
each bit is intended to be separately detected.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
23 for holos:graphic stereograms.
Subclass:
10
Using modulated or plural reference beams:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
in which a hologram is formed by interfering an
object-modulated beam with another beam which is spatially or
temporally modulated or with a plurality of other beams.
(1) Note. Phase modulation systems to compensate for object
motion and systems for extending the depth of fluid are
included here.
Subclass:
11
Spatial, phase or amplitude modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 10. Subject matter
in which the reference beam is modulated by changing its
phase, path length, or amplitude so as to have a nonuniform
wavefront.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
22 for spatial multiplexed holograms.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
365, Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 49
for associative holos:graphic memories.
Subclass:
12
Copying by holos:graphic means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
in which an image reconstructed from one hologram is used as
the object in making a second hologram.
(1) Note. Systems in which a holos:graphic analog to an
ordinary optical element is used to shape or form a beam used
to make a second hologram, but which does not by itself
provide the object information for the second hologram are
excluded. Such systems are classified based on the other
claimed features in subclass 1 and its indented subclasses.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
355, Photocopying, appropriate subclasses for photos:graphic
copying, in general.
399, Electrophotography, subclass 118 for optics with
particular modular or displaceable structure, subclass 137
optical intermediate storage of original image, subclasses
196+ for variable magnification during exposure, subclass 216
for slit exposure by pivoting mirror, subclass 218 for lens
used in exposure, and subclass 219 for fiber optics used in
exposure.
Subclass:
13
Head up display:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
wherein a first image is optically superimposed upon a second
image within a field of view.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
345, Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface
Processing, and Selective Visual Display Systems, 7 for
heads-up displays with selective electrical control.
Subclass:
14
Holograph on curved substrate:
This subclass is indented under subclass 13. Subject matter
wherein a holograph is formed on a medium which is not flat.
Subclass:
15
Using a hologram as an optical element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
wherein a holos:graphic equivalent to an ordinary optical
element is formed or used and wherein the holos:graphic
equivalent does not itself contain any intelligence or image
information more significant than a point image.
(1) Note. The optical elements for which the hologram may
be substituted include lenses, reflectors, diffusers,
gratings, polarizers, beam splitters or combiners, filters,
and phase plates or beam couplers.
Subclass:
16
With aberration correction:
This subclass is indented under subclass 15. Subject matter
which compensates for the inability of an optical system to
provide a point to point correspondence between an object and
its image.
Subclass:
17
Scanner:
This subclass is indented under subclass 15. Subject matter
in which a hologram is used to direct a beam of light
successively over the elements of a given region.
(1) Note. Systems using a holos:graphic element to convert
one scan pattern to another are included here.
Subclass:
18
Flat rotating disk:
This subclass is indented under subclass 17. Subject matter
where the scanning element is a planar surface, containing
holos:graphic segments, which is rotated about an axis normal
to the surface.
Subclass:
19
Lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 15. Subject matter
in which the holos:graphic equivalent is an optical device
which focuses light.
(1) Note. Holograms which are used to form a single image
of an extended two- or three-dimensional object are included
here.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
362 for compound lens systems.
642 for lenses.
Subclass:
20
Multiple point hologram (e.g., fly-eye lens, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 19. Subject matter
wherein a hologram, which simulates one produced by the
interference of two beams with one of the beams consisting of
a plurality of separate subbeams, is produced which is the
analog of a plurality of lenses in a plane such as lenticular
or fly eye lens array.
Subclass:
21
Having defined page composer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
including the details of the internal structure of a
changeable modulator, which serves as the principle object in
a system for making a plurality of holograms, where the
internal conditions of the modulator represent the
intelligence to be recorded in the holograms.
(1) Note. Systems in which a page composer is merely
nominally recited are excluded from this subclass and are
classified on the basis of the other claimed features in
subclass 1 and its indented subclasses.
Subclass:
22
For producing or reconstructing images from multiple
holograms (e.g., color, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
comprising systems specifically adapted for making a
plurality of holograms, simultaneously or sequentially, of
different intelligence or for reading out images from a
plurality of holograms.
(1) Note. Holos:graphic stereograms are classified in
subclass 23.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
9 for synthetically generating holograms.
23 for holos:graphic stereograms.
Subclass:
23
Holos:graphic stereogram:
This subclass is indented under subclass 22. Subject matter
including a series of holograms made from a series of
two-dimensional pictures of a three-dimensional object, each
picture representing a different parallactic view of the
object, and upon readout the hologram series represents a
three-dimensional view to an observer.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
9 for synthetically generating a hologram.
462 for nonholos:graphic stereoscopic devices.
Subclass:
24
Superimposed holograms only:
This subclass is indented under subclass 22. Subject matter
in which the plurality of holograms are fully overlapped on
the same recording medium only.
(1) Note. Typical subject matter of this subclass include
(a) holograms made with multicolor illumination and (b)
systems using spatial frequency multiplexing or pupil
separation.
Subclass:
25
Discrete hologram only:
This subclass is indented under subclass 22. Subject matter
in which the plurality of holograms are arranged in a
side-by-side relationship on only one integral recording
medium or have an equivalent fixed side-by-side spatial
relationship to each other such as in a frame having windows
containing the holo-grams.
(1) Note. Space division multiplexing systems wherein
holograms are discretely recorded and interlaced are included
here.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
23 for holos:graphic stereograms.
Subclass:
26
Sequential frames on moving film:
This subclass is indented under subclass 25. Subject matter
in which the plurality of holograms will, upon readout,
produce images whose spatial location will move as a function
of the movement of the holograms and in which movement of the
holograms is used to provide for sequential readout of the
individual images at a fixed location in space.
(1) Note. Holos:graphic movies or books and holograms of
time varying electrical signals are typical of the subject
matter included here.
Subclass:
27
Having particular laser source:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
including a laser as a light source wherein the physical or
chemical internal structure of the laser is explicity
defined.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for
lasers, per se.
Subclass:
28
Having multiple object beam or diffuse object illumination:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
in which a plurality of light beams are used to illuminate an
object whose image is to be recorded or in which the light
illuminating the object has been modulated by a diffuser or
the equivalent.
Subclass:
29
Fourier transform holography:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
where the transmission factor of a hologram closely
approximates a Fourier integral.
(1) Note. The Fourier Transform, F(w), of a function, f(t),
is given by
Subclass:
30
Having optical element between object and recording medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
comprising systems for producing holograms in which an
optical element, such as a lens, grating, mask, or mirror is
located in the path of the light between the object whose
image is to be recorded and the holos:graphic recording
medium and systems for reconstructing an image from such
holograms in which an equivalent optical element having an
equivalent spatial location relative to the holo-gram must be
used during readout.
Subclass:
31
Focused image holography:
This subclass is indented under subclass 30. Subject matter
in which an image of the intelligence to be recorded is
formed on, in, or very close to the recording medium when
producing a hologram or in which an image is formed on, in,
or very close to the hologram during readout.
Subclass:
32
For reconstructing image:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
used for reading out the intelligence recorded in a
hologram.
Subclass:
33
Real image:
This subclass is indented under subclass 32. Subject matter
for recon-structing a hologram made of an image formed by
light collected at a single point as opposed to a virtual
image.
Subclass:
34
With optical waveguide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
including one or more optically transparent elongated
structures (e.g., rods, fibers, or waveguides) are used to
transmit light rays from one point to another through modal
transmission or within the confines of their outer surfaces
through internal reflection.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical
waveguides, per se.
Subclass:
35
Hardware for producing a hologram:
This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter
including physical components (e.g., fittings, tools, or
metal equipment of a system, etc.) used in creating a
holos:graphic image.
Subclass:
107
OPTICAL COMPUTING WITHOUT DIFFRACTION:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein basic and more involved mathematical
processes of comparing, adding, substracting, multiplying,
dividing, integrating, etc., are perfomed by optical elements
on an optical beam prior to any conversion to another form of
energy.
(1) Note. The optical beam itself performs the computing.
(2) Note. The computing of this and the indented subclass
optically works on a single input optical beam to produce a
desired output optical beam, but this optical computing is
not intended to encompass convolution (crosscorrela-tion) or
correlation functions performed by a diffration grating.
(3) Note. Electrical computing for optical purposes without
any computation using an optical beam are not classified in
this subclass (See Search Class for Class 364, subclass
200).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
560 for convolution or cross-correlation using a diffraction
grating.
561 for correlation using a diffraction grating.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
235, Registers, 200 for fluid logic.
364, Electrical Computers and Data Pro-cessing Systems,
subclass 200 for general purpose programmable digital
com-puter systems, and subclass 900 for miscellaneous digital
data processing systems.
Subclass:
108
Logic gate:
This subclass is indented under subclass 107. Subject matter
wherein the optical beam performs the operation known to be
performed by an AND, OR, NOR, NOT, etc., gate and the optical
beam output is the resultant of the relationship of all the
input optical beams as designed prior to the application of
the optical beams.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
235, Registers, 200 for fluid gates.
326, Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, for electrical
digital logic circuits.
364, Electrical Computers and Data Processing Systems,
subclass 194 for data processing with specific algorithm.
Subclass:
109
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein an information signal is transmitted
through a medium between an optical transmitter and optical
receiver by means of variation in a characteristic of light
waves.
(1) Note. "Light" includes infrared and ultraviolet
radiation.
(2) Note. The characteristic which is varied may include,
e.g., amplitude, frequency, phase, polarity, or color.
(3) Note. This subclass includes subject matter that
communicates data or information from one location to another
via some optical system.
(4) Note. Apparatus having a source of light signal
containing information to be conveyed to a light source via
an optical link are classified in this and indented
subclasses regardless of the source being controlled by a
different form of energy (e.g., electrical or electromagnetic
field) or the optical output of the sensor being converted to
a different form of energy.
(5) Note. Optical communication to objects only within a
predetermined location (i.e., direction, etc.) from the
source would be classified in this or indented subclasses
since the prime objective is to communicate information and
the actual location is only a factor to ensure that the
message goes there. The detection of range, direction, etc.,
of the object, without any data communication to that object,
would be classified in Class 356.
(6) Note. Optical switching, per se, is classified in Class
385, Optical Waveguides, but optical switching to perform a
specified function would be classified with the function.
Optical switching in an optical communication system, where
data is moved from one location to another, is classified in
this or indented subclasses.
(7) Note. The optical telemetry of Class 340, subclasses
853.1+ and Class 340, subclasses 870.28+ includes the
combination of an optical communcation system, as in this
subclass or the indents thereunder, combined with a
particular claimed sensor. The optical communication systems
of this and indented subclasses transfer optical data from
one location to another via a data link but no specific
sensor is set forth in the claims. For example, wellbore
telemetry using any type of energy (i.e., radio, acoustic,
magnetic, optic, etc.) is classified in the single art area,
presently located in Class 340, subclasses 553+, since the
wellbore environment is important for searching. Telemetry
having a specified claimed sensor belongs with the type of
sensing or in Class 340, subclasses 870.28+, if not elsewhere
classified.
(8) Note. Optical communication by turning the light on and
off without any modulation of the transmitted light is
classified in Class 116, Signals and Indicators, subclass
20.
(9) Note. Optical communication in combination with
electrical communication (Class 455, Telecommunication or
Class 370, Multiplex Communications) is classified in this
class.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
115 for optical multiplex communication with plural signal
communication.
152 for optical transceivers.
174 for a repeater or relay which does not alter message
content.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
116, Signals and Indicators, appropriate subclasses (e.g.,
20) for hellios:graphic signalling wherein signals are given
by mechanically-controlled intermittant flashes of light,
usually reflected sunlight.
250, Radiant Energy, 200 for electrical circuits whose
operations are controlled by means of a photocell, electrical
circuits for supplying current and/or potential to a
photocell and photocells in combination with optical means
for controlling the radiant energy which illuminated the
photocell, subclasses 336.1+ for systems for detecting the
presence of or measuring the quantity or quality of invisible
radiant energy rays, and subclass 551 for an optical signal
isolator, per se.
257, Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors,
Solid-State Diodes), subclass 13, 79-103, and 918 for
incoherent light emitting injection luminescent devices.
315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems,
appropriate subclasses for control systems for controlling
the operation of electric lamps or discharge devices in which
system the lamp or discharge device is the endload.
329, Demodulators, for demodulation of modulated electrical
signals.
330, Amplifiers, subclass 59 for amplifiers having
light-controlled or activated devices (i.e., not optical
signal), and subclass 308 for amplifiers having radiant
energy impinging on a semiconductor.
331, Oscillators, subclass 66 for electrical oscillators
with a device responsive to heat or light.
332, Modulators, for modulators of electrical signals.
340, Communications: Electrical, 853 for wellbore telemetry
that could use optical energy, and subclasses 870.28+ for
telemetering systems employing radiant energy beam (e.g.,
Infrared) transmission.
342, Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices
(e.g., Radar, Radio Navigation), appropriate subclasses for
radio wave range and direction finding apparatus (Range and
Direction Finding).
348, Television, 335 for electro-optical means utilized in a
TV system.
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, 1 for motion picture
apparatus with sound accompaniment.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, 3 includes optics and
the optical range or remote distance finding apparatus,
subclasses 26+ include optical velocity measuring, and
subclasses 139+ include optical angle measuring or axial
alignment.
361, Electricity: Electrical Systems and Devices, 173 for
relay or electromagnet circuits utilizing photosensitive
devices.
362, Illumination, 257 for light source and subclasses 317+
for light modifiers.
365, Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 108
for liquid crystal radiant energy type.
369, Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, 100 for sound
recording or reproduction utilizing electrooptical
transducers or photos:graphic sound records.
372, Coherent Light Generators, for laser amplifiers and
oscillators.
374, Thermal Measuring and Testing, 121 in particular for
radiation responsive thermometers.
375, Pulse or Digital Communications, 219 for transceivers
operated at radio frequencies.
378, X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices.
379, Telephonic Communications, 56.1 for a light wave link
for speech or a paging signal, subclasses 74+ for remote
control over a telephone line, and subclasses 379+ for an
optical link between the line and switching system used as a
part of the line or loop condition detection.
380, Cryptography, subclass 54 for modifying an optical
image to appear to be something other than what it is, i.e.,
to change the content to not be understandable, and
subclasses 255 - 276 for communication system using
cryptography particularly subclass 256 for fiber optic
network using cryptography.
455, Telecommunications, for Radio Frequency
Telecommunications.
Subclass:
110
Diagnostic testing of optical communication:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein the system as a whole, not just a single piece of the
system, is evaluated prior to the communication use.
(1) Note. The overall combination of an optical
communication system having, for example, an optical link
between a transceiver and a repeater is classified in this
class.
(2) Note. If the transceiver, while operating in the total
optical communication system as classified in this class, is
being tested by a device using optical signals, the claimed
subject matter is classified in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
177 for monitoring an optical regenerative repeater during
operation.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, for optically testing of
individual pieces of an optical communication system.
subclass 73.1 for optical fiber or waveguide inspection.
714, Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
712 for the electrical testing of a transmission facility.
Subclass:
111
Interference signal transmission or elimination (e.g.,
jamming or antijamming):
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein a signal, used to interfere with a selected signal so
as to prevent the intelligible reception of the selected
signal, is either transmitted or eliminated.
(1) Note. The jamming signal of this subclass is
independent of the information signal.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
342, Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices
(e.g., Radar, Radio Navigation), 13 for radio wave jamming
and antijamming.
380, Cryptography, subclasses 252-254 for concealment of
information by masking (i.e., coding) of an interference
bearing signal.
455, Telecommunications, subclass 1 for in-terference signal
transmissions (e.g., jamming) that are telecommunication, not
optical signals.
Subclass:
112
Eavesdropping:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein the information content of an optical communication
message intended for one receiver is obtained surreptitiously
by another without the other parties being notified.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
379, Telephonic Communications, subclass 35 for listening-in
or eavesdropping type telephonic service monitoring or
observation.
Subclass:
113
Duplex:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein a single optical link between an optical transmitter
and receiver permits simultaneous transmission and reception
of plural optical signals in the same or opposite
directions.
(1) Note. Full duplex allows the simultaneous transmission
in either of two directions, but only one direction at a
time.
(2) Note. Half duplex allows data transmission in either of
two directions, but only one direction at a time.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
152 for optical transceivers which transmit a signal in
response to the received signal.
Subclass:
114
Wavelength division:
This subclass is indented under subclass 113. Subject matter
wherein bi-directional transmission over a single fiber is
permitted by causing two light beams to travel in different
wavelength bands and different directions within the same
medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
124 for wavelength division only in one direction within the
same medium for multiplexing purposes.
Subclass:
115
Multiplex:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein two or more information signals are controlled to be
interleaved or simultaneously transmitted in either or both
directions over a common (same) transmission medium in such a
manner that the information signals may be directly
recovered.
(1) Note. The use of a waveguide with an optical coupler
switch to effect the multiplexing would be classified in this
subclass.
(2) Note. Optical Time Slot interchange should not be
included in this class since all scrambling of any energy
type should go to Class 380, Cryptography.
(3) Note. Since optical demultiplex communication would
often require the use of a photocell to convert the optical
signal to an electrical signal, the demultiplexing is often
done electrically, which is not classifiable in Class 359.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
340, Communications: Electrical, 870.28 for telemetering
via radiant energy beam.
348, Television, 343 for camera optical multiplexing.
380, Cryptography, subclass 36 for time segment interchange
wherein slot portions of the signal are interchanged prior to
transmission in order to scramble the signal.
385, Optical Waveguides, 16 for the combination of a
waveguide and switch not included in an optical communication
system.
Subclass:
116
Mode:
This subclass is indented under subclass 115. Subject matter
wherein each light beam is applied to an optical cable at an
angle which differs from the other light beams in order to be
able to distinguish the light beams when they are applied to
the cable simultaneously.
Subclass:
117
Spatial or switching:
This subclass is indented under subclass 115. Subject matter
wherein multiple information beams are separated by the use
of a switch to selectively direct individual information
portions of a light beam to either separate individual light
conductive elements or separate directions in space.
(1) Note. This subject matter may include a waveguide with
a switch as a subcombination thereof (see Search Class Note
for Class 385).
(2) Note. The optical telemetry of Class 340, subclasses
853+ and Class 340, subclasses 870.28+, include the
combination of an optical communication system, as in this
subclass or the indents thereunder, combined with a
particular claimed sensor. The optical communication systems
of this and indented subclasses transfer optical data from
one location to another via a data link, but no specific
sensor is set forth in the claims. For example, wellbore
teleme-try using any type of energy (i.e., radio, acoustic,
magnetic, optic, etc.) belongs in the single art area,
presently located in Class 340, subclasses 553+, since the
wellbore environment is important for searching. Telemetry
having a specified claimed sensor belongs with the type of
sensing or in Class 340, subclasses 870.28+.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, 16 for the combination of a
waveguide and switch not included in an optical
communications system.
Subclass:
118
Optical local area network (LAN):
This subclass is indented under subclass 115. Subject matter
wherein multiple optical stations are interconnected via a
network of fiber optics to enable transmission and reception
between the stations.
(1) Note. Electrical wiring networks are excluded since
they are not optical waveguides.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
370, Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses for a
nonoptical bus transmission local area network having token
passing, loop or ring, etc.
385, Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for the
fibers themselves without the optical multiplex communication
environment.
Subclass:
119
Loop:
This subclass is indented under subclass 118. Subject matter
wherein the local area network consists of a series of
stations connected to each other and the last station is
connected to the first station.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
370, Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses,
particularly 222 for fault recovery of a ring or loop
network, subclass 258 for network configuration determination
in a ring system, subclasses 403+ and 406 for packet
switching in a ring network, and 452+ for channel assignment
by polling on a ring network.
Subclass:
120
Active star:
This subclass is indented under subclass 118. Subject matter
wherein an optical data distribution system, containing a
common node connected to one end of each of three or more
branches and the other end of the branches are connected to
each member of a local area network multiplex system, permits
optical information flow between all of the members; and each
member receives its power (i.e., active) from the received
optical signals.
(1) Note. A collision detection device in a star has its
own power supply yet the incoming optical signals are not
converted to electrical energy and this subject matter would
be classified in this subclass.
(2) Note. Incoming optical signals which become the source
of power within the star for all terminals as a result of
conversion into electrical signals would be classified in
this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
121 for passive star local area networks (LAN's).
Subclass:
121
Passive star:
This subclass is indented under subclass 118. Subject matter
wherein an optical data distribution system, containing a
common node connected to one end of each of three or more
branches and the other end of the branches are connected to
each member of a local area network multiplex system, permits
optical information flow between all of the members; and each
member has its own power supply (i.e., passive) and does not
change the power of the optical signals it receives from each
member.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
120 for active star local area networks (LAN's).
178 for a star in an optical repeater.
Subclass:
122
Polarization:
This subclass is indented under subclass 115. Subject matter
wherein the multiple signals are distinguished from one
another by the particular individual signal vibration
perpendicular to the ray direction of travel.
(1) Note. The vibrations are straight lines, circles, or
ellipses which produce, respectively, plane, circular or
elliptical polarization.
(2) Note. The light waves are modulated by altering the
polarization (relative to a reference) in accordance with the
information signal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
246 for electro-optical modulation of polarized light.
281 for magneto-optical modulation of polarized light.
301 for light wave directional modulation acting on
polarized light.
483 for polarization without modulation.
Subclass:
123
Time and frequency division:
This subclass is indented under subclass 115. Subject matter
wherein information is transmitted on different segments of a
transmission medium, which segments are divided based upon
the frequency spectrum and discrete time intervals.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
124 for frequency division multiplexing only.
135 for time division multiplexing only.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
370, Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses,
particularly subclass 330 and 436 for combined time and
frequency channels assignments in wireless or wired multiplex
communications, and subclass 478 for combined time and
frequency division multiplexing.
385, Optical Waveguides, 31 for the combination of a
waveguide and an input/output coupler not included in an
optical communications system.
Subclass:
124
Wavelength division/frequency division (includes scattering,
e.g., Raman, Brillouin, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 115. Subject matter
wherein (1) two or more information optical signals
simultaneously present on a common optical waveguide are
differentiated by optical wavelength or (2) the frequency
spectrum of the optical transmission medium is divided into
segments and respective information channels are transmitted
in differing segments.
(1) Note. Waveguide division multiplexing (fiber optics)
are identified as WDM.
(2) Note. Differing segments need not be associated on a
one-to-one basis with the information channels.
(3) Note. This subject matter may include waveguide with an
input/output coupler as a subcombination thereof (see Search
Class Notes for Class 385).
(4) Note. Stimulated Raman effect is the amplification,
built up strongly and generally exhibiting the characteristic
of stimulated emission of the small portion of light that is
scattered in random directions when a monochromatic light
beam of high intensity is transmitted through matter. This
small portion of light is equal to the frequencies of the
matter.
(5) Note. A Brillouin type nonlinear opitcal device
spontaneously scatters light in a medium by its interaction
with sound waves passing through the medium. If this
includes frequency shifted radiation with optical
multiplexing, it would go into this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
114 for optical transceiver wavelength duplex wherein two
optical beams having different wavelengths are transmitted in
opposite directions in the same medium.
123 for time and frequency division multi-plex.
149 for photophone wherein an audio signal is directly
modulated onto a light beam.
327 for Raman type frequency translators, per se.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
370, Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses,
particularly subclass 281 and 295 for frequency division in
wireless or wired nonoptical duplex systems, respectively,
and subclasses 343+ and 480+ for frequency division in
wireless or wired nonoptical multiplex communications
systems, respectively.
385, Optical Waveguides, 31 for the combination of a
waveguide and an input/output coupler not included in an
optical communications system.
Subclass:
125
Subscriber system:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124. Subject matter
comprising plural stations prearranged to enable preselected
stations to receive identified information at the same time
it is transmitted.
(1) Note. These systems transmit the data without any
coding, but the data itself identifies the specific stations
that are to receive the transmitted data.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
379, Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for
nonoptical subscriber checking.
380, Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for coding of the
information signal to prevent unauthorized users from
receiving the information.
Subclass:
126
Optical source at only one station:
This subclass is indented under subclass 125. Subject matter
wherein the optical beam communicated to all of the other
stations in the system originates from a single station.
(1) Note. This single station could be considered the
master station since it is the source of energy for all other
stations in the system.
Subclass:
127
By optical coupling:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124. Subject matter
wherein the multiplexing is accomplished by the optical
device itself, which permits the transfer of light from one
element to another.
(1) Note. The combination of an optical coupler or
input/output coupler, and wavelength division or frequency
division optical communication system is classified in this
subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, subclass 15 (optical coupler) and
31 (input/output coupler) for couplers not included in an
optical communication system.
Subclass:
128
Switch:
This subclass is indented under subclass 127. Subject matter
wherein the optical coupler selectively determines which
output receives the input light beam.
Subclass:
129
Prism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 127. Subject matter
wherein a beam is coupled in or out of a waveguide to
accomplish the desired multiplexing by one or more
transparent bodies bounded in part by two plane surfaces
which are angularly related (i.e., not parallel), at least
one of these surfaces being internally reflecting or
refracting to impinging incident light.
(1) Note. This subject matter includes the combination of a
prism and wavelength division or frequency division optical
communiction system (see Search Class Note for Class 385).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
831 for prisms, per se.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, subclass 36 for prism coupling not
included in an optical communication system.
Subclass:
130
Grating:
This subclass is indented under subclass 127. Subject matter
wherein (1) a beam is coupled in or out of a waveguide to
accomplish the desired multiplexing by narrow parallel slits
in a plate or (2) narrow parallel reflecting surfaces made by
ruling grooves on polished metal break up the light waves as
they emerge.
(1) Note. This subject matter includes the combination of a
grating and wavelength division or frequency division optical
communication system (see Search Class Note for Class 385).
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, subclass 37 for a grating coupling
not included in an optical communication sytem.
Subclass:
131
Lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 127. Subject matter
wherein a beam is coupled in or out of a waveguide to
accomplish the desired multiplexing by a trans-parent optical
component consisting of one or more pieces of optical glass
with the surfaces so curved (usually spherical) that they
serve to converge or diverge the transmited rays.
(1) Note. This subject matter includes the combination of a
lens and wavelength division or frequency division optical
communication system (see Search Class Note for Class 385).
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, subclass 33 for lens coupling not
included in an optical communication system.
Subclass:
132
Single source, electrically controlled:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124. Subject matter
wherein a single source of light is either wavelength
division or frequency division optical multiplexed via an
external electrical control signal.
Subclass:
133
Different sources:
This subclass is indented under subclass 124. Subject matter
wherein each channel of the common optical waveguide is
supplied with data from separate origins of light.
Subclass:
134
With pump:
This subclass is indented under subclass 133. Subject matter
wherein the atoms, in at least one of the sources of a
medium, are caused to be raised from certain lower to certain
higher energy levels to cause population inversion between
certain intermediate levels in order to ultimately produce
photons when the energy level moves from higher to lower
levels.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
160 for pumping in an optical transmitter and receiver
system.
345 for a particular pumping type in an optical amplifier.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, 69 for particular pumping
type which is not used for amplification of a light beam
input.
Subclass:
135
Time division:
This subclass is indented under subclass 115. Subject matter
wherein access to the optical transmission medium is divided
into discrete time intervals and information from respective
channels is transmitted in differing time intervals.
(1) Note. Differing time intervals need not be associated
on a one-to-one basis with the information channels.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
370, Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses,
particularly subclass 280 and 294 for time division in
wireless or wired nonoptical duplex systems, respectively,
and subclasses 345+ and 498+ for time division in wireless or
wired nonoptical multiplex communications systems,
respectively.
Subclass:
136
Multiple access (e.g., CSMA, CDMA):
This subclass is indented under subclass 135. Subject matter
wherein stations use a protocol to obtain access of a channel
before sending a packet of information.
(1) Note. Frequently, CSMA networks have a collision
detection capability in which the transmission is
immediatedly terminated when a collision of opposing carrier
signals is detected.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
370, Multiplex Communications, appropriate subclasses,
particularly 319, 329+, 342, 344, and 347+ for multiple
access in wireless communications, and 431+ for multiple
access in wired communications.
Subclass:
137
Subscriber System:
This subclass is indented under subclass 135. Subject matter
wherein the system is developed to communicate with
prearranged plural time division multiplexed stations, thus
enabling all preselected stations to receive identified
information at the same time it is transmitted.
(1) Note. These systems transmit the data without any
coding, but the data itself identifies the specific stations
that are to receive the transmitted data.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
379, Telephonic Communications, appropriate subclasses for
nonoptical subscriber checking.
380, Cryptography, appropriate subclasses for coding of the
information signal to prevent unauthorized users from
receiving the information.
Subclass:
138
By specific optical element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 135. Subject matter
wherein the time division optical multiplexing is produced by
specifically identified optical elements.
Subclass:
139
Optical switch:
This subclass is indented under subclass 138. Subject matter
wherein the input light beam is optically directed to
selected outputs in order to accomplish time division optical
multiplexing.
Subclass:
140
With delay:
This subclass is indented under subclass 135. Subject matter
wherein the time division optical multiplexing is
accomplished by the use of some delay of the input light
beam.
Subclass:
141
Underwater:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein optical communication is performed via a light beam
actually travelling through the water.
(1) Note. This communication can be used by underwater
divers.
(2) Note. This subject matter can also be used in
underwater repeaters.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
367, Communications, Electrical: Acoustic Wave Systems and
Devices, 131 for underwater acoustic communications
systems.
Subclass:
142
Remote control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein a variable device is used to modulate an optical
transmitter at a first location in order to control a remote
electrically operated second device at a second location via
an optical communication link between the transmitter and an
optical receiver located at the second location and connected
to the second device.
(1) Note. The devices herein specifically exclude devices
solely for making information or intelligence perceptible to
an individual.
(2) Note. Optical signal control devices for particular or
broadly recited art devices are classified in this subclass
unless there is provision for this combination in the art
devices.
(3) Note. Optical signal control devices for particular art
devices are classified with the art device if the features
thereof are particularly recited.
(4) Note. Optical telemetry includes the combination of an
optical data link between multiple locations together with a
specific sensor used in a particular environment. Since the
overall combination specifies an environment and specific
sensor, the environment or sensor will control the
classification. The following are examples of proper art
areas for optical telemetry: (a) Wellbore telemetry including
any type of radiant energy (i.e., optical, radio, etc.) is
classified in Class 340, subclasses 853.1+; (b) An optical
data link in combination with a specific sensor go to Class
340, subclasses 870.28+ unless there is a place for the
specific sensor in another class, other than Class 359.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
330, Amplifiers, subclass 59 for electrical amplifiers
combined with a nonmodulated light controlled or activated
device that is not part of the amplifying device.
379, Telephonic Communications, 74 for remote control over a
telephone line.
Subclass:
143
Bidirectional (i.e., monitoring or acknowledge):
This subclass is indented under subclass 142. Subject matter
wherein the optical equipment remotely controls the second
device, which is unrelated to the optical system, and either
(1) receives a response from the second device indicating
that the optical control signal was received or (2) monitors
the second device.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
340, Communications: Electrical, subclass 503 for an
electrical ring back acknowledgement condition responsive
indicating system and subclass 825.06 for electrical
monitoring or control.
Subclass:
144
In industrial environment (e.g., robot control):
This subclass is indented under subclass 142. Subject matter
wherein the second device, which is remotely controlled with
optical communication, is used in the production of some
manufactured product.
(1) Note. Although all patents in this subclass should be
placed in Class 901, subclass 47, as a cross-reference, no
orginal classifications can be placed in Class 901.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
901, Robots (Cross-Reference Art Collections), subclass 47
for optical sensing device.
Subclass:
145
With radio link:
This subclass is indented under subclass 142. Subject matter
wherein multiple remote devices are optically controlled via
a single optical beam, but the beam is only directed at one
device and this device relays control to another device via
radio waves.
Subclass:
146
Wth television or radio system:
Subject matter under subclasses 142 wherein the optical link
remotely controls a television or radio.
(1) Note. Optical beam control of a nominally recited T.V.
or video is classified in this subclass, but specifically
recited T.V. or video in combination with optical beam
control is classified in Class 386, subclasses 42+ and 128+.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
348, Television, subclass 734 for remote control receiver
circuitry by wired or radio circuits to electrically control
or mechanically control such as by a flexible shaft.
455, Telecommunications, 151 for analog modulated carrier
radio wave receivers with remote control of the receiver
tuning.
Subclass:
147
Switching:
This subclass is indented under subclass 142. Subject matter
wherein specific connections of the remote device are
controlled by an optical beam.
Subclass:
148
Plural functions:
This subclass is indented under subclass 142. Subject matter
wherein more than one control is activated via the optical
beam received at the remote device.
Subclass:
149
Photophone:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein an audio signal, as the information signal, is
directly modulated onto a light beam.
(1) Note. This subclass includes direct modulation of the
light beam by a sound responsive mechanical device (e.g., a
diaphragm).
(2) Note. The optical telephones of this subclass require
the use of an optical carrier for communication information.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
379, Telephonic Communications, 56.1 for a light wave link
for speech or a paging signal. These would include optical
telephones where connection is made through a telephone
operator or exchange.
Subclass:
150
Transducer, per se:
This subclass is indented under subclass 149. Subject matter
wherein the details of a device are specified, which produces
a conversion between an optical beam and nonoptical energy
(e.g., acoustic, electrical).
Subclass:
151
With optical fiber or waveguide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 150. Subject matter
wherein the transducer either contains an optical fiber or
waveguide or is connected to one.
(1) Note. An optical fiber or waveguide produces total
internal confinement of an optical beam.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical
fiber or waveguides, per se.
Subclass:
152
Optical transceiver:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein an optical transmitter and receiver are at a common
location for transmission and reception of separate signals,
and an optical signal is transmitted using some of the same
equipment used for the reception of another optical signal.
(1) Note. The optical transmitter and receiver are confined
to a common housing in a transceiver and termed "a station".
(2) Note. The simultaneous separation of a transmitter and
receiver is a duplex operation and is classified in subclass
113, Duplex.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
113 for a duplexer which uses a single transmission line to
both transmit and receive.
152 for optical transceivers in an optical communication
system.
154 for an optical transmitter and receiver system in an
optical communication system.
164 for plural stations having the transmitter and receiver
in different housings and locations.
174 for an optical repeater communication system.
180 for an optical transmitter in an optical communication
system.
189 for an optical receiver in an optical communication
system.
Subclass:
153
Including compensation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 152. Subject matter
wherein structure is provided within the optical transceiver
to eliminate any information errors that the transceiver
would produce while transmitting a response.
(1) Note. This compensation is to be effective to eliminate
noise, effects of temperature, or any errors produced on the
information signal caused by apparatus external or internal
to the communication system.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
161 for compensation in an optical communication transmitter
and receiver system.
Subclass:
154
Transmitter and receiver system:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein both the transmitter and receiver are located at
separate stations for point-to-point communication from the
transmitter at one location to the receiver at another
location, remote from the transmitter.
(1) Note. This includes active systems wherein the receiver
has its own power source for an optical beam activation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
152 for optical transceivers in an optical communication
system.
174 for an optical repeater communication system.
180 for an optical transmitter in an optical communication
system.
189 for an optical receiver in an optical communication
system.
Subclass:
155
Presence detection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein an optical transmitter and receiver system is used to
determine if an object is present within the range of the
optical beam.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
342, Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and
Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio Navigation), 27 for radio
frequency presence detection.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, 3 for range or remote
distance (e.g., height) finding, which is useful in
identifying the actual location of an object.
Subclass:
156
With polarization:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein the optical beam of the transmitter and receiver
system vibrates perpendicular to the beam's travelling
direction.
(1) Note. These vibrations are in straight lines (plane
polarization), circles (circular polarization), or ellipses
(elliptical polarization).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
192 for polarization in a heterodyne optical receiver.
Subclass:
157
One transmitter, plural receivers:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein optical information received at multiple locations is
delivered by a single transmitter.
Subclass:
158
With synchronization:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein all transmitters and receivers operate in the same
time frame and their respective clocks are maintained to be
at the same time and operating in an identical manner.
Subclass:
159
With alignment between transmitter and receiver:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein the transmitter and receiver are always pointed at
one another.
(1) Note. The alignment of this subclass is in an optical
communication system.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, 138 for axial alignment
which requires measuring to determine how to align, but not
in an optical communication environment; and subclasses 399+
for lateral alignment which moves the receiver or transmitter
for alignment between the two, but not in an optical
communication environment.
Subclass:
160
With pumping:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein the atoms of a medium at the transmitter are caused
to be raised from certain lower to certain higher energy
levels to cause a population inversion between certain
intermediate levels in order to ultimately produce photons
when the energy level moves from higher to lower levels.
(1) Note. This is a form of optical amplification.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
134 for a pump in at least one of the plural sources to
produce wavelength division or frequency division multiplex.
345 for a particular pumping type in an optical amplifier.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, 69 for particular pumping
type which is not used for amplification of a light beam
input.
Subclass:
161
With compensation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein structure is provided within the optical system to
eliminate from the transmitted response any information
errors that the system would produce.
(1) Note. This compensation is to be effective to eliminate
noise, effects of temperature, or any errors produced on the
information signal as the result of apparatus external or
internal to the communication system.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
153 for compensation in an optical transceiver.
Subclass:
162
With electrical oscillator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein the transmitter and receiver optical communication
system uses an electrical device whose output voltage or
current is a periodic function of time.
Subclass:
163
With optical circuit board:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein a waveguide breadboard is used to plug the
transmitter and receiver into any desired location along the
breadboard.
(1) Note. The circuit board is essentially an empty bus
with provision for plugging an optical transmitter and
receiver into it.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
107 for computing by the use of optical beams.
Subclass:
164
Plural stations:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
including at least two spaced apart stations each having a
transmitter which communicates with a receiver located remote
from the transmitter.
(1) Note. Since this subclass requires that a transmitter
communicate with a remote receiver, an adjacent transmitter
and receiver (i.e., within a single transceiver) do not
constitute a spaced apart station.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
152 for optical transceivers where the transmitter and
receiver are adjacent one another and within a single
housing.
Subclass:
165
Address directing connections:
This subclass is indented under subclass 164. Subject matter
wherein the optical beam is directed to the proper station as
a result of the station destination information (address)
attached to the communication data on the same optical beam.
(1) Note. The address is the optical code which identifies
which station is to receive the transmitted data.
Subclass:
166
Unidirectional or loopback:
This subclass is indented under subclass 164. Subject matter
wherein plural stations, each having both a transmitter and
receiver, are serially linked by the transmitter of the
preceding station transmitting to the receiver of the next
station and the last station of the system transmits to the
receiver of the first station of the system.
(1) Note. If one of the stations or lines develops a fault;
the last transmitted signal, which is not received by the
next station intended for receipt, will be returned (loop
back) to the preceding station so this station knows that the
transmitted signal has not been transmitted through the
entire system.
Subclass:
167
Central or master station:
This subclass is indented under subclass 164. Subject matter
wherein a single central or master station, having both an
optical transmitter and receiver, transmits to all of the
stations in the system and also receives responses from all
of the stations of the system.
(1) Note. The central or master station can broadcast via
optical signals or use fiber optic cables to link the
transmitted and received optical signals.
(2) Note. The central or master station can be used in an
asynchronous system of stations.
Subclass:
168
Passive system:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein the receiver derives its power to activate itself
from the beam transmitted by the transmitter.
(1) Note. The received light beam is the source for the
receiver.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
154 for an active system.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
200, Electricity: Circuit Makers and Breakers, subclass 310
for an electrical switch together with details of the
indicators; Dig. 47 light guide for indicators.
250, Radiant Energy, 227.11 for shutter type optical
switches.
Subclass:
169
Retroreflection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 168. Subject matter
wherein the transmitted response to a received optical beam
is transmitted in the opposite direction of the received beam
to ensure that the original transmitter receives the
response.
Subclass:
170
Retroreflection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein the transmitted response to a received optical beam
is transmitted in the opposite direction of the received beam
to ensure that the original transmitter receives the
response.
Subclass:
171
Received signal supplies power distribution to diverse
devices:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein the power for operation of devices unrelated to the
transmitter and receiver system is obtained from the received
signal.
Subclass:
172
Satellite communications:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
wherein communication is accomplished with either (1) a space
orbiting satellite or (2) a land satellite.
(1) Note. The satellite communicates light waves through
the air without the use of any optical conducting device.
(2) Note. The land satellite is usually located within a
computer room to control multiple computers within that room
or multiple rooms without the need to physically connect the
computers to the satellite via optical fibers or waveguides.
Subclass:
173
Including optical waveguide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 154. Subject matter
which further includes one or more transparent elongated
structures (e.g., rods, fibers, or pipes) which are used to
transmit light waves from one point to another within the
confines of their outer surface by means of internal
reflections or modal transmission.
(1) Note. An optical waveguide requires total internal
reflection.
(2) Note. This subject matter includes an optical waveguide
in combination with an optical transmitter and receiver
system (see Search Class Note for Class 385).
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, 227.11 for photocell control that could
be optical communication type modulator.
324, Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 95 for
measuring, testing, or sensing electricity, per se, with
waveguide or long line.
385, Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical
waveguide structure, per se.
Subclass:
174
Optical repeater system:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
including apparatus for receiving a light wave signal and
reradiating the signal at a different carrier frequency and
usually at a higher energy level or in a desired direction.
(1) Note. Where the transmitted signal has a different
information content than the received signal, classification
is not in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
152 for optical transceivers in an optical communication
system.
154 for an optical transmitter and receiver system in an
optical communication system.
180 for an optical transmitter in an optical communication
system.
189 for an optical receiver in an optical communication
system.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
178, Telegraphy, 70 for repeaters specific to telegraphy.
330, Amplifiers, for amplifier systems in general,
particularly subclass 10 for modulator-demodulator type
amplifiers for amplifying direct current or slowly varying
alternating current signals.
332, Modulators, subclass 183 for modulation converters for
converting one modulated wave to a differently modulated wave
(e.g., pulse modulation to frequency modulation or frequency
modulation to amplitude modulation); subclass 108 for plural
stage modulation systems wherein each stage is of the same or
diverse type of modulation, the last stage being of the pulse
modulation type; subclasses 119+ or 144+ for plural stage
modulation systems wherein the last stage is of the phase or
frequency modulation type; and subclasses 151+ for plural
stage modulation systems wherein the last stage is of the
amplitude modulation type.
333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, 117 for hybrid
type networks.
340, Communications: Electrical, subclass 291 for signal
box repeaters which repeat, for example, signals received at
a central station to a plurality of fire houses.
375, Pulse or Digital Communications, 211 for repeater for a
pulse or digital signal in the radio frequency range.
455, Telecommunications, 7 for repeaters for analog signals
in the radio frequency range.
Subclass:
175
Demodulating:
This subclass is indented under subclass 174. Subject matter
wherein the optical repeater extracts the information content
of the signal it receives prior to reradiating the signal at
the same or different carrier frequency.
(1) Note. Although there are various reasons for
demodulating prior to transmission, the following are
examples:
(a) To enable retransmission with a different modulation
than received, or
(b) The demodulation is necessary to determine the
reradiated destination for the received signal.
Subclass:
176
Regenerative:
This subclass is indented under subclass 174. Subject matter
wherein the repeater samples the incoming optical beam
without any demodulation and then transmits it with perfect
timing and no distortion.
(1) Note. This involves positive feedback of the incoming
signal.
Subclass:
177
Monitoring:
This subclass is indented under subclass 176. Subject matter
wherein the regenerative repeater includes apparatus to check
the system during operation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
110 for diagnostic testing of the optical communication
system prior to communication use.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, for optical testing of
individual pieces of an optical communication system, e.g.,
subclass 73.1 for optical fiber or waveguide inspection.
714, Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery,
712 for the electrical testing of the information content of
a transmission facility.
Subclass:
178
Star:
This subclass is indented under subclass 174. Subject matter
wherein an optical data distribution system contains a common
node connected to one end of each of three or more branches
and the other end of the branches are connected to
appropriate elements of an optical repeater.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
120 for an active star LAN.
121 for a passive star local area network (LAN).
Subclass:
179
Including optical waveguide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 174. Subject matter
which further includes one or more transparent elongated
structures (e.g., rods, fibers, or pipes) which are used to
transmit light waves from one point to another within the
confines of their outer surface by means of internal
reflections or modal transmission.
(1) Note. This requires total internal reflection.
(2) Note. This subject matter includes an optical waveguide
in combination with an optical repeater system (see Search
Class Notes for Class 385).
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, 227.11 for photocell control that could
be optical communication type modulator.
324, Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 95 for
measuring, testing, or sensing electricity, per se, with
waveguide or long line.
385, Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical
waveguide structure, per se.
Subclass:
180
Transmitter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
which converts information signals into modulated light wave
signals suitable for propagation through or along a
transmission medium.
(1) Note. There are some documents in this subclass that
use incandescent bulbs for the transmitter.
(2) Note. An optical transmitter contains an optical
modulator together with the other elements required to
communicate the information from one location to another via
an optical beam.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
152 for optical transceivers in an optical communication
system.
154 for an optical transmitter and receiver system in an
optical communication system.
174 for an optical repeater communication system.
189 for an optical receiver in an optical communication
system.
237 for optical modulators, per se.
Subclass:
181
With particular modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 180. Subject matter
wherein apparatus is set forth to include the information
signal in a specified manner onto a light wave carrier
entering the device.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
237 for optical beam modulation without a transmitter.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, 493.1 for radiant energy generation and
sources.
348, Television, for projection TV modulated laser beam which
requires scanning as distinguished from the optical
communication of Class 359.
369, Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 104
for a ribbon light modulator for radiation beam modification
of or by a storage medium.
372, Coherent Light Generators, subclass 38 for coherent
light generators with particular component circuitry.
Subclass:
182
Frequency modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 181. Subject matter
wherein the instantaneous amplitude of the information signal
(i.e., modulating signal) modulates a carrier so that its
instantaneous frequency differs from the carrier frequency by
an amount proportional to the information signal amplitude.
(1) Note. Combinations of phase and frequency modulation
are commonly referred to as frequency modulation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
183 for an optical transmitter using phase modulation.
Subclass:
183
Phase modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 181. Subject matter
wherein the instantaneous amplitude of the information signal
(i.e., modulating signal) modulates a sine-wave carrier so
that its instantaneous angle (i.e., phase) deviates from the
original (no-signal) angle by an amount proportional to the
information signal amplitude.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
182 for an optical transmitter using frequency or frequency
and phase modulation.
Subclass:
184
Pulse modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 181. Subject matter
wherein the carrier signal is transmitted in a series of
pulses, having a normally constant value with a variation of
a rise and a decay approaching infinitesimal duration, to
convey the information contained in the modulating signal.
(1) Note. This subclass includes pulse amplitude, delta,
and pulse frequency modulation.
(2) Note. Pulse amplitude modulation uses the amplitude of
the transmitted carrier signal to convey the information
contained in the modulating signal.
(3) Note. A delta pulse code modulation converts audio
signals into corresponding trains of digital pulses to
provide greater freedom from interference during
transmission.
(4) Note. Pulse frequency modulation varies the transmitted
pulse repetition rate as a function of the instantaneous
value of the information signal (i.e., modulating signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
186 for pulse time modulation.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices,
Circuits, and Systems, 100 for miscellaneous pulse parameter
(e.g., amplitude) control.
329, Demodulators, 311 for electrical pulse demodulators.
332, Modulators, 106 for electrical pulse modulators.
370, Multiplex Communications, subclass 533 for
multiplexers/distributors using pulse amplitude modulation.
375, Pulse or Digital Communications, subclass 353 for
electrical pulse amplitude modulation. Subclasses 259+,
301+, and 321+ for pulse or digital communications via
modulated carrier waves.
Subclass:
185
Pulse-code:
This subclass is indented under subclass 184. Subject matter
wherein the information signal is periodically sampled and
each sample is quantized and transmitted as a digital binary
code.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
186 for pulse time modulation.
Subclass:
186
Pulse time:
This subclass is indented under subclass 184. Subject matter
wherein the values of instantaneous samples of the
information signal (i.e., modulating signal) are made to
modulate the occurrence time of some characteristic of a
pulse carrier.
(1) Note. This subclass includes pulse position and pulse
width modulation.
(2) Note. Pulse position modulation modulates the position
in time of a transmitted pulse with respect to each sampled
instantaneous value of the information signal (i.e.,
modulating signal).
(3) Note. Pulse width, also identified as pulse duration,
modulation controls the width of the transmitted pulse
relative to each sampled instantaneous value of the
information signal (i.e., modulating signal).
Subclass:
187
With feedback:
This subclass is indented under subclass 180. Subject matter
wherein at least a portion of the optically transmitted light
wave is sampled and used to further control the transmitted
light beam.
(1) Note. The actual signal feedback that controls the
transmitter can be either optical or an electrical equivalent
of the sampled transmitted optical light beam.
Subclass:
188
Including optical waveguide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 180. Subject matter
which further includes one or more transparent elongated
structures (e.g., rods, fibers, or pipes) which are used to
transmit light waves from one point to another within the
confines of their outer surface by means of internal
reflections or modal transmission.
(1) Note. This requires total internal reflection.
(2) Note. This subject matter includes an optical waveguide
in combination with an optical transmitter (see Search Notes
for Class 385).
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, 227.11 for photocell control that could
be optical communication type modulator.
324, Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 95 for
measuring, testing, or sensing electricity with waveguide or
long line.
385, Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical
waveguide structure, per se.
Subclass:
189
Receiver:
This subclass is indented under subclass 109. Subject matter
wherein the information or modulating signal which has been
transmitted may be derived from the received modulated light
wave signals and converted into signals corresponding to the
information transmitted.
(1) Note. This classification is restricted to those
devices peculiar to light wave communication with information
modulated thereon not merely a nonmodulated light control
signal to control or activate an electrical amplifier in
Class 330, subclass 59.
(2) Note. An optical receiver contains an optical
demodulator together with other elements required to
communicate information from one location to another via an
optical beam.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
152 for optical transceivers in an optical communication
system.
154 for an optical transmitter and receiver system in an
optical communication system.
174 for an optical repeater communication system.
180 for an optical transmitter in an optical communcation
system.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, 206 for photocell controlled circuits
of general utility, and subclasses 336.1+ for invisible
radiant energy responsive electric signalling.
330, Amplifiers, subclass 59 for electrical amplifiers
combined with a nonmodulated light controlled or activated
device that is not part of the amplifying device.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, appropriate subclasses
for the measuring or testing of an optical property.
Subclass:
190
Homodyne:
This subclass is indented under subclass 189. Subject matter
wherein a locally generated voltage at the received carrier
frequency will result in a zero beat reception for detection
of the transmitted information signal.
(1) Note. This is also called a zero-beat demodulator.
(2) Note. Any further processing of the output of the
demodulator will use electrical signals since the
intermediate frequency (IF) output is outside the frequency
spectrum of optical signals.
(3) Note. An electrical or optical local oscillator used in
combination with a homodyne optical receiver is classified in
this subclass.
Subclass:
191
Heterodyne:
This subclass is indented under subclass 189. Subject matter
wherein the received wave is combined with a locally
generated wave in a nonlinear device to produce sum and
difference frequencies at the output.
(1) Note. This is also called a beat demodulator.
(2) Note. Any further breakdown of the output of the
demodulator will use electrical signals since the
intermediate frequency (IF) output is outside the frequency
spectrum of optical signals.
(3) Note. An electrical or optical oscillator used in
combination with a heterodyne optical receiver is classified
in this subclass.
Subclass:
192
With polarization:
This subclass is indented under subclass 191. Subject matter
wherein the heterodyne optical demodulating receiver is used
to detect a light wave having vibrations perpendicular to the
direction of travel of the light beam.
(1) Note. These vibrations are in straight lines (plane
polarization), circles (circular polarization), or ellipses
(elliptical polarization).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
156 for polarization in an optical transmitter and receiver
communication system.
190 for homodyne demodulation.
246 for electro-optic modulation of polarized light.
281 for magneto-optic modulation of polarized light.
301 for light wave directional modulation acting on
polarized light.
483 for polarization without modulation.
Subclass:
193
With optical element (e.g., lens, mirror, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 189. Subject matter
wherein an optical receiver comprises some type of optical
device such as a lens, etc., other than an optical
waveguide.
(1) Note. The optical elements for this subclass are those
defined as being classified in Class 359, not the optical
waveguides of Class 385.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
195 for an optical receiver with an optical waveguide.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical
waveguide structure, per se.
Subclass:
194
Automatic gain control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 189. Subject matter
wherein the amplitude of an output signal amplitude is
maintained constant either by an optical or electrical
device.
(1) Note. This control must be in the environment of an
optical receiver.
Subclass:
195
With optical waveguide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 189. Subject matter
which further includes one or more transparent elongated
structures (e.g., rods, fibers, or pipes) which are used to
transmit light waves from one point to another within the
confines of their outer surface by means of internal
reflections or modal transmission.
(1) Note. An optical waveguide requires total internal
reflection.
(2) Note. The combination of an optical receiver with an
optical waveguide as defined in Class 385 is classified in
this subclass (see Search Class Note for Class 385).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
193 for an optical receiver in combination with an optics
element as classified in Class 359.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, subclass 206 for photocell control that
could be an optical communication type modulator.
324, Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 95 for
measuring, testing, or sensing electricity, per se, with
waveguide or long line.
385, Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical
waveguide structure, per se.
Subclass:
196
DEFLECTION USING A MOVING ELEMENT OR MEDIUM (OFFSETTING OR
CHANGING AT LEAST A PORTION OF THE BEAM):
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter comprising structure for offsetting or
changing the direction of at least a portion of the incident
light by moving a light reflecting or transmitting element or
medium into or out of the light beam or by changing the
position of a reflecting or transmitting element or medium in
the light beam.
(1) Note. A prism may be employed for refracting or
reflecting light. Prism reflections are considered to be
internal reflections; that is, the light is inside the prism
body before and immediately after reflection. Light beam
deflection by a movable prism is included in this subclass.
(2) Note. Lenses or curved surface mirrors movable for
focusing are classified elsewhere in this class.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
197 for light beam deflection by a periodically moving
element.
298 for light wave directional modulation.
577 for light control by light interference.
831 for prisms in general.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, 503.1 for an invisible radiation source
with a radiation modifying member, in general, and subclasses
505.1+ for radiation-controlling elements, per se, exclusive
of infrared, visible, and ultraviolet types.
348, Television, for mechanical-optical scanning by moving a
lens or refractor.
Subclass:
197
Using a periodically moving element (periodic change of
optically reflecting, refracting or diffracting element):
This subclass is indented under subclass 196. Subject matter
including an optically reflecting, refracting, or diffracting
element as the scanning element whose orientation is changed
in a periodic manner.
(1) Note. The motion of reflectors resulting from vehicle
vibration, the motion of vehicle wheels, the action of wind,
etc., is considered to be of an irregular nature and not
periodic within the meaning of this definition.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
227 for light interrupting by means of movable elements
containing alternating transparent and opaque areas.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
348, Television, 195 for mechanical-optical scanning and
subclasses 474+ for a facsimile scanning signal generator.
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 84 for high speed
cameras which use rotating optical elements and subclasses
105+ for motion picture optical rectifiers using rotating or
scanning optical elements.
358, Facsimile and Static Presentation Processing, 474 for a
facsimile scanning signal generator.
Subclass:
198
Particular mount or driver for element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter
wherein details of the structure for supporting the moving
element or for moving it are claimed.
Subclass:
199
Particular oscillating driver:
This subclass is indented under subclass 198. Subject matter
wherein a specific device imparting back and forth motion to
the element is recited.
Subclass:
200
Bearing or shaft for rotary driver:
This subclass is indented under subclass 198. Subject matter
wherein a specific rod transmitting rotational motion from a
driver or the supporting device within which the rod turns is
recited.
Subclass:
201
Plural moving scanning elements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter
wherein deflection is achieved by multiple optical elements
which are not stationary.
Subclass:
202
X-Y scanner:
This subclass is indented under subclass 201. Subject matter
wherein the multiple elements cause a deflection of light in
two mutually perpendicular directions.
Subclass:
203
Having a common axis of rotation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 201. Subject matter
wherein the multiple elements revolve around the same line.
Subclass:
204
Utilizing plural light beams:
This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter
wherein the periodically moving element deflects or scans
more than a single light beam simultaneously.
Subclass:
205
Having particular focusing element to receive scanned light:
This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter
wherein a specific optical element gathers light from the
actual scanning element.
Subclass:
206
High distortion lens (e.g., fQ lens, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 205. Subject matter
including a lens which forms an image which is not in
proportion to a respective image source.
(1) Note. An fQ lens is one in which the image height is
equal to the product of the lens focal length and the angle
at which a beam enters the lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
662 for an fQ lens, per se.
Subclass:
207
Anamorphic element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 205. Subject matter
including an element (usually a lens) for producing
magnification in a first plane which differs from that in a
plane perpendicular thereto.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
668 for an anamorphic lens, per se.
Subclass:
208
Concave reflector:
This subclass is indented under subclass 205. Subject matter
wherein a mirror-like element indented away from incident
light receives the scanned light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
838 for reflectors, in general.
Subclass:
209
Including transmissive type moving element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter
wherein the medium of the scanning element permits the
passage of light rays.
Subclass:
210
Having moving lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 209. Subject matter
including opposed shaped and spaced refracting surfaces
either of a (1) single transparent mass or (2) plurality of
such masses arranged in series along an optical axis to
produce a single output image from an object, which are both
external to the mass or masses, from the object light rays
passing therethrough.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
642 for lenses generally.
Subclass:
211
Having moving prism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 209. Subject matter
including one or more transparent bodies bounded in part by
two plane surfaces which are angularly related (i.e., not
parallel), at least one of these surfaces being internally
reflecting or refracting to impinging incident light.
(1) Note. A prism may be employed for refracting or
reflecting light. Prism reflections are considered to be
internal reflections; that is, the light is inside the prism
body both before and immediately after the reflection.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
592 for refracting elements employed in natural light
directing systems.
606 for prismoidal antiglare mirrors.
618 for plural path optical systems which divide or combine
the light paths.
831 for a prism, per se.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, 51 for optical test
devices having prisms used in the infrared or ultraviolet
range alone or in combination with visible light, subclasses
300+ for prism type spectroscopic instruments, and subclasses
331+ for prism type monochromators.
Subclass:
212
Including reflective type moving element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 197. Subject matter
wherein a light wave that strikes the medium of the moving
element is returned to the original medium with the angles of
incidence and reflection equal and lying in the same plane.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
838 for reflectors in general.
Subclass:
213
Having oscillating element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 212. Subject matter
wherein the reflecting element has oscillating or vibrating
motion.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
520 for signal reflectors vibrating, oscillating, and
rotating.
Subclass:
214
Single plane mirror element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 213. Subject matter
wherein the element is unitary, flat and reflecting.
Subclass:
215
With imaging lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 214. Subject matter
having a lens typically referred to as an imaging lens.
Subclass:
216
Having multifaceted rotating element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 212. Subject matter
wherein the reflecting element has plural sides or faces.
Subclass:
217
With facets parallel to rotation axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 216. Subject matter
wherein the faces or sides of the reflective element are
parallel to the axis of rotation.
Subclass:
218
Having six, seven, or eight facets:
This subclass is indented under subclass 217. Subject matter
wherein the element has more than five facets and less than
nine facets.
Subclass:
219
Having five or fewer facets:
This subclass is indented under subclass 217. Subject matter
wherein the element has less than six facets.
Subclass:
220
Having planar rotating reflector with transverse rotation
axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 212. Subject matter
wherein the faces of the rotating reflector are not curved
and the faces are tilted with respect to the rotation axis.
Subclass:
221
Having planar rotating reflector with rotation axis in its
plane:
This subclass is indented under subclass 212. Subject matter
wherein the faces of the rotating reflector are not curved
and the faces are parallel to the axis of rotation.
Subclass:
222
By frustrated total internal reflection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 196. Subject matter
wherein a light transparent element has a surface adjacent a
second element or medium which is movable into and out of
optical contact with the surface.
(1) Note. A light beam incident on the surface undergoes
total internal reflection. By bringing the second element or
medium into proximity with the surface of the transparent
element, total internal reflection becomes frustrated and the
light beam is no longer totally internally reflected, but
instead, is passed into the second element or medium.
Subclass:
223
By moving a reflective element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 196. Subject matter
wherein the direction of at least a portion of an incident
light beam is offset or changed by moving a light-reflecting
element into or out of the light beam or by changing the
orientation of the reflecting element in the light beam.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
196 for light beam deflection by a movable reflective
prism.
212 for light beam deflection by periodically moving
reflectors.
291 for light control by deforming or flexing a reflector.
838 for reflectors or reflecting systems in general.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, subclass 230 for reflection-type light
valves used in photocell systems.
324, Electricity: Measuring and Testing, subclass 97 for
galvanometers of the light beam type.
348, Television, 203 for mechanical-optical scanning by a
moving reflector.
Subclass:
224
Reflective element moved by deformable support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein a support element is extended or contracted to modify
the position of the reflecting element.
Subclass:
225
Pivoting or moving in circular arc:
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein the motion of the moving element traces out a portion
of a complete revolution.
Subclass:
226
Rotating:
This subclass is indented under subclass 223. Subject matter
wherein the reflective element revolves completely around an
axis.
Subclass:
227
LIGHT CONTROL BY OPAQUE ELEMENT OR MEDIUM MOVABLE IN OR
THROUGH LIGHT PATH:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter comprising the control of the amount of light
transmitted through an area defined by an optical beam via an
element or material, which is either completely opaque or
opaque only in certain portions whereas the other portions
are transparent, by (1) selectively intercepting the light
path by the element or (2) changing the orientation of the
element within the light path.
(1) Note. Where the element is not substantially opaque,
but is used to reduce the light intensity, the subject matter
is not classified here but in subclass 889.
(2) Note. Class 359 provides for optical diaphragms and
shutters, per se, in subclasses 227+ for lenses combined with
shutters generally in subclasses 738+, and for lenses
combined with diaphragms generally in subclasses 739+.
However, a camera shutter and diaphragm, per se, are
classifiable in Class 396, Photography, subclasses 452+ and
subclasses 505+ respectively, the indicated use in cameras or
camera background being sufficient for classification in
Class 396 as opposed to Class 359. Class 396 also provides
for lenses broadly or specifically combined with camera
shutter or diaphragm details, it being emphasized that such
combinations involving noncamera shutters or diaphragms or
plural disclosures of utility are classified in subclasses
738+ and 739+ of Class 359 as indicated above. The
combination of a lens broadly or specifically claimed and a
camera shutter or diaphragm broadly claimed are classifiable
in subclasses 738+ and 739+ of this class (359).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
196 for light deflection by a moving element.
738 for light controlling means combined with a lens.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
396, Photography, particularly 452 and 505+ for shutters and
diaphragms used in cameras and see (2) Note above.
Subclass:
228
Fluid:
This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter
including a liquid or gas.
(1) Note. The fluid itself or an element in the fluid may
constitute the light controlling element.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
296 for realignment or repositioning of particles (possibly
opaque) suspended in a fluid in response to an applied
field.
665 for a fluid lens.
886 for a fluid filter.
Subclass:
229
With glare or flicker elimination:
This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter
comprising structure for equalizing light intensity reaching
the eye or for reducing glare or flicker.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
601 for generic glare reduction.
Subclass:
230
Electro-mechanical:
This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter
wherein electrical energy is used to control the movement of
the light controlling element.
(1) Note. This includes solenoid and tuning fork structures
and electrostatic type effects.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
228 for electro-mechanically controlled light control
systems using a liquid.
Subclass:
231
String or ribbon type:
This subclass is indented under subclass 230. Subject matter
wherein electric current is applied across a resilient,
electrically conducting opaque element which as a result of
its location in the field of an electromagnet vibrates, thus
interrupting a light path or a portion thereof in accordance
with variations in the current or in the strength of the
field of the electromagnet.
Subclass:
232
Slit type:
This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter
wherein the light controlling structure comprises a pair of
jaws having opposed parallel edges which can be moved toward
or away from each other and which can be fixed in a variety
of intermediate positions between fully open and fully
closed.
(1) Note. Typically the location of the center of the slit
remains fixed.
Subclass:
233
With relative motion of two apertured elements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter
where the light control results from the relative movement of
two opaque elements, each containing openings which allow
light to pass.
Subclass:
234
With rotating or pivoting element (e.g., scanning discs):
This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter
comprising means wherein the light control results from
revolving, completely or partially, an opaque element or an
element containing opaque and transparent portions.
(1) Note. Included here are generic optical shutters or
diaphragms, per se, which have rotating vanes or blades.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
229 for similar subject matter used in reducing glare.
233 for two relative moving apertured elements which may
rotate.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, 201.1 for scanning elements of this
type used in photo-cell controlled optical systems and
subclass 232 for the combination of a light chopper and
photocell.
Subclass:
235
Continuously rotating apertured element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 234. Subject matter
wherein the light controlling element revolves nonstop during
the operation of the device.
(1) Note. Apertures as used here encompass slots removed
around the periphery of an otherwise opaque element.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
233 for relative motion of two apertured elements where one
may be continuously rotating.
Subclass:
236
Element rotates about axis perpendicular to light path:
This subclass is indented under subclass 234. Subject matter
wherein the light controlling element is revolved about an
axis substantially at right angles to the direction of the
light rays.
Subclass:
237
OPTICAL MODULATOR:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein an optical element varies a
characteristic of a traversing optical light beam in direct
proportion to an applied time-varying signal which may be in
any energy form.
(1) Note. Characteristics of a traversing light beam that
may be varied include its direction or characteristics such
as amplitude, frequency, phase, or polarization.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
109 for optical communication systems or devices which may
include an optical modulator.
325 for an optical demodulator, per se.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, 200 for photocell circuit and
subclasses 503.1+ for an invisible radiation source with a
radiation modifying member, generally.
332, Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators of an
electrical wave.
348, Television, 195 for mechanical-optical scanning.
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 84 for high speed
cameras which use rotating optical elements and subclasses
105+ for motion picture optical rectifiers using roatating or
scanning optical elements.
372, Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for
lasers including internal light control apparatus.
385, Optical Waveguides, 1 and 4+ for light wave modulation
within an optical waveguide.
396, Photography, particularly 452 and 505+ for shutters and
diaphragms used in cameras and see (2) Note in subclass 227
above.
Subclass:
238
Light wave temporal modulation (e.g., frequency, amplitude,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 237. Subject matter
wherein a device varies a property of light which is a
function of time only as it traverses the device where such
variation is in accordance with the applied varying signal
which can be of any energy form.
(1) Note. Such properties of the traversing light include
amplitude, frequency, or phase.
(2) Note. Optical modulation occuring exclusively within a
waveguide is classified in Class 385.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
298 for directional modulation.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, 1 for light temporal modulation
inside of a waveguide.
Subclass:
239
Modulator output feedback to modulator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 238. Subject matter
wherein the light beam output from the modulator is fed back
into the modulator input.
Subclass:
240
Changing bulk optical parameter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 238. Subject matter
comprising structure for controlling a light parameter by
changing a bulk optical parameter of an optically
transmitting medium.
(1) Note. "Bulk optical parameter" refers to those inherent
internal characteristics of an optical element which can be
defined by mathematical expressions describing their effect
on light radiation (e.g., index of refraction,
transmissivity, etc.) and which can be changed without
producing a significant change in the shape, size, or
contours of the optical element itself.
(2) Note. Included here are devices in which an optical
parameter of the light control element is changed as a result
of an applied electrical or magnetic field, an applied
acoustic wave, a change in chemical structure, or by any
other mechanism which primarily alters the bulk optical
parameters rather than the physical shape, size, or contours
of an optical medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
577 for light control by light interference.
738 for light controlling structure combined with a lens.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
345, Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface
Processing, and Selective Visual Display Systems, 48 and 84+
for selective electrical control of displays having
light-controlling display elements.
372, Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for
lasers including light control means.
Subclass:
241
By actinic radiation (e.g., photochromic):
This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter
wherein an optical parameter of the light control element is
changed by or in response to either the light to be
controlled or a separate external source of optical
radiation.
Subclass:
242
Display device:
This subclass is indented under subclass 241. Subject matter
wherein the temporal modulation is in an information
conveying element.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
345, Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface
Processing, and Selective Visual Display Systems, 1 for
visual display systems with selective electrical control.
Subclass:
243
Bistable device:
This subclass is indented under subclass 241. Subject matter
wherein an optical device has two distinct, stable output
states which toggle between one another by a single
application of actinic radiation.
Subclass:
244
Opto-optical device:
This subclass is indented under subclass 241. Subject matter
wherein the temporal modulation is achieved by an externally
applied modulating light wave.
Subclass:
245
Electro-optic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter
wherein the optical properties (e.g., index of refraction) of
an optical element are changed in response to an applied
electrical signal.
Subclass:
246
Modulation of polarized light via modulating input signal:
This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter
wherein a property of a polarized optical beam, such as
amplitude, phase, polarization, frequency, or color are
varied in a controlled manner by the applied electrical
signal.
Subclass:
247
Using reflective or cavity structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter
wherein the modulation is effected by structure which
redirects the entire beam or a part of the beam at an angle
equal to that of incidence, or wherein the medium through
which the beam passes is confined in a cavity.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
302 for reflecting structures used in beam deflection.
Subclass:
248
Semiconductor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 247. Subject matter
wherein barrier layer (i.e., semiconducting) material is used
in the modulating structure, generally, as a variable
reflector.
Subclass:
249
Compensation technique:
This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter
wherein unwanted effects due to the action of the medium or
the field on the beam such as those due to temperature,
birefringences, or color are eliminated.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
250 for plural mediums in the beam path where the plural
mediums are not for the purpose of compensation.
Subclass:
250
Using plural mediums:
This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter
wherein more than one medium or structure, each of which
modulates the beam, are provided.
(1) Note. The mediums or structures in the beam path,
layered mediums transverse to the beam path or parallel
paths, each containing a medium where the output beam is the
result of the combined action of the medium or structure.
Not all of the mediums need to be field responsive.
(2) Note. Initial polarizers and final analyzers are not
considered part of the plural mediums where the only affect
is to select a polarization. Plural areas formed by a matrix
of electrodes whose sole function is to act on a portion of
the beam are not considered plural mediums. Nonbirefringent
lenses are also not considered a medium in the sense of the
definition.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
249 for plural mediums where the purpose of the mediums is
compensation.
301 for plural mediums used to deflect the beam or a portion
of the beam.
497 for polarization achieved by plural birefringent
elements.
Subclass:
251
With particular direction of the field in relation to the
medium, beam direction or polarization:
This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter
wherein details of the medium are given, especially crystal
cut or orientation, and the direction of the applied field is
specified in relation to the medium or in relation to the
incident beam direction or polarization.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
252 for a particular medium where no field directional
particulars, in relation to the medium, are specified.
Subclass:
252
With particular medium or state of the medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter
wherein the details of the medium structure, state of the
medium, shape of the medium, or treatment of the medium are
recited.
(1) Note. For classification herein, there should be more
than just the recitation of the name or abbreviation of the
name of the material.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
251 where details of the medium are combined with a
particular field direction.
488 for a particular medium used for reflectively or
refractively polarizing light.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
23, Chemistry: Physical Processes, for preparation or
treatment of nonmetallic elements involving only physical
treatments.
252, Compositions, for compositions, per se.
264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes, for melt shaping or treatment of nonmetallic
materials.
423, Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for nonmetallic
elements and for processes for producing nonmetallic elements
involving a chemical reaction.
Subclass:
253
Liquid medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 252. Subject matter
wherein the medium is in a nongaseous fluid state.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
36 for similar structures using liquid crystals for the
medium.
Subclass:
254
With particular electrode structure or arrangement, or medium
mounting structure or arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter
wherein the physical structure, geometry or arrangement of
the electrodes is detailed or there is detailed mounting
structure for the medium (e.g., to prevent physical
distortion).
(1) Note. Included here are structures which perform
auxiliary functions such as protection or index matching.
Also, see subclasses 488 and 500.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
251 for the arrangement of the electrodes as related to the
medium for a particular direction of the field in combination
with details of the medium.
253 for those structures used with a liquid medium where the
structure is peculiar to the medium.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
310, Electrical Generator or Motor Structure, 365 for
electrode arrangements with respect to a piezoelectric
element.
Subclass:
255
With particular field:
This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter
wherein the field which modulates the medium is of a specific
magnitude, phase, or frequency or is of a specific type
(e.g., pulse).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
251 for a field direction or polarization specified in
relation to the medium (e.g., crystal cut).
484 for polarization by an applied magnetic field.
Subclass:
256
With birefringent element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter
including an element having the property of dividing a ray or
beam of energy into two polarized rays or beams (known as the
ordinary and extraordinary rays), the directions of
polarization being at right angles to each other.
(1) Note. A birefringent material which has been treated
with a dichroic dye to absorb the ordinary or extraordinary
ray is no longer considered to be birefrin-gent within the
meaning of this definition. A birefringent element in the
form of a Nicol prism, where the unwanted ray is deflected,
is classified here.
Subclass:
257
Pockel's cell:
This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter
wherein the variation of a polarized light characteristic is
achieved by an element which advances or retards the phase of
an induced ordinary wave relative to the extraordinary wave
when the electrical signal is applied.
Subclass:
258
Kerr cell:
Subject matter under 246 wherein the variation of a polarized
light characteristic is achieved by an element including a
material (usually liquid) whose refractive index change is
proportional to the square of the field of the applied
electrical signal.
Subclass:
259
Plural modulation cells:
This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter
wherein the temporal light modulator utilizes multiple
elemental units each of which is electro-optically
controlled.
Subclass:
260
Etalon structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter
wherein the modulating structure consists of two parallel
dielectric mirrors separated by an active electro-optic
material.
Subclass:
261
Multiple reflections within cell:
This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter
wherein the electro-optic temporal modulator includes plural
internal redirections of the light passing therethrough.
Subclass:
262
Excitation by electron beam:
This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter
wherein a collimated ray of electrons applied to the
modulator is used to vary a temporal characteristic of the
light passing therethrough.
Subclass:
263
By reflection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter
wherein the electro-optic temporal modulator includes a
single internal redirection of the light passing
therethrough.
Subclass:
264
Pulse Modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter
wherein a parameter of a train of optical pulses is varied in
accordance with the amplitude of the applied signal.
(1) Note. Pulse modulation may involve changes in pulse
amplitude (pam), pulse position (ppm), or pulse duration
(pdm).
(2) Note. Pulse modulation includes pulse-code modulation
wherein the light beam is transmitted as a digital binary
code.
(3) Note. This subclass will include a combination of pulse
modulation with amplitude, frequency, or phase modulation.
Subclass:
265
Electrochromic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter
wherein the electrical signal applied to the optical control
element produces a color change in the element resulting in a
change in the absorption characteristics of the element at a
given wavelength of light.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
345, Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface
Processing, and Selective Visual Display Systems, subclass 49
and 105 for selective electrical control of displays having
electrochromic display elements.
349, Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate
subclasses for liquid crystal light modulators.
Subclass:
266
Particular nonplanar electrode arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 265. Subject matter
wherein solid electrically conductive elements within the
electrochromic device are not located on a single flat
surface.
Subclass:
267
Reflection-type (e.g., display device):
This subclass is indented under subclass 265. Subject matter
wherein the modulator utilizes a surface upon which light
strikes and which is coated with a material that
simultaneously changes color with the applied electrical
signal and reflects a significant portion of incident light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
275 for transmission-type (e.g., windows).
Subclass:
268
Complementary device:
This subclass is indented under subclass 267. Subject matter
wherein an oxidizing material operates in conjunction with a
reducing material.
Subclass:
269
Particular counter electrode:
This subclass is indented under subclass 267. Subject matter
wherein details are recited of an electrode (the
counter-electrode) which actually takes part in the
electrochromic reaction.
Subclass:
270
Particular electrolyte layer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 267. Subject matter
which recites details of an electrically conductive liquid
layer which transports ions between the electrochromic
material and the counter electrode.
Subclass:
271
Particular planar electrode pattern:
This subclass is indented under subclass 267. Subject matter
including an electrically conductive solid element having a
configuration which is uniformly flat.
Subclass:
272
Liquid cell:
This subclass is indented under subclass 267. Subject matter
wherein the device comprises a cell containing a substance
which is in a state intermediate that of a solid and a gas.
Subclass:
273
Particular electrochromic layer structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 267. Subject matter
which specifies details of the form of the electrochromic
substance.
Subclass:
274
Diverse layer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 267. Subject matter
including a specified miscellaneous layer within the
reflection-type electrochromic device.
(1) Note. This might include, for example, an insulating
layer.
Subclass:
275
Transmission-type (e.g., windows):
This subclass is indented under subclass 265. Subject matter
wherein the modulator utilizes a surface upon which light
strikes which is coated with a material that simultaneously
changes color with the applied electrical signal and
transmits a significant portion of incident light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
267 for reflection-type (e.g., display device).
Subclass:
276
Amplitude modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter
wherein the amplitude of a constant frequency optical wave
varies in synchronization with the amplitude of the applied
signal (i.e., modulating signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
284 for magneto-optic amplitude modulation.
286 for acousto-optic amplitude modulation.
289 for thermal-optic amplitude modulation.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
345, Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface
Processing, and Selective Visual Display Systems, 48 and 84+
for selective electrical control of displays having
light-controlling display elements.
Subclass:
277
Within display element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 276. Subject matter
wherein the amplitude modulator is in an information
conveying element.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
345, Computer Graphics Processing, Operator Interface
Processing, and Selective Visual Display Systems, 1 for
visual display systems with selective electrical control.
Subclass:
278
Frequency modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter
wherein the frequency of a constant amplitude optical wave
(i.e., carrier wave) varies in synchronization with the
amplitude of the applied signal (i.e., modulating signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
287 for acousto-optic frequency modulation.
Subclass:
279
Phase modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter
wherein the normal zero phase of a constant amplitude optical
wave (i.e., carrier wave) is shifted by an angle proportional
to the amplitude of the applied signal (i.e., modulating
signal).
(1) Note. A sinusoidal signal of zero phase will have a
zero amplitude at the intersection of the x-y axis.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
278 for electro-optic frequency modulation.
287 for acousto-optic frequency modulation.
Subclass:
280
Magneto-optic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter
wherein a bulk optical parameter of an optical element is
controlled by a magnetic signal applied to the element.
Subclass:
281
Modulation of polarized light via modulating input signal:
This subclass is indented under subclass 280. Subject matter
wherein a property of a polarized optical beam, such as
amplitude, phase, polarization, frequency, or color are
varied in a controlled manner by the applied varying magnetic
signal.
Subclass:
282
Using layered structure or plural mediums:
This subclass is indented under subclass 281. Subject matter
wherein the structure through which the beam passes or is
acted upon consists of more than one contiguous film or layer
which forms a composite structure which modulates the beam or
wherein there are plural mediums or structures in the beam
path, each of which modulates the beam.
(1) Note. The composite structure can be dielectric or
reflective films or layers for the purposes such as
compensation, increased Kerr rotation or index (e.g.,
impedance) matching.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
250 for plural mediums where at least one medium is electric
field responsive.
254 488 and 500, for layered structures where the purpose of
the layers is for such things as protection or index
matching..
487 for layered structure or plural mediums formed for
polarization or beam-splitting purposes.
490 for layered structures formed with at least one layer of
dichroic material where additional layers may be provided for
purposes such as protection or particular bonding and for
layered structures formed for interference effects.
497 for plural mediums including a birefringent medium which
is not field responsive.
Subclass:
283
With particular direction of the field in relation to the
medium, beam direction or polarization:
This subclass is indented under subclass 281. Subject matter
wherein details of the medium are given, especially crystal
cut or orientation, and the direction of the applied field is
specified in relation to the medium or in relation to the
incident beam direction or polarization.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
281 for magnetic modulating structures using a particular
medium, state of the medium, particular electrode structure
or arrangement, medium mounting structure or arrangement or
with a particular field.
Subclass:
284
Amplitude modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 280. Subject matter
wherein the amplitude of a constant frequency optical wave
varies in synchronization with the amplitude of the applied
signal (i.e., modulating signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
276 for electro-optic amplitude modulation.
286 for acousto-optic amplitude modulation.
289 for thermal-optic amplitude modulation.
Subclass:
285
Acousto-optic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter
wherein an ultrasonic wave generated at the surface or within
the confines of the light control element sets up conditions
in the element which produce a change in the optical
parameters (e.g., refractive index) directly controlling the
light.
Subclass:
286
Amplitude modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter
wherein the amplitude of a constant frequency optical wave
varies in synchronization with the amplitude of the applied
signal (i.e., modulating signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
276 for electro-optic amplitude modulation.
284 for magneto-optic amplitude modulation.
289 for thermal-optic amplitude modulation.
Subclass:
287
Frequency modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter
wherein the frequency of a constant amplitude optical wave
(i.e., carrier wave) varies in synchronization with the
amplitude of the applied signal (i.e., modulating signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
278 for electro-optic frequency modulation.
Subclass:
288
Thermo-optic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter
wherein optical properties (e.g., index of refraction) of an
optical element are changed by or in response to applied
heat.
Subclass:
289
Amplitude modulation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 288. Subject matter
wherein the amplitude of a constant frequency optical wave
varies in synchronization with the amplitude of the applied
signal (i.e., modulating signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
276 for electro-optic amplitude modulation.
284 for magneto-optic amplitude modulation.
286 for acousto-optic amplitude modulation.
Subclass:
290
By changing physical characteristics (e.g., shape, size or
contours) of an optical element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 238. Subject matter
wherein the light property is controlled by a substantial
alteration in the optical characteristics of a light control
surface or interface or by changing the physical shape,
position, or orientation of a light control surface or
interface in response to the modulating signal.
(1) Note. Any change in or to the light control surface or
interface occur wholly within the region of the light path in
which control is effected. The control surface or interface
is neither totally nor partially inserted into nor removed
from the light path.
Subclass:
291
Shape or contour of light control surface altered:
This subclass is indented under subclass 290. Subject matter
wherein the light property is controlled by means of a light
control surface which is temporarily altered or modified in
some way so as to produce distortions in the surface contours
which differ significantly from the normal or unmodified
surface contours.
Subclass:
292
Light control surface forms image on projected light beam:
This subclass is indented under subclass 291. Subject matter
wherein the contours of a light control surface are modified
in accordance with a control signal so as to impart image or
picture information to the contour of the control surface
which is then transferred to a light beam projected on or
through the control surface.
Subclass:
293
Electron beam causes surface alteration:
This subclass is indented under subclass 292. Subject matter
wherein the light control surface is changed by a ray of
electrons.
Subclass:
294
Using photoconductive layer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 291. Subject matter
which utilizes a layer whose electrical conductivity varies
as a function of light incident thereon.
Subclass:
295
Having multiple electrodes:
This subclass is indented under subclass 291. Subject matter
which includes a plurality of solid electrically conducting
elements.
Subclass:
296
Changing position or orientation of suspended particles:
This subclass is indented under subclass 290. Subject matter
wherein the light control surface consists of a group of
elongated light absorbing or reflecting particles suspended
in a fluid media, which collectively change their orientation
within the light path in response to an applied signal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
228 for fluid light control elements.
Subclass:
297
Light control surface formed or destroyed:
This subclass is indented under subclass 290. Subject matter
wherein a light property is controlled by creating or
destroying a light absorbing or reflecting surface or
interface in response to a modulating signal.
Subclass:
298
Light wave directional modulation (e.g., deflection or
scanning is representative of the modulating signal):
This subclass is indented under subclass 237. Subject matter
wherein the relative spatial orientation of a light wave
exiting a device is changed in accordance with a varying
signal of any energy form (i.e., modulating signal) applied
to the device.
(1) Note. Optical directional modulation occuring
exclusively inside of a waveguide is classified in Class
385.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
238 for light wave temporal modulation outside of a
waveguide.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, 4 for optical directional
modulation within an optical waveguide.
Subclass:
299
Opto-optical device:
This subclass is indented under subclass 298. Subject matter
wherein the directional modulation is achieved by an
externally applied modulating light wave.
Subclass:
300
Phase conjugate:
This subclass is indented under subclass 298. Subject matter
including the return of a light beam through the media at
precisely the same angles, distances, and intensities as
prior to a reflection.
Subclass:
301
Acting on polarized light:
This subclass is indented under subclass 298. Subject matter
wherein the direction of a polarized light beam is varied in
accordance with a varying input signal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
495 for beam deflection and splitting systems using
birefringent elements.
Subclass:
302
Using reflecting or cavity structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 301. Subject matter
wherein the deflection is effected by structures which
redirect the entire beam or a part of the beam at an angle
equal to that of incidence or where the medium through which
the beam passes is confined in a cavity.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
247 for reflecting structures used in beam temporal
modulation.
Subclass:
303
Using more than one polarization (e.g., digital):
This subclass is indented under subclass 301. Subject matter
wherein at least two distinct beams, corresponding to two
different polarizations, are obtained.
(1) Note. The systems use a polarization modulation element
to switch the polarization of the incoming beam followed by a
birefringent polarization discriminator whereby two distinct
beams are obtained corresponding to the ordinary and
extraordinary rays.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
302 for reflecting structures where different polarizations
are used.
Subclass:
304
Using single polarization:
This subclass is indented under subclass 301. Subject matter
wherein the beam is given an initial polarization and then
deflected or where only one polarization is allowed to be
deflected by blocking or removing any other polarization
component.
Subclass:
305
Acousto-optic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 298. Subject matter
wherein directional modulation is achieved by applying a
modulating sound wave to a device through which a light beam
is traversing.
Subclass:
306
Correlation or convolution:
This subclass is indented under subclass 305. Subject matter
wherein the correlation or convolution integral of two
optical waves is formed by an acousto-optical directional
modulator.
Subclass:
307
Utilizing optical feedback:
This subclass is indented under subclass 305. Subject matter
wherein an acousto-optic modulator has a portion of the
optical output therefrom returned to the input therefor.
Subclass:
308
Filter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 305. Subject matter
wherein one frequency band present in an incident light beam
is suppressed by an acousto-optic deflection technique.
Subclass:
309
Acting on polychromatic light:
This subclass is indented under subclass 305. Subject matter
wherein directional modulation of a light wave which is a
composite of many frequencies is achieved.
Subclass:
310
Plural cell array:
This subclass is indented under subclass 305. Subject matter
wherein directional modulation is achieved by multiple
acousto-optic devices.
Subclass:
311
Plural transducers on single cell:
This subclass is indented under subclass 305. Subject matter
wherein the directional modulator consists of a single
element having multiple input devices each capable of
imposing a separate sound wave on the modulator.
Subclass:
312
Single transducer generating composite plural frequency
acoustic wave:
This subclass is indented under subclass 305. Subject matter
wherein a composite sound wave of diverse frequencies is
generated and applied to the acousto-optic modulator.
Subclass:
313
Particular cell shape:
This subclass is indented under subclass 305. Subject matter
wherein detailed structure of the overall configuration of
the directional modulator is recited.
Subclass:
314
Particular cell orientation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 305. Subject matter
wherein a specific location of the modulator relative to an
incident light beam is recited.
Subclass:
315
Electro-optic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 298. Subject matter
wherein directional modulation is achieved by applying a
varying electrical signal to an element through which a light
beam is traversing.
Subclass:
316
Plural modulation cells:
This subclass is indented under subclass 315. Subject matter
wherein the directional light modulator utilizes multiple
elemental units each of which is electro-optically
controlled.
Subclass:
317
Multiple reflections within cell:
This subclass is indented under subclass 315. Subject matter
wherein the electro-optic directional modulator includes
plural internal redirections of the light passing
therethrough.
Subclass:
318
By reflection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 315. Subject matter
wherein the electro-optic directional modulator includes a
single internal redirection of the light passing
therethrough.
Subclass:
319
Focusing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 315. Subject matter
wherein light beam focusing is achieved by the application of
the electrical signal to a device through which the beam
transits.
Subclass:
320
Switching:
This subclass is indented under subclass 315. Subject matter
wherein a discrete change in the path of a light beam is
achieved by the application of the electrical signal to a
device through which the beam transits
Subclass:
321
Having particular chemical composition or structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 237. Subject matter
wherein chemical details of an optical modulator are
recited.
Subclass:
322
Electro-optic crystal material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 321. Subject matter
wherein the material of the modulator is particularly
responsive to an applied electrical signal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
245 electro-optic light wave temporal modulation for
changing bulk optical parameter.
Subclass:
323
PLZT material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 322. Subject matter
wherein the material is a transparent lead-lanthanum zir-
conate titanate ceramic with optical qualities that can be
controlled by applying voltages to thin plates of the
material.
Subclass:
324
Magneto-optic crystal material:
This subclass is indented under subclass 321. Subject matter
wherein the material of the modulator is particularly
responsive to an applied magnetic signal.
Subclass:
325
OPTICAL DEMODULATOR:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein an original modulating wave is
recovered from a previously modulated light wave.
(1) Note. These devices may include a photodetector as long
as a modulating wave is isolated.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
189 for optical communication receivers which include an
optical demodulator.
237 for an optical modulator, per se.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, 200 for photocell circuits and systems
which convert light wave energy into electricity.
329, Demodulators, for electrical demodulators in general.
Subclass:
326
OPTICAL FREQUENCY CONVERTER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a nonlinear device alters the
frequency of an applied traversing optical electromagnetic
wave.
(1) Note. The frequencies here are quasi-optical (i.e.,
infrared through ultraviolet).
(2) Note. Such optical frequency devices include second
harmonic generators and other types of frequency conversion
devices such as downshifters, oscillators, mixers, etc.
(3) Note. A detailed optical frequency converter, per se,
or such subject matter in combination with additional
waveguide structure is classified in this class (359).
However, the nominal recitation of any type of optical
frequency converter together with additional waveguide
structure is classified in Class 385, where such combination
meets the class requirements.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems,
subclass 424 for a nonoptical parametric frequency
converter.
327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices,
Circuits, and Systems, 113 for miscellaneous frequency
control.
Subclass:
327
Raman type:
This subclass is indented under subclass 326. Subject matter
wherein the nonlinear optical device involves
radiation-active materials in which many lines of
frequency-shifted radiation can be obtained in response to
incident radiation.
(1) Note. Raman radiation is a radiation produced in
response to incident radiation by a change in the rotational
or vibrational energy of scattering molecules. The resultant
optical radiation is often referred to as Stokes or
antiStokes radiation dependent upon its frequency relative to
that of the incident light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
334 for a Raman optical amplifier.
Subclass:
328
Harmonic generator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 326. Subject matter
wherein a nonlinear optical device generates a wave having a
frequency which is an integral multiple of a fundamental
input wave frequency.
(1) Note. A wave with twice the frequency of the
fundamental is called the second harmonic.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
240 for light wave temporal modulation via a nonlinear
device.
255 for electro-optic polarization modulation by a nonlinear
device.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
307, Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems,
subclass 424 for a nonoptical parametric frequency
converter.
327, Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices,
Circuits, and Systems, 113 for miscellaneous frequency
control such as electrical wave harmonic generation.
385, Optical Waveguides, subclass 122 for optical fiber
waveguide with cladding having significant nonlinear
property.
Subclass:
329
Third harmonic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 328. Subject matter
wherein the generated optical wave has a frequency that is
three times that of the fundamental input optical wave.
Subclass:
330
Parametric oscillator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 326. Subject matter
wherein the frequency conversion of electromagnetic
radiation, in the near and the visible spectrum, is based on
the nonlinear dependence of polarizability on wave
amplitude.
(1) Note. A parametric oscillation is an oscillation in
which substantial power is applied at a frequency called the
pump frequency. Signal and idler waves, the sum of whose
frequencies equals the pump frequency, are generated in an
interaction resulting from some nonlinear effect in the
optical crystal.
Subclass:
331
Optical laser acoustic delay line type:
This subclass is indented under subclass 326. Subject matter
wherein the output from a laser is mode-locked and passed
through an acoustic cell in which a radio frequency acoustic
wave has been generated; the laser beam is diffracted, and
one of the frequency shifted diffracted modes is heterodyned
at a detector with an unshifted mode to produce a time
delayed radio frequency output signal lower in frequency than
the input signal.
Subclass:
332
Dielectric optical waveguide type:
This subclass is indented under subclass 326. Subject matter
wherein the depletion layer of a semiconductor whose
dielectric material exhibits nonlinear susceptibility is used
as an optical waveguide to achieve frequency translation.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
374, Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 177 for an
electrical thermometer having a ferroelectric sensor.
385, Optical Waveguides, 129 for a planar optical
waveguide.
Subclass:
333
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein the amplifying device produces an
output light beam which is only changed to increase the
magnitude of a light beam applied as input.
(1) Note. This amplification can be produced by applying
electrical energy to the device to first cause excitation to
a higher energy level via certain molecular, atomic, or
nuclear particles of a substance and later causing the high
energy state to be relaxed to a lower state to produce the
emission of the particles.
(2) Note. This amplifcation is the optical or quasi-optical
wavelength range, which is generally in the range from
ultra-violet (100 Angstroms) to far infrared (10 million
Angstroms) of the optical spectrum. See (1) Note of subclass
350 for specific IR and UV wavelength units.
(3) Note. This subclass necessitates light input into a
medium prior to amplification. Production of a light beam
output without an input light beam is classified in Class
372.
(4) Note. This subclass includes details of an optical
amplifier wherein amplification is produced within the
optical fiber by the interaction of externally applied energy
and a unique property of the fiber (e.g., lazing material).
The mere nominal recitation of an optical amplifier in
combination with an optical waveguide structure is classified
in Class 385.
(5) Note. Infrared to Ultraviolet light emitting junction
is classified in Class 357, subclass 17, unless a cavity is
set forth for Class 372 or amplification is set forth for
this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
109 for optical communication.
237 for optical modulators external to an optical fiber.
326 for optical frequency translators.
341 for details of an optical amplier wherein amplification
is produced within the fiber optics, wherein the optical
fiber has some unique property (i.e., lasing material), to
produce the amplification when external energy is applied.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
219, Electric Heating, 121.6 for metal heating by arc using
a laser.
250, Radiant Energy, 200 for photocells, circuits and
apparatus, and subclasses 552+ for solid state light emitting
source which is detected by a photocell.
257, Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors,
Solid-State Diodes), subclasses 80-85 for incoherent light
emitting devices combined with, or also constituting a light
responsive device.
313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 371 for a
cathode-ray tube with optics and subclass 372 for a
cathode-ray tube with light conducting fiber or rod.
342, Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices
(e.g., Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 53 for the
combination with an infrared device, and subclass 54 for the
combination with a laser.
348, Television, subclass 217 and 300 for camera with image
intensifier or amplifier, subclass 707 for television
amplifier circuit and subclass 777 for cathode-ray tube image
source with intensifier.
351, Optics: Eye Examinating, Vision Testing, and
Correcting, subclass 213 including light filter or absorber,
subclass 214 including diaphragm or slit, and subclass 215
including light polarizing.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, 300 for dispersed light
spectroscopy.
362, Illumination, subclass 32 for light fibers, rods or
pipes, subclass 259 for laser type light source (or support
therefor) and modifier, and subclasses 317+ for light
modifier.
365, Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 108
for liquid crystal memory and subclasses 120+ for information
masking using polarization, Bragg cells, diffraction,
holograms electron beams, etc.
369, Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 110
where the information is stored or retrieved from the medium
by polarized radiant energy subclass 116 where the
information is stored or retrieved from the medium by light
intensity adjustment or maintenance and subclass 117 where
the information is stored or retrieved from the medium by a
movable shutter or light gate.
372, Coherent Light Generators, for lasers and optical
oscillators wherein a light output beam is generated without
the application of a light input beam.
376, Induced Nuclear Reactions: Processes, Systems, and
Elements, subclass 103 for photon beam (e.g., laser)
irradiation nuclear fusion, subclass 104 for optics nuclear
fusion, and subclass 105 for particle beam irradiation
(excluding photons) nuclear fusion.
377, Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift
Registers: Circuits and Systems, subclass 102 for bistable
electro - optical devices.
385, Optical Waveguides, 1 for temporal optical modulation
produced within the fiber, and subclasses 4+ for directional
modulation produced within the fiber. Class 385 contains
patents claiming optical modulation within the fiber but
optical amplification (333+) or frequency translation (326+)
within the fiber are specifially excluded from Class 385,
unless the amplifier or frequency translator are only
nominally set forth.
427, Coating Processes, 163.1 for processes of coating an
optical polarizer, windshield, fiber, waveguide, rod,
projection screen, or retroreflector.
430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
Product Thereof, subclass 363 for laser or radiation color
imaging exposure other than visible light and subclass 945
for laser beam cross-reference art collection.
Subclass:
334
Raman or Brillouin process:
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein the scattered light beam output from a medium,
resulting from either the Raman or Brillouin effects, is
amplified relative to the input to the medium.
(1) Note. The Raman effect claimed specifically for the
optical amplification properties is classified in this
subclass, whereas the Raman effect claimed for the frequency
translation by itself or together with optical amplification
is classified in subclass 327.
(2) Note. Stimulated Raman effect is the amplification
exhibiting the characteristic of stimulated emission of the
small portion of light that is scattered in random directions
when a monochromatic light beam of high intensity is
transmitted through matter. The characteristic of the small
portion of light is related to the frequencies of the
matter.
(3) Note. The Raman effect results in the re-radiation of
light from a bombarded molecule, having a longer wavelength
than the original bombaring beam of coherent light. Part of
the energy of the coherent beam is distributed throughout the
molecule whereas the remaining energy is re-radiated. This
effect may be described as being feeble, instantaneous,
independent of absorption, independent of the wavelength of
the exciting radiation; and it results in the re-emission of
light generally having a wavelength longer than the existing
one. Although there is a difference in wavelengths or
frequency between the wavelengths of each re-emitted spectral
line, or Raman line, and the wavelength of the incident or
exciting radiation; the intensity of Raman increases as the
fourth power of the incident frequency except in the
neighborhood of an absorption band, where the scattering
intensity increases still more markedly.
(4) Note. Brillouin scattering is the nonlinear optical
phenomenon of the spontaneous scattering of light in a medium
by its interaction with sound waves passing through the
medium
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
327 for Raman type frequency translators.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, subclass 3 for Raman lasers
without a light input beam.
Subclass:
335
Free electron:
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein a beam of "free" and unbound electrons of an atom or
molecule are passed through an undulator (i.e., "wiggler"),
which creates a magnetic field of alternating polarity, to
cause the electrons to move along a helical path (i.e.,
"wiggle") for the release of a high power light radiation
(i.e., amplification of the light input beam).
(1) Note. The use of a free-electron laser for light
amplificatoin belongs in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, subclass 2 for free electron
lasers and subclass 74 for electron beam pumping without a
light input beam.
Subclass:
336
Bistable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein a two level output is produced (i.e., an amplified
output or no output at all) dependent upon the specific
characteristic (e.g., amplitude or frequency) of the input
light beam that the amplifier is designed to amplify.
(1) Note. The specific type of amplifier (i.e., material
type, cavity structure, resonant cavity length, leachable
material, etc.) determines which input signal characteristic
will produce an amplified output. All other inputs will
result in a zero output.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
377, Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or Shift
Registers: Circuits and Systems, subclass 102 using
bistable electro-optical devices.
Subclass:
337
Correction of deleterious effects:
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein an amplifier is corrected to overcome actions that
prohibit its proper operation.
(1) Note. In order to overcome laser overheating,
extraneous gasses that prohibit population inversion, laser
medium losing energy that would deplete energy, an excess of
power density, etc., the correction is applied to the optical
amplifier itself.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, subclass 33 for particular
operating compensation.
Subclass:
338
Using phase conjugation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 337. Subject matter
wherein the light beam returns through the medium at
precisely the same angles, distances, and intensities it was
directed prior to the reflection.
(1) Note. The medium causes the light to return to its
origin after reflection in precisely the same identical path
it took to reach the reflector.
(2) Note. See the January 1986 Scientific American article
on this subject matter.
(3) Note. This is often used to clear up poor images.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
300 for phase conjugate light wave directional modulation
(e.g., deflection or scanning).
Subclass:
339
Using saturable or spatial filter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 337. Subject matter
wherein the correction is accomplished by allowing light
transmission through the filter of an input light beam only
after a particular amount of energy is either applied
(saturable filter) or a specific portion of the light beam is
passed (spatial filter).
(1) Note. A saturable filber is opaque to a light beam
input until one of the atoms of its material is excited to a
second energy level as a result of striking photons. Upon
reaching this second energy level, the filter becomes
"saturated" and thus transparent to the input beam due to the
equalization between the original and second energy levels
causing no net absorption of additional photons as they
strike the filter.
(2) Note. A spatial filter generally consists of either (a)
an emulsion mask having a clean annular region in an
otherwise opaque region or (b) a pinhole, placed at a focal
plane in a laser expander; to remove unwanted radiation
generally referred to as amplified spontaneous emission.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, subclass 11 for absorption
filter Q-Switch and subclass 14 for mechanical spatial filter
Q-Switch.
Subclass:
340
Mode locked:
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein the energy content of each state (i.e., mode) of an
oscillating system (e.g., laser) is internally modulated in a
particular field pattern and is one of the possible resonant
frequencies of the system to selectively give rise to energy
bursts of high peak power and short duration which can be in
the picosecond domain.
(1) Note. This laser, referred to as a mode-locked laser
could also be in a continuous wave mode or a pulsed mode.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, subclass 18 for mode locking
particular beam control without a light input beam.
Subclass:
341
Optical fiber:
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein amplification is produced within the optical fiber by
the interaction of externally applied energy and a unique
property of the fiber (e.g., lasing material).
(1) Note. The details of an optical amplifier within an
optical waveguide or combination with additional external
waveguide structure are classified in this subclass.
(2) Note. Optical waveguides or fibers having the
amplification performed within the waveguide of fiber are
classified in this subclass.
(3) Note. Class 385 contains patents claiming optical
modulation within the fiber but optical amplification
(subclasses 333+) or frequency translation (subclasses 326+)
within the fiber are specifically excluded from Class 385,
unless the amplifier or frequency translator are only
nominally set forth.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
332 for optical waveguides which produce frequency
translation.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, 1 for temporal modulation performed
within the optical waveguides and subclasses 4+ for
directional modulation performed within the optical
waveguide.
Subclass:
342
Particular active medium (e.g., crystal, plasma, fluid,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein a specified type of active medium, which uniquely
causes the amplification of the light input, is used to
change the number of atoms or atomic system in a set of
energy levels as a result of the absorption of light incident
on the material of the medium.
(1) Note. The examples of crystal, plasma, and fluid define
the physical state of the active medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
343 for a glass (amorphous) medium.
344 for a semiconductor medium.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, 39 for a particular active
medium which is not used for amplification of a light beam
input.
Subclass:
343
Glass (amorphous):
This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter
wherein the solid active medium does not have a definite
crystalline structure.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
342 for crystal, plasma, fluid, etc., active medium.
344 for a semiconductor medium.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, subclass 40 for an amorphous
(e.g., glass) active medium which is not used to amplify a
light beam input.
Subclass:
344
Semiconductor:
This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter
wherein the active medium is a solid or liquid having a
resistivity midway between that of an insulator and a metal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
342 for crystal, plasma, fluid, etc., active medium.
343 for a glass (amorphous) medium.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, 43 for a semiconductor
active medium which is not used for amplification of a light
beam input.
Subclass:
345
Particular pumping type (e.g., electrical, optical, nuclear,
magnetic, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein a specified type of pumping is used to change the
number of atoms or atomic system in a set of energy levels as
a result of the absorption of light incident on the
material.
(1) Note. This pumping causes the atoms of a medium to be
raised from certain lower to certain higher energy levels,
and it may cause a population inversion between certain
intermediate levels in order to ultimately produce photons
when the energy level moves from higher to lower.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, 69 for particular pumping
type which is not used for amplification of a light beam
input.
Subclass:
346
Particular resonator cavity (e.g., scanning, confocal or
folded mirrors, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein the optical beam goes back and forth within an
optical cavity without any standing waves, similar to an
oscillating cavity, but resulting in the amplification of the
light input beam.
(1) Note. This can be a mode-selecting high gain optical
structure in which the laser action takes place by the
build-up of electromagnetic field intensity upon multiple
reflections.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, 92 for laser particular
resonant cavities which are not used for amplification of a
light beam input.
Subclass:
347
Multiple pass:
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein the laser material does not have to be continually
pumped since the laser stays in a lasing state for multiple
traverses of light throughout the lasing medium to produce
amplified light beams that last longer than the period for
the pumping itself.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 350 for ring
lasers with interfering different frequency beams.
372, Coherent Light Generators, subclass 94 for ring
configuration folded resonant cavity.
Subclass:
348
Regenerative:
This subclass is indented under subclass 347. Subject matter
wherein the lasing medium is pumped more than once to amplify
a single input pulse.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
372, Coherent Light Generators, 69 for particular pumping.
Subclass:
349
Beam combination or separation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter
wherein a light beam is either combined with another light
beam or many light beams are created from a single light beam
in order to produce the desired amplification.
Subclass:
350
HAVING SIGNIFICANT INFRARED OR ULTRAVIOLET PROPERTY:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including structure which is specifically
adapted, as by structure or composition, to function as an
optical element in the infrared (IR) or ultraviolet (UV)
portion of the spectrum, or wherein an optical element is
constructed or composed to extend its operation into the
infrared or ultraviolet from the visible portion of the
spectrum.
(1) Note. IR (0.7 micrometers to 1000 micrometers
wavelength) according to Van Nostrand's Encyclopedia, 7th
Edition
Meters: 7 X 10[supscrpt]-7[end supscrpt] m to
.001 m
Centimeters: 7 X 10[supscrpt]-5[end supscrpt] cm to
.1 cm
Millimeters: 7 X 10[supscrpt]-4[end supscrpt] mm to
1 mm
Micrometers: .7 micrometers to 1000
micrometers
Nanometers: 700 nm to 10[supscrpt]6[end
supscrpt] nm
Angstroms: 7000 A to 10[supscrpt]7[end
supscrpt] A
UV (100 Angstroms to 4000 Angstroms wavelength) according to
Van Nostrand's Encyclopedia, 7th Edition
Meters: 10[supscrpt]-8[end supscrpt] m to
4 X 10[supscrpt]-7[end supscrpt] m
Centimeters: 10[supscrpt]-6[end supscrpt] cm to
4 X 10[supscrpt]-5[end supscrpt] cm
Millimeters: 10[supscrpt]-5[end supscrpt] mm to
4 X 10[supscrpt]-4[end supscrpt] mm
Micrometers: .01 micrometers to .4
micrometers
Nanometers: 10 nm to 400 nm
Angstroms: 100 A to 4000 A
Metric Conversion Units:
Centimeters = 10[supscrpt]-2[end supscrpt] meters
Millimeters = 10[supscrpt]-3[end supscrpt] meters
Micrometers = 10[supscrpt]-6[end supscrpt] meters
Nanometers = 10[supscrpt]-9[end supscrpt] meters
Angstroms = 10[supscrpt]-10[end supscrpt] meters
(2) Note. Holos:graphic systems and modulators of Class 359
and fibers or waveguides of Class 385 that operate in the IR
or UV portion of the spectrum are excluded from this and the
indented subclasses.
(3) Note. This subclass and those indented thereunder are
limited to elements which operate as optical elements in the
infrared and ultraviolet portion of the spectrum but a
detector to convert IR/UV energy to visible light is
classified in Class 250.
(4) Note. "Heat Filters" are considered infrared filters.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
358 for IR or UV fluid filter or fluid mirror.
634 for wavelength selective beam splitting or combining
surface (e.g., dichroic mirror).
859 for concave and convex mirrors in series for successive
reflections in mirrors.
885 for absorption filters.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
89, Ordnance, subclass 41.06 for light reception traning
mechanism.
165, Heat Exchange, 279 for temperature or pressure
automatic control (Thermal-IR).
219, Electric Heating, subclass 203 for combined vehicle or
vehicle component windshield or window heating device.
250, Radiant Energy, subclass 216 for optical or pre-optical
photocell system, subclass 226 for color filter or
spectroscope optical or pre-photocell system, subclasses 330+
for infrared-to-visible imaging, subclass 333 image tube type
imaging wherein the output screen is used to visualize an
intensified image or the IR image is converted to electrical
signals to control the display device, subclass 336.1 for IR
energy responsive electric signalling, subclasses 338.1+ for
infrared responsive invisible radiant energy responsive
electric signalling, subclass 351 for periodic scanning of an
IR beam, subclass 365 for UV light source, subclass 372 for
UV light responsive means, subclass 493.1 for radiant energy
generation and sources, subclass 504 for ultraviolet or
infrared source radiation modifying member, and subclasses
505.1+ for radiation controlling elements exclusive of
infrared, visible and ultraviolet optical elements.
252, Compositions, subclass 587 for infrared light
transmission modifying compositions, and subclasses 588+ for
ultraviolet transmission modifying compositions.
283, Printed Matter, subclass 88 for IR filter with
electromagnetic radiation having revealable concealed
information, fraud preventer or detector, use preventer or
detector, or identifier, subclass 89 for UV filter with
electromagnetic radiation having revealable concealed
information, fraud preventer or detector, use preventer or
detector, or identifier, and subclass 90 for polarized IR
filter with electromagnetic radiation having revealable
concealed information, fraud preventer or detector, use
preventer or detector, or identifier.
313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 112 for
polarizer or special ray transmission with optical device or
special ray transmission envelope.
348, Television, 164 for IR television.
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
44 for antiglare or shading spectacles and eyeglasses, and
subclass 163 for light filtering opthalmic lens or blanks.
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 202 for projection
light sources with cooling means.
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 55 for an image
projector having a heat filter.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 51 for IR and
UV.
374, Thermal Measuring and Testing, subclass 124 for
thermally emitted radiation with scanning or temperature
distribution display.
424, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, 59
for a sun or radiation screening or suntanning composition
intended for topical application to a living body.
427, Coating Processes, subclass 160 for a coating with
X-ray, Ultrasonic, or Infrared properties, subclasses 162+
for coating processes, per se, wherein the product is an
optical element.
607, Surgery: Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application,
subclass 1 for light, thermal, and electrically applied
surgery.
Subclass:
351
Having folded optical path:
This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter
including an element which modifies the path of incident
light so as to cause the light to repeatedly traverse the
same or overlapping volumes of space.
(1) Note. The system generally includes plural reflectors
to sequentially reverse the direction of the optical axis.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
495 for birefringent element beam deflection or splitting
for polarization without modulation or external input.
Subclass:
352
Having polarizing element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter
having an element which restricts the direction of vibration
of radiant energy.
(1) Note. The restriction may have a time variation.
(2) Note. The polarized radiant energy may be visible light
accompanying the infrared or ultraviolet radiation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
359 for an IR/UV multilayer filter or multilayer reflector.
360 for an IR/UV multilayer filter or multilayer reflector
having a metal layer.
372 for plural optical axis microscope.
419 for plural optical axis telescope.
483 for a visible light polarizer absent any infrared or
ultraviolet characteristic.
486 for light polarization without modulation or external
energy by grid or dipoles.
487 for polarization without modulation by reflection or
refraction.
490 for polarization without modulation by dichroic medium,
which transmits light of one color and reflects light of the
complementary color with little light absorbed.
494 for polarization without modulation by a birefringent
element, which divides a ray or beam of energy into two
polarized rays or beams separated by 90 degrees (known as
ordinary and extraordinary).
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
283, Printed Matter, subclass 88 for IR filter with
electromagnetic radiation having revealable concealed
information, fraud preventer or detector, use preventer or
detector, or identifier.
313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 112 for
polarizer or special ray transmission (e.g., filter) with an
electric discharge device.
Subclass:
353
Including alternative optical path or optical element (e.g.,
day-night, hi-low magnification):
This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter
which has an element allowing a variable radiation path or
which alternatively places an optical element into or out of
a fixed optical path, thereby producing plural distinct
radiation processing configurations.
(1) Note. One or more configurations may be limited to
visible light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
421 for telescope compound lens selectable magnification.
672 for lens with selective magnification by exchanging or
adding lens components.
708 for aspherical lens.
744 for afocal Galilean telescope lens.
Subclass:
354
Including continuously variable magnification or focal length
(zoom lens, adjustable lens):
This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter
wherein the focal point or image magnification of an imaging
device or element is continuously or intermittantly changed
as desired.
(1) Note. This includes various selected positions of
different optical elements to fit the user selected
application.
(2) Note. This incudes IR/UV variable elements adjacent to
or part of the zoom lens.
(3) Note. This also includes FLIR (Forward Looking Infrared
systems).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
421 for telescope selectable magnification in a compound
lens for the visible portion of the spectrum.
422 for telescope variable magnification in a compound lens
for the visible portion of the spectrum.
676 for zoom lens in the visible portion of the spectrum.
744 for an afocal lens (e.g., Galilean Telescope).
Subclass:
355
Lens, lens system or component:
This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter
including a refractive imaging element or a serially arranged
group thereof having a significant property in the infrared
or ultraviolet area of the electromagnetic spectrum.
(1) Note. Compound lens systems are a plurality of lenses
or lens groups arranged in series coaxially along an optical
axis, such lenses or lens groups being so spaced along the
axis that the second focal plane of the entrant lens of the
series lies at or near the first focal plane of the next
succeeding lens or lens group of the series whereby the light
entrant lens is capable of producing from light rays passing
therethrough from an object external to the plurality of
lenses an image of that object, which image is viewed or
relayed by the said succeeding lens or lens group.
(2) Note. Lens systems designate either a single
transparent mass of refractive material having opposed
refracting surfaces or a plurality of such masses arranged in
series along an optical axis with their opposed refracting
surfaces disposed transversely of such axis, the said opposed
surfaces being so shaped and spaced that the mass or
plurality of masses are capable of producing from light rays
passing therethrough from an object external to the mass or
masses a single image of that object, which image is also
external to the mass or masses of material.
(3) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or a grouped
plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces
either in full over-all contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations, the two
refracting surfaces of the single mass and the two axially
extreme refracting surfaces of the plurality of masses having
at least a portion thereof axially air spaced from all other
adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.
The axial dimension of the air spacing between either the
opposed surfaces of the single mass or the axially extreme
surfaces of the grouped plurality of masses and the other
adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens
must be of sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens
computations in order to limit the axial extent of the lens
component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
356 for an infrared lens.
357 for an infrared lens having four or more components.
642 for lenses in the visible portion of the spectrum.
722 for lenses which are selective in the visible spectrum
by transmitting or blocking certain wavelengths.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
427, Coating Processes, subclass 160 for a coating having
X-ray, ultraviolet, or infrared properties.
Subclass:
356
Infrared lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 355. Subject matter
having significant properties in the infrared area of the
electromagnetic spectrum.
Subclass:
357
Having four or more components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 356. Subject matter
which includes four or more components which have significant
properties in the infrared area of the electromagnetic
spectrum.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
754 for multiple component lenses, in general.
Subclass:
358
Fluid filter or fluid mirror:
This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter
including filters or mirrors having a liquid or gas which is
specially adapted as by composition to transmit or absorb
infrared or ultraviolet radiation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
665 for fluid lenses.
832 for fluid filled prisms.
845 for fluid cooled mirrors.
886 for fluid absorption filters which operate in the
visible portion of the spectrum.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, subclass 226 for color filter or
spectroscope optical or pre-photocell system.
252, Compositions, 582 for light transmission modifying
compositions and subclass 588 for those compositions used for
ultraviolet light transmission modifying.
Subclass:
359
Multilayer filter or multilayer reflector:
This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter
having a substrate and one or more superimposed coatings or
laminae and which as a whole is designed to have significant
absorbent or redirective properties in the infrared or
ultraviolet portion of the spectrum.
(1) Note. Interference filters wherein the multiple
reflected beams of various different frequencies will
automatically interfere with one another upon reflection are
classified in this subclass if significant IR/UV is
specified.
(2) Note. Multi-layer absorption would not be interference
since waves are not produced which interfere with one
another.
(3) Note. Multi-layer absorbing elements are classifed in
this subclass if significant IR/UV is specified.
(4) Note. Semiconductor elements are classifed in this
subclass since they are not considered metals for subclass
360.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
580 for light interference produced by coating or lamina.
581 for transmissive coating on interference lens.
589 for selective wavelength interference.
590 for selective wavelength interference with another
filter.
839 for mirrors with a transmissive property.
884 for mirrors with a selective absorption or transparent
overcoating.
885 for absorptive filters.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
204, Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, 192.26 for
optical or photoactive specified deposition material glow
discharge sputter deposited coating.
Subclass:
360
Having metal layer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 359. Subject matter
wherein at least one coating or lamina or the substrate is
composed of a metal.
(1) Note. Semiconductor elements are not considered as
metal and are included under subclass 359.
(2) Note. Only an elemental metal layer is classified in
this subclass. Metal alloys or compositions in a multilayer
structure are classified in subclass 359.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
722 for lenses with selective wavelength transmitting or
blocking.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, subclass 226 for color filter or
spectroscope optical or pre-photocell system.
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
subclass 44 for sunglasses with antiglare or shading.
607, Surgery: Light, Thermal, and Electrical Application,
subclass 95 for solar cabinets.
Subclass:
361
Having ultraviolet absorbing or shielding property:
This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter
wherein light in the ultraviolet portion of the spectrum is
blocked or otherwise filtered.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
359 for a multilayer ultraviolet filter.
Subclass:
362
COMPOUND LENS SYSTEM:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including a plurality of image formers
arranged for forming a series of real images along the
optical axis, at least one of the real images being formed
between two of the image formers.
(1) Note. The terminal image former may be an "eyepiece"
designed to form a real image only in combination with the
human eye.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
642 for lenses suitable for use in compound lens systems of
this subclass type.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
33, Geometrical Instruments, 245 for compound lens systems
combined with firearms.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, 245 for optical test
instruments containing compound lens systems.
Subclass:
363
With image recorder:
This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter
including a device to record an image of the object being
directly viewed, the compound lens system being primarily
designed for direct viewing.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
372 for a microscope with plural optical axes, one axis of
which may be directed to an image recorder.
403 for a periscope with plural optical axes, one axis of
which may be directed to an image recorder.
419 for a telescope with plural optical axes, one axis of
which may be directed to an image recorder.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
396, Photography, subclass 432 for significant camera
structure combined with a diverse compound lens system.
Subclass:
364
With curved reflective imaging element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter
including a curved reflector which contributes to the
formation of at least one of the real images.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
727 for lenses that employ both refraction and reflection in
forming an image (catadioptric lenses).
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
362, Illumination, 296 for reflectors in illumination
systems.
Subclass:
365
Two or more in a series:
This subclass is indented under subclass 364. Subject matter
including a plurality of curved reflectors contributing to
the formation of one or more of the real images.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
858 for image forming reflectors having plural curved
surfaces in series.
Subclass:
366
Concave, convex combination:
This subclass is indented under subclass 365. Subject matter
wherein the plurality of curved reflectors include at least
one concave and at least one convex reflector.
Subclass:
367
Right angle inspector:
This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter
including a compound lens system with an objective deflector
to provide viewing at a right angle to the main optical
axis.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
434 for a relay system which may be used in a compound lens
system of the structure classified in this subclass (367).
Subclass:
368
Microscope:
This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter
wherein the objective of the compound lens system is designed
to focus highly divergent light from an object very close to
the objective.
(1) Note. Also illuminators, stages, slide carriers, and
transparent slides designed specifically for use with that
type of compound lens system are classified in subclasses
indented under this subclass (368).
Subclass:
369
With viewed screen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter
including structure for displaying a real image on a viewed
screen.
(1) Note. The screen may be at an intermediate or terminal
image plane and may, for example, comprise a ground glass
screen, a front projection screen, a fiber optic output face,
etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
400 for a telescope with a viewed screen.
443 for a viewing screen.
505 for an extended spacing structure for optical elements
including a screen.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, 370.08 for invisible radiant energy
responsive signalling, including imaging.
313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, 364 for
cathode-ray tubes and subclasses 523+ for image intensifier
tubes, etc.
315, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems, 1 for
cathode-ray tube circuits, including image intensifiers.
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 18, 47, 67, 72+,
74+, and 79+ for an image projection and viewing screen in
combination.
Subclass:
370
Interference:
This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter
wherein light from the object is combined with light of
different phase or diffraction characteristics either from
the object or bypassing the object.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
1 for interference microscopes having holos:graphic features
or for making holograms.
Subclass:
371
Using polarized light:
This subclass is indented under subclass 370. Subject matter
wherein light with a particular polarization characteristic
is present.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
386 for illuminators for microscopes other than interference
microscopes using polarized light.
483 for optics, systems, and elements for polarization of
light or using polarized light.
Subclass:
372
With plural optical axes:
This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter
wherein light from an object may follow any of a plurality of
substantially different optical axes through the microscope.
(1) Note. The different optical axes may be partly colinear
and may be used either simultaneously or alternately.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
363 for a compound lens system with an image recorder.
403 for a periscope with plural optical axes.
419 for a telescope with plural optical axes.
Subclass:
373
Side-by-side fields:
This subclass is indented under subclass 372. Subject matter
wherein at least two of the separate paths provide different
images which are adjacent in a common field of view.
Subclass:
374
Plural oculars:
This subclass is indented under subclass 372. Subject matter
wherein at least two of the separate paths terminate in
separate eyepieces.
Subclass:
375
Binocular:
This subclass is indented under subclass 374. Subject matter
wherein at least two of the plural oculars are separated at
approximately the interocular distance to provide
simultaneous viewing by both eyes of one observer.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
404 for a binocular periscope.
407 for a binocular telescope.
480 for a binocular viewing device in general.
Subclass:
376
Stereoscopic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 375. Subject matter
wherein at least two of the binocular eyepieces provide
stereoscopic viewing.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
462 for steroscopic viewing systems.
Subclass:
377
With single or parallel objectives:
This subclass is indented under subclass 376. Subject matter
including one objective for two stereoscopic views or two
objectives with parallel optical axes for two stereoscopic
views.
Subclass:
378
For viewing stereo pairs:
This subclass is indented under subclass 377. Subject matter
wherein separate objective channels view different object
fields, each field being filled by a separate parallax object
view for viewing.
(1) Note. The devices of this subclass provide for two
separate fields. The stereoscopic property is related to the
objects being viewed taken from two slightly different
directions of a three-dimensional object. The views usually
comprise a pair of transparencies, each transparency being a
separate object view.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
466 for stereo-viewing devices.
Subclass:
379
Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter
including means for varying the axial separation of the
optical elements, for example, for focusing or varying
magnification.
(1) Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 399, Telescope, and titled "Separation of optical
elements axially adjustable" or including the word "focusing"
may include subject matter related to subject matter in this
subclass (379).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
506 for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical
elements.
Subclass:
380
Variable magnification:
This subclass is indented under subclass 379. Subject matter
wherein varying the axial separation varies the size of an in
focus terminal image while the object distance remains
constant.
(1) Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 407, Binocular, and titled "Spacing of optical
elements axially adjustable" may include subject matter
related to variable magnification.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
422 for a telescope with variable magnification.
432 for variable magnification in nonmagnifying compound
lens systems.
506 for adjustable extended spacing structure for optical
elements.
676 for a lens having its equivalent focal length variable
continuously between limits.
Subclass:
381
Imaging elements movable in and out of optical axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter
wherein an imaging element is selectively positionable in or
out of the optical axis to change the image distance or image
size.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
421 for a telescope with selective magnification.
Subclass:
382
Entire microscope adjustable along optical axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter
wherein the microscope translates along the optical axis to
vary the distance to an object plane.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
392 for devices wherein the stage or slide carrier
translates along the optical axis.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
74, Machine Element or Mechanism, 25 for a mechanism
converting rotary motion to or from reciprocating or
oscillatory motion.
Subclass:
383
Focus adjustment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 382. Subject matter
wherein the adjustment along the optical axis effects the
focus of the compound optical system.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
410 for binocular telesopes with adjustable focus.
425 for telescopes with focusing.
Subclass:
384
With rotatable adjustment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter
including means for swinging the microscope about an axis.
Subclass:
385
Illuminator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter
including (a) structure for illuminating an object being
viewed in combination with a microscope or (b) object
illuminating structure designed specifically for use with a
microscope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
798 for lenses with viewed object or viewed field
illumination.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
362, Illumination, 257 and 317+ for an illuminator with a
modifier or a light modifier.
Subclass:
386
Using polarized light:
This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter
wherein the illuminating structure provides polarized light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
371 for an interference microscope using polarized light.
483 for systems and elements for the polarization of light
without modulation.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
362, Illumination, subclass 19 for an illuminator with a
polarizer.
Subclass:
387
With annular lighting structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject
mattter including means for providing an annulus of light
surrounding a dark central portion for illuminating the
object.
Subclass:
388
With optical switching means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter
including means for changing optical elements in the
illuminating beam path to change the type of illumination.
(1) Note. The optical elements may be movable in and out of
the illuminating beam path or the illuminating beam may be
deflected to pass through different optical elements.
Subclass:
389
With illuminating and viewing paths coaxial at the image
field:
This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter
wherein the illuminating light is transmitted through a space
occupied by the image field.
(1) Note. A partially transmitting beam splitter is
commonly used in devices in this subclass (389).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
799 for a lens with a coaxial illuminating beam.
Subclass:
390
With illuminator support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter
including (a) means for maintaining the illuminator in a
fixed position or (b) means for limiting the movement of the
illuminator.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
362, Illumination, 382 for an illuminator with a support.
Subclass:
391
Stage or slide carrier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter
including (a) structure for supporting an object to be viewed
or tools to be placed in the field of view in combination
with a microscope or (b) structure for supporting an object
or tools designed specifically for use with a microscope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
801 and 804+, for lenses with a viewed object support.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
248, Supports, for supports generally.
Subclass:
392
Adjustable along optical axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter
wherein the stage or slide carrier translates along the
optical axis to vary its distance from the microscope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
382 for devices wherein the microscope translates along the
optical axis.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
74, Machine Element or Mechanism, 25 for a mechanism
converting rotary motion to or from reciprocating or
oscillatory motion.
108, Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, 144.11 for a
vertically adjustable platform.
Subclass:
393
With plural transverse movements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter
wherein the stage or slide carrier is movable in a plurality
of directions perpendicular to the optical axis of the
microscope.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
74, Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 471 for X-Y
control devices.
108, Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces, 137 for a
horizontally adjustable platform.
Subclass:
394
With turntable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter
wherein the stage or slide carrier is rotatable about the
optical axis or an axis parallel to the optical axis of the
microscope.
Subclass:
395
With temperature control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter
including means to vary or keep constant the temperature at
the location of the stage or slide carrier.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
396 for devices including a transparent slide which may
include temperature control means.
Subclass:
396
Transparent slide:
This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter
including (a) a transparent mass, usually a glass plate, for
supporting an object to be viewed in combination with a
microscope or (b) a transparent mass, usually a glass plate,
designed specifically for supporting an object to be viewed
by a microscope.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, 244 for sample or
specimen holders.
Subclass:
397
Reference lines or grids:
This subclass is indented under subclass 396. Subject matter
including indicia on the transparent slide.
Subclass:
398
Specimen cavity or chamber:
This subclass is indented under subclass 396. Subject matter
including a container for holding, isolating, or limiting the
flow of an object.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 246 for fluid
sample containers.
Subclass:
399
Telescope:
This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter
wherein the compound lens system is designed for viewing
distant objects.
Subclass:
400
With viewed screen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
including a semi-transparent or opaque structure for
displaying one of the series of real images.
(1) Note. The screen may be at an interminate or terminal
image plane and may, for example, comprise a ground glass
screen, a front projection screen, a fiber optic output face,
etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
369 for a microscope with a viewed screen.
443 for a viewing screen.
505 for an extended spacing structure for optical elements
including a screen.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
250, Radiant Energy, subclass 213 for circuits having image
intensifier or nonvisible to visible imaging vacuum tubes.
313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 524 for a
telescope (or any optical system) combined with an image
intensifier.
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 18, 47, 67, 72+,
74+, and 79+ for an image projector and viewing screen in
combination.
Subclass:
401
With image anti-rotation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
wherein the telescope maintains an erect terminal image as at
least part of the telescope is turned to rotate an
intermediate image.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
554 for an image stabilization system including image
anti-rotation.
Subclass:
402
Periscope:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
wherein the entrance optical axis and the exit optical axis
of the telescope are parallel and offset and perpendicular to
the main axis of the telescope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
401 for a periscope with image anti-rotation.
Subclass:
403
With plural optical axes:
This subclass is indented under subclass 402. Subject matter
wherein light from an object may follow any of a plurality of
substantially different optical axes through the periscope.
(1) Note. The different optical axes may be partly colinear
and may be used either simultaneously or alternately.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
372 for a microscope with plural optical axes.
419 for a telescope with plural optical axes.
Subclass:
404
Binocular:
This subclass is indented under subclass 403. Subject matter
wherein at least two of the substantially different axes
provide separate views to separate eyepieces for binocular
viewing.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
375 for a binocular microscope.
407 for a binocular telescope.
480 for a binocular viewing device in general that does not
use a compound lens system.
Subclass:
405
With mechanical adjustment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 402. Subject matter
wherein all or a portion of the periscope relative to another
structure is moved.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
429 for a telescope with line of sight adjustment.
Subclass:
406
Extensible structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 405. Subject matter
wherein the extension or elevation of the periscope is
changed, usually by the use of telescoping structures.
Subclass:
407
Binocular:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
wherein at least two exit optical axes are spaced at
approximately the interocular distance to provide
simultaneous viewing by both eyes of one observer.
(1) Note. This is the type of device used by fans at a ball
game to see distant players.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
375 for a binocular microscope.
404 for a binocular periscope.
480 for a binocular viewing device in general that does not
use a compound lens system.
Subclass:
408
Foldable or collapsible:
This subclass is indented under subclass 407. Subject matter
wherein the binocular telescope is hinged or provided with
telescoping or bellows sections to provide a more compact
unit when not in use or prior to assembly.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
474 for a collapsible stereoscope.
817 for a lens with a foldable or collapsible support.
Subclass:
409
Body supported or with handle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 407. Subject matter
wherein the binocular telescopes are combined with (a) an
elongated structure for providing a handhold or (b) a
structure for engaging a portion of the body or apparel for
support.
Subclass:
410
With focusing means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 409. Subject matter
wherein the supported binocular telescope includes means for
bringing an object at varying distances into focus.
(1) Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 412 with adjustable interocular distance and titled
"Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable" may include
subject matter related to focusing.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
379 for a microscope with the spacing of optical elements
axially adjustable.
425 for a telescope with focusing or relatively sliding
barrels.
506 for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical
elements.
Subclass:
411
With adjustable interocular distance:
This subclass is indented under subclass 409. Subject matter
wherein the supported binocular telescopes are connected by
means which vary and maintain lateral spacing of the two
binocular optical axes.
Subclass:
412
With adjustable interocular distance:
This subclass is indented under subclass 407. Subject matter
wherein the binocular telescopes are connected by means which
vary and maintain lateral spacing of the two binocular
optical axes.
Subclass:
413
Oculars swing about central axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 412. Subject matter
wherein the lateral spacing is changed by swinging the
binocular telescopes about a common axis.
Subclass:
414
Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 413. Subject matter
wherein the axial separation of optical elements, usually
lenses, prisms, or mirrors, may be varied, usually for
focusing or varying magnification.
(1) Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 362, Compound lens system, and titled "Separation of
elements axially adjustable", "Variable magnification" or
including the word "focusing" may include subject matter
related to subject matter in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
506 for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical
elements.
Subclass:
415
Oculars rotate about separate axes:
This subclass is indented under subclass 412. Subject matter
wherein the lateral spacing is varied by rotating the
binocular telescopes about different axes displaced from
their optical axes.
Subclass:
416
Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter
wherein the axial separation of optical elements, usually
lenses, prisms, or mirrors, may be varied, usually for
focusing or varying magnification.
(1) Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 362, Compound lens system, and titled "Separation of
optical elements axially adjustable", "Variable
magnification" or including the word "focusing" may include
subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
506 for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical
elements.
Subclass:
417
Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 412. Subject matter
wherein the axial separation of optical elements, usually
lenses, prisms, or mirrors, may be varied, usually for
focusing or varying magnification.
(1) Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 362, Compound lens system, and titled "Separation of
optical elements axially adjustable", "Variable
magnification", or including the word "focusing" may include
subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
506 for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical
elements.
Subclass:
418
Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 407. Subject matter
wherein the axial separation of optical elements, usually
lenses, prisms, or mirrors, may be varied, usually for
focusing or varying magnification.
(1) Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 362, Compound lens system, and titled "Separation of
optical elements axially adjustable", "Variable
magnification" or including the word "focusing" may include
subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
506 for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical
elements.
Subclass:
419
With plural optical axes:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
wherein light from an object may follow any of a plurality of
substantially different paths through the telescope.
(1) Note. The different optical axes may be partly colinear
and may be used either simultaneously or alternately.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
372 for a microscope with plural optical axes.
403 for a periscope with plural optical axes.
Subclass:
420
Plural magnification in same viewing field:
This subclass is indented under subclass 419. Subject matter
wherein telescope images of different magnification are
simultaneously viewable in a common field of view.
Subclass:
421
Selectable magnification:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
wherein the telescope includes means for step variations of
the image size while the object distance remains constant.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
381 for a microscope with an imaging element movable in and
out of the optical axis.
Subclass:
422
Variable magnification:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
wherein the telescope continuously varies the size of the
image while the object distance remains constant.
(1) Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 407, Binocular, and titled "Separation of optical
elements axially adjustable" may include subject matter
related to variable magnification.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
380 for a microscope with variable magnification.
432 for a compound lens system with variable magnification.
506 for adjustable extended spacing structure for optical
elements.
676 for a lens having its equivalent focal length variable
continously between limits.
Subclass:
423
With relay:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
wherein the telescope includes at least one lens system which
forms a real image of a real image.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
402 for a periscope including a relay.
422 for a variable magnification telescope including a
relay.
434 for a compound lens system with a relay.
Subclass:
424
With reticle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 423. Subject matter
wherein a cross-hair or emblem is present at a real image
plane of the telescope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
422 for a variable magnification telescope including a relay
and a reticle.
427 for focusing or relatively sliding barrels with a
reticle.
428 for a telescope with a reticle.
505 for an extended spacing structure for optical elements
with a reticle.
Subclass:
425
Focusing or relatively sliding barrels:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
wherein the telescope includes (a) a device for forming an in
focus image of an object of varying distances or (b) tubes
supporting optical elements movable axially into and out of
one another.
(1) Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 362, Compound lens system, and titled "Separation of
optical elements axially adjustable" may include subject
matter related to subject matter in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
410 for a binocular telescope that is body supported or with
a handle and includes focusing means.
506 for an adjustable extended spacing structure for optical
elements.
Subclass:
426
Internal focusing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 425. Subject matter
wherein the entrance and exit lenses remain a fixed distance
apart while the telescope is focused.
Subclass:
427
With reticle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 425. Subject matter
wherein a cross-hair or emblem is present at a real image
plane of the telescope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
422 for a variable magnification telescope including a relay
and a reticle.
424 for a telescope with a relay and a reticle.
428 for a telescope with a reticle.
505 for an extended spacing structure for optical elements
with a reticle.
Subclass:
428
With reticle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
wherein a cross-hair or emblem is present at a real image
plane of the telescope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
422 for a variable magnification telescope including a relay
and a reticle.
424 for a telescope with a relay and a reticle.
427 for a telescope with focusing or relatively sliding
barrels and with a reticle.
505 for an extended spacing structure for optical elements
with a reticle.
Subclass:
429
With line of sight adjustment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
wherein the telescope includes adjusting the direction of
view and maintaining the adjustment.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
401 for a telescope with image anti-rotation.
405 for a periscope with mechanical adjustment.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
248, Supports, 127 for stands in general.
Subclass:
430
Equatorial mount:
This subclass is indented under subclass 429. Subject matter
wherein the telescope includes structure to establish an axis
(polar axis) parallel to the earth's rotational axis about
which the telescope viewing axis rotates (right ascension) at
a selected angle (declination) between the polar axis and the
viewing axis.
Subclass:
431
With prism or U-shaped optical path:
This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter
wherein the telescope includes two right angle deflections in
series to reverse the optical path.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
413 for adjustable binoculars including a prism or a
U-shaped optical path.
Subclass:
432
Variable magnification:
This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter
wherein the compound lens system continuously varies the size
of a terminal image while the object distance remains
constant.
(1) Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 407, Binocular, and titled "Spacing of optical
elements axially adjustable" may include subject matter
related to variable magnification.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
380 for variable magnification in microscopes.
422 for variable magnification in telescopes.
Subclass:
433
With tilted lens or tilted image plane:
This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter
wherein the compound lens system includes (a) at least one
lens whose optical axis is oblique to the optical axis of the
system or (b) is designed to produce at least one image plane
tilted with respect to the optical axis of the system.
Subclass:
434
With relay:
This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter
wherein the compound lens system includes at least one lens
system that forms a real image of a real image.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
423 for a telescope with a relay.
Subclass:
435
Repetitious lens structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 434. Subject matter
wherein the compound lens system includes (a) a plurality of
identical relays in series or side by side or (b) at least
one relay comprised of identical elements or elements
symmetrically reversed about a center point.
Subclass:
436
SCALE OR INDICIA READING:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including optical structure for facilitating
the reading of a scale, with or without a pointer or
indicator, having spaced lines or other indicia thereon; or
for facilitating reading a vernier type indicator where lines
from two different scales are matched.
(1) Note. The scale may be on a weighing instrument, slide
rule, compass or speed indicator, etc.; and classification is
here unless sufficient scale supporting structure is recited
to classify with the particular art such as Class 33,
Geometrical Instruments; Class 73, Measuring and Testing;
Class 177, Weighing Scales; and Class 235, Registers.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
116, Signals and Indicators, 327 for signal pointers and
indicating arms.
177, Weighing Scales, subclass 234 for self-positioning
scales with magnified indication of spring deformation.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 242.1 for
thread counters and similar subject matter where a
relationship between the counter and the fabric is recited
such as a viewing aperture or support for the counter on the
fabric or a fabric support, subclasses 247+ for optical
reticles and crosshairs and subclasses 373 and 397 for
distance measuring devices which have a scale or optical grid
displaced relative to a remote fiducial mark.
362, Illumination, 23 for dial illuminators.
Subclass:
437
Polarizer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter
including a polarizing element.
(1) Note. A polarizing element causes incident light
polarization as defined in the class definition.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
485 for specific polarizing elements.
Subclass:
438
Prism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter
including a prism which may reflect or refract light for
better viewing the scale or indicia.
(1) Note. See subclass 831 for the definition of a prism.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
831 for specific prism elements.
Subclass:
439
Mirror:
This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter
including a mirror to reflect light from the scale or indicia
to the viewer.
(1) Note. See subclass 838 for the definition of a mirror.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
838 for mirrors, per se.
Subclass:
440
Lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter
including a lens.
(1) Note. See subclass 642 for the definition of a lens.
(2) Note. The lens is usually employed to magnify the image
of the scale markings or indicia.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
806 for optical reading devices including line markers.
809 for lenses combined with diverse type art devices in
general.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
73, Measuring and Testing, subclass 327 for a reflector or
magnifier used for sighting in a liquid level or depth
gauge.
Subclass:
441
Movable or adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 440. Subject matter
including means for adjusting or moving the lens with respect
to the scale or indicia as for positioning or focusing the
lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
642 for lenses, per se.
Subclass:
442
Along scale or indicia:
This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter
including means to guide a lens along the reading direction
of a linear scale or indicia.
(1) Note. The lens may be movable along a nonlinear (e.g.,
circular) scale as well as a linear scale and the structure
must be included which constricts or guides the movement of
the lens along the scale or indicia.
(2) Note. An actuator, per se, is not classified in this
subclass.
Subclass:
443
PROJECTION SCREEN:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including a sheet or other extending surface
or area which is especially adapted to render an image of an
object which is projected thereon visible to an observer,
usually by diffusing the projected light.
(1) Note. This subclass and those indented thereunder in
this class (359) include screens where the size, shape, or
refractive index of embedded particles is claimed or screens
with elements having geometric curves, with relative
refractive indices or parts with claimed patterns, with wave
plates, acoustical characteristics or other optical
criterion. Such criterion must be more than mere "light
diffusing particles" or a "light diffusing surface" to
classify a patent in Class 359 as opposed to Class 139 or
Class 428. See Class 427, appropriate subclasses for methods
of making screens by coating.
(2) Note. The screen may be merely tracing paper or a
canvas as in indented subclass 447.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
350 for a viewing screen having infrared or ultraviolet
characteristics.
900 for miscellaneous methods of making screens not
classified in Class 427, Coating Processes, or Class 156,
Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
etc.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
139, Textiles: Weaving, 383 for light diffusing woven
screens.
160, Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel,
especially 19 and 371+ for framed screens without optical
details other than merely "translucent" or something
similar.
248, Supports, especially 158 for screen supports.
264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes, 1.1 for processes directed to forming optical
articles capable of producing an optical effect other than
mere transparency or planar reflection.
312, Supports: Cabinet Structure, 21 for screens supported
in a cabinet.
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 61 for a motion
picture projector combined with a screen.
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 18, 47, 67, 72+,
74+, and 79+ for cabinet which encloses projector and one
side of screen or structurally related projector and screen.
427, Coating Processes, 162 for coating processes, per se,
wherein the product is an optical element.
428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, especially 143
for embedded light diffusing particles or for light
diffusing stock material in the form of a single or plural
layer web or stock material which may be useful for
projection purposes.
Subclass:
444
With sound producer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
including a loudspeaker or other sound producing means
combined with the screen.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 36 for motion
picture devices combined with screens and sound producers.
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 18 for an image
projector in combination with a sound producer.
381, Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and Devices,
150 for electrical loudspeakers, per se.
Subclass:
445
Acoustical:
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
wherein the screen is especially adapted to transmit or damp
sound waves.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
444 for acoustical screens combined with means to produce
sound.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
181, Acoustics, 175 for mufflers and sound filters.
Subclass:
446
Moving during projection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
including means to rotate or oscillate the screen, usually
for the purpose of improving the image seen by viewers or for
imparting a three dimensional effect.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
520 for vibrating, oscillating, or rotating signal
reflectors.
Subclass:
447
Tracing (e.g., camera lucida, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
wherein the screen upon which an image is formed is adapted
to have an outline of the image traced or sketched thereon.
(1) Note. The instrument, commonly referred to as a camera
lucida, usually includes a prism or mirrors and sometimes a
lens to cause a virtual image of an object to appear as if
projected upon a plane surface so that an outline may be
traced.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
369 and 400, for a compound lens system combined with a
viewing screen.
448 for a lens combined with a viewing screen.
449 for a reflector combined with a viewing screen.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 44 and 45 for an
image projector having a concentrated source of light to
project an image for the purpose of tracing it.
Subclass:
448
With lens (e.g., camera obscura, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
including a lens combined with the screen, the screen usually
being positioned in the second principle focal plane of the
lens.
(1) Note. The device, commonly known as a camera obscura,
usually has a darkened chamber with a lens at the entrance
thereof to permit light from external objects to enter and to
form an image of the objects on a screen in the chamber.
(2) Note. The combinations classified here are often
constructed to function normally only when the light rays
approaching the entrant lens from the object are
substantially parallel, under which conditions the image
produced by the device is always greatly reduced relative to
the size of the object. The lens and screen combinations
classified in Class 353, Optics: Image Projectors, differ
from those classified here in that they are constructed to
operate normally only when the light rays approaching the
entrant lens from the object are of the widely diverging
type, that is, when the object is near the first principal
focal plane of the entrant lens, under which conditions the
image produced by the device is enlarged relative to the size
of the object, a condition that usually necessitates the use
of intense artifical object illumination to provide an
adequately illuminated image. Moreover, the lens and screen
combinations of Class 353, Optics: Image Projectors, always
have their object and screen in the conjugate focal planes of
the projection lens employed with the screen spaced more
distant from the lens than the object, while the lens and
screen combinations of this subclass 448 have their object
and screen substantially at infinity and at the principal
focal plane of the lens respectively.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
369 and 400, for a compound lens system combined with a
viewing screen.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 18, 47, 67, 72+,
74+, and 79+ for an image projector having a light source or
means to concentrate solar light and including a lens and
screen combination. See (2) Note above.
Subclass:
449
With reflector or additional screen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
including another screen or a reflector which usually is
between the first screen and a projector.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
447 for camera lucidas which include reflectors.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 67, 73, 77, and 78
for an image projector having a screen and a reflector.
Subclass:
450
Border, mask, shade, or curtain:
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
including means connected to the screen to shield or shade
the screen or to modify the contrast between the screen and
the surrounding area.
(1) Note. For the purpose of this subclass, drapes, hoods,
and covers are considered to be curtains.
Subclass:
451
Curved:
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
wherein the surface of the screen is articulated rather than
flat.
(1) Note. In this subclass the overall shape or surface of
the screen is curved but subclasses 455 and 459 have curved
individual elements but the overall surface of the screen is
generally flat.
Subclass:
452
Embedded particles:
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
including a mass or sheet of material (e.g., resin, etc.)
with particles partially or fully embedded therein to affect
the light transmission or reflection characteristics of the
screen, the particles having characteristics such as a
particular geometric shape, size, or refractive index.
(1) Note. The screens in Class 428, Stock Material or
Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 143+ may include particles
claimed as light diffusing or as causing translucency.
However, if the particles are claimed as having certain
refractive index, size or shape, or an index or size relative
to the remainder of the screen material, the patent is
classified here in subclass 452. Further, if a geometric
configuration is formed by the particles in the screen the
patent is also classified here in subclass 452.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
427, Coating Processes, 162 for coating processes, per se,
wherein the product is an optical element.
428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, 143 for a
stock material product containing embedded particles which
diffuse light, and see (1) Note above.
Subclass:
453
Rear projection screen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 452. Subject matter
wherein an image is projected on one side of a screen and
viewed from the opposite side.
Subclass:
454
Unitary sheet comprising plural refracting areas:
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
wherein a plurality of refracting elements are each part of a
unitary plate or mass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
455 for a lenticular screen.
542 for signal reflectors with plural refracting elements
formed as a unitary mass.
Subclass:
455
Lenticular:
This subclass is indented under subclass 454. Subject matter
wherein at least some of the plurality of refracting elements
have spherical or cylindrical curvature.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
542 for signal reflectors with plural refracting elements
formed as a unitary mass.
619 for surfaces composed of lenticular elements.
Subclass:
456
Rear projection screen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 455. Subject matter
wherein an image is projected on one side of a screen and
viewed from the opposite side.
Subclass:
457
With Fresnel lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 456. Subject matter
wherein the lenticulated rear projection screen includes a
Fresnel lens or a lens resembling a plano-convex or
plano-concave lens that is cut into narrow rings and
flattened out.
(1) Note. See subclass 742 for the definition of Fresnel
type lens.
Subclass:
458
Stereoscopic imaging or three dimensional imaging:
This subclass is indented under subclass 455. Subject matter
wherein a lenticulated refractive screen is placed between a
picture and a viewer eye to provide an illusion of relief or
an illusory three dimension picture of a single perspective.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
462 for stereoscopic device that may include a nominal
recitation of a projection screen.
478 for relief illusion.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, 57 for stereoscopic camera or
projectors and subclasses 85+ for special effects,
particularly subclass 86 for devices creating an illusion of
three dimensional viewing without employing separate left and
right images.
Subclass:
459
Unitary sheet comprising plural reflecting areas:
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
wherein a plurality of discrete reflecting elements are part
of a unitary plate or sheet, the reflecting elements
redirecting the impinging light in different directions.
(1) Note. The discrete elements are usually angularly
related or curved.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
530 for a unitary sheet comprising a plurality of cube
corner or triple reflectors.
546 for discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary
mass.
619 for surfaces composed of lenticular elements.
Subclass:
460
Rear projection screen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
wherein an image is projected on one side of a screen and
viewed from the opposite side.
Subclass:
461
Roll up screen:
This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter
wherein the screen is flexible and can be wound around a
roller for easy storage or for portability.
Subclass:
462
STEREOSCOPIC:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter comprising (1) a separate optical system for
each eye of one person, which are looking at a common object,
for producing separate visual records containing information
from the two different points of view relative to that
object, or (2) the stereoscopic record itself, or (3) the
devices for viewing such records.
(1) Note. This subclass takes optical systems of stereo
projectors and cameras which are not sufficient to constitute
a complete projector or camera.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
478 for devices giving an illusion of relief but where
information is obtained only from a single point of view.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
33, Geometrical Instruments, subclass 1 for measuring
stereoscopes and subclass 20.4 for plotting stereoscopes
combined with a stylus.
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 1 for
exhibitors in general, and subclasses 361+ for nonstereo
transparent film viewers.
348, Television, 42 for stereoscopic television systems.
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, 57 for stereoscopic motion
picture cameras.
353, Optics: Image Projectors, 7 for attachments which
convert a conventional projector to a stereoscopic image
projector.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, 12 for base line type
range or height finders which include stereoscopic viewers
and subclass 390 for mensuration or configuration comparison
devices which may involve stereo-viewers.
378, X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, 41 for a
stereoscopic X-ray or gamma ray system.
396, Photography, 324 for stereoscopic camera.
Subclass:
463
Having record with lenticular surface:
This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter
comprising a record with a plurality of reflecting or
transmitting elements, each having a curved or figured
surface.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
455 for lenticular projection screens.
619 for surfaces composed of lenticular elements.
642 for lenses generally.
727 for lenses having concave and/or convex reflecting
surfaces with coatings.
Subclass:
464
With right and left channel discriminator (e.g., polarized or
colored light):
This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter
associated with stereo systems wherein by appropriate viewing
devices (e.g., colored or polarizing spectacles), light rays
representing the right and left stereoscopic channels and
having different optical properties (e.g., color, direction
of polarization), in accordance with the channel they
represent, will affect only the eye appropriate to a given
channel.
(1) Note. This subclass includes for example, (1) apparatus
for forming superimposed images from light rays having
different optical properties, (2) the record containing right
and left stereo images characterized by having different
optical properties, or (3) the viewing devices for
discriminating between the light rays from the right and left
images.
Subclass:
465
Using polarized light:
This subclass is indented under subclass 464. Subject matter
wherein the particles of the light vibrate perpendicular to
the direction of travel and these vibrations are either in
straight lines, circles, or ellipses.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
483 for optics, systems and elements for polarization of
light or using polarized light.
Subclass:
466
Stereo-viewers:
This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter
comprising either (1) viewing devices which are used to aid
the observer in fusing adjacently mounted right and left
stereoscopic pictures or (2) the adjacently mounted right and
left stereoscopic pictures themselves.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
804 for nonstereo viewers with a significant lens system.
Subclass:
467
View changers:
This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter
including means to facilitate changing from one stereoscopic
slide or picture to another.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, 446 for changeable
exhibitors in general.
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 92 and 103+ for a
slide changer for an image projector.
Subclass:
468
Picture moves linearly past viewing aperture:
This subclass is indented under subclass 467. Subject matter
wherein the slide or picture being viewed moves linearly past
the viewing aperture, i.e., each point on the picture
generates a straight line as it passes the aperture.
Subclass:
469
Using film-strips:
This subclass is indented under subclass 468. Subject matter
wherein a carrier is formed as a tape or strip with
individual elements of a motion picture sequence uniformly
spaced along the strip.
(1) Note. Film strips may include moving film, film-roll
band, ribbon of film, film tape, or film spools.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 37 for strip type
films with a sound record, subclass 56 for methods of working
or making a film strip, subclass 59 for stereoscopic
apparatus involving plural film strips, subclasses 166+ for
drive mechanisms for film strips, and subclasses 232+ for
motion picture carriers.
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 120 for picture
carriers for still projectors.
Subclass:
470
Compensates for camera position (e.g., plotting or mapping
type):
This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter
wherein compensation is made for the orientation or position
of the recording device or devices which produced the stereo
pictures.
(1) Note. This subject matter generally involves
stereoscopes for plotting, mapping, or measuring where the
raw data must be adjusted to compensate for such things as
parallax, different image size, skew, or tilt, etc., caused
by a particular camera orientation.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
33, Geometrical Instruments, subclass 1 for similar subject
matter combined with measuring means and subclass 20.4 for
similar subject matter combined with scribing means.
250, Radiant Energy, 200 for similar devices employing
photocells.
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 6 for an image
projector for stereoscopic mapping or for rectifying an
aerial photograph.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 2 for contour
plotting devices which may involve stereo-viewers.
Subclass:
471
Reflected line of sight:
This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter
including means for reflecting the line of sight of at least
one eye of the observer.
Subclass:
472
Pictures offset, transposed, or have respective right or left
sides adjacent:
This subclass is indented under subclass 471. Subject matter
wherein (1) the pictures viewed are vertically offset (i.e.,
the tops and bottoms are not in line), (2) the picture to be
viewed by the right eye is on the left side of the picture to
be viewed by the left eye, or (3) the respective right or
left sides of the stereo pictures are adjacent.
Subclass:
473
Ocular spacing or angle between ocular axes adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter
comprising means for adjusting the spacing of the stereoscope
oculars or means for adjusting the angular relationship of
their optical axes.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
412 for binocular lenses having adjustable interocular
spacing.
Subclass:
474
Collapsible:
This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter
wherein the stereoscope after use can be folded, collapsed,
or dismantled to form a more compact package or wherein the
stereoscope, prior to use, is folded, collapsed, or
dismantled.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
817 for lenses with foldable or collapsible supports.
Subclass:
475
Having Illumination:
This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter
including means to illuminate or improve the illumination of
the stereo picture.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
798 for illuminating a viewer including a significant lens
system.
Subclass:
476
Ocular to picture distance adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter
including adjustment of the distance between the stereoscopic
eyepieces and the viewed picture.
Subclass:
477
Supporting, mounting, enclosing, or light shielding
structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter
comprising supporting, mounting, enclosing or light shielding
structure for stereo viewer or its components.
(1) Note. Examples of this subclass are stereoscopic hoods,
cases or handles.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
407 for compound lens binocular with supports or handles.
811 for lenses with supports.
Subclass:
478
RELIEF ILLUSION:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter for giving a depth or relief effect comprising
a visual record which contains information of the object
viewed obtained from only one point of view.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
462 for stereoscopic devices where the visual record
contains information obtained from two different points of
view.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
348, Television, subclass 44 for pseudo stereoscopic
television.
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 86 for a motion
picture device for depth illusion.
Subclass:
479
Reflected line of sight:
This subclass is indented under subclass 478. Subject matter
wherein the line of sight of at least one eye of the observer
is reflected.
Subclass:
480
BINOCULAR DEVICES:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter comprising one separate optical element,
aperture or tube for each eye of the user or comprising a
single optical element used alternately by each eye.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
404 for telescopic binocular having plural optical axes.
407 for binocular type compound lens system.
466 for stereoscopic viewing devices.
618 for systems including a single optical channel which
merges to or from a plural optical channel, the plural
channel lacking the binocular use.
Subclass:
481
Binocular loupe type:
This subclass is indented under subclass 480. Subject matter
including a support shaped to position one or more lenses
before each eye so that the lenses move with the head of the
user.
(1) Note. The support may be adapted to be attached
directly to either the head, e.g., a head band, or spectacle
frames.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
407 for binocular type compound lens systems.
815 for such structure which is body or apparel carried.
816 for monocular loupes.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
2, Apparel, 426 for goggles.
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
41 for spectacles and eyeglasses. See Lines With Other
Classes and Within This Class, Lenses, in the 351 Class
Definition for the distinction between the vision correcting
structure of Class 351 and the magnifying structure of Class
359.
Subclass:
482
Reflected line of sight:
This subclass is indented under subclass 480. Subject matter
wherein the line of sight of at least one eye of the observer
is reflected.
Subclass:
483
POLARIZATION WITHOUT MODULATION:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein the polarization of an incoming light
beam is modified in a time invariant fashion as a result of
passing through some optical device.
(1) Note. Where both a polarizing device and a composition
are claimed, the patent is classified here and
cross-referenced to Class 252, subclass 585.
(2) Note. Where a method of making the polarizing device is
claimed as well as the polarizing device, the patent is
classified here and cross-referenced to any other class
providing for the method.
(3) Note. The nominal recitation of a polarizing area in
the form of a design, image, etc., is sufficient to include
this subject matter in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
122 for optical multiplex communications, using
polarization.
246 for electro-optic modulation of polarized light.
281 for magneto-optic modulation of polarized light.
301 for light wave directional control of polarized light.
371 and 386, for compound lens systems combined with
polarizers.
437 for polarizers used in a scale or indicia reading.
465 for polarizers used in stereoscopic systems.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly subclass
548 for illuminated signs utilizing polarizers.
250, Radiant Energy, subclass 225 for a light polarizer and
a photocell and subclasses 505.1+ for invisible radiation
control devices exclusive of infrared and ultraviolet devices
which may include polarization devices.
252, Compositions, subclass 585 for chemical compositions
which produce polarized light.
313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 112 for
electric lamps and electronic tubes combined with a
polarizer.
343, Communications: Radio Wave Antennas, subclass 756 for
antennas with a polarization converter and subclasses 909+
for radio wave polarizations, per se.
349, Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, subclass 194
for liquid crystal polarizer.
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
subclass 49, 215, and 232 for light-polarizing devices used
in eye examining vision testing and correcting means.
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 20 for polarizers
used with image projectors.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, 30 for gem or crystal
examining using polarized light; subclass 326 for
spectrometers which utilize polarized light; and subclasses
364+ for polarized light examination devices generally.
365, Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 121
for polarization techniques used in the storage and retrieval
of information.
472, Amusement Devices, 57 for a theatrical stage device
which may use a polarizer.
Subclass:
484
Time invariant electric, magnetic or electromagnetic field
responsive (e.g., electro-optical, magneto-optical):
This subclass is indented under subclass 483. Subject matter
wherein an electrical, magnetic, or electromagnetic field,
which is unchanging in time, is applied to the device
producing the polarization.
(1) Note. This would include optical isolators and
circulators.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
360, Dynamic Magnetic Information Storage or Retrieval,
subclass 114 for magneto-optical storage systems.
365, Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 122
for information masking using magneto-optical polarization.
Subclass:
485
Light polarization without any external input:
This subclass is indented under subclass 483. Subject matter
wherein an optical device causes optical energy to vibrate in
accordance with a regular pattern that differs from the input
without the application of any supplemental energy.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
346, Recorders, 107.1 for photos:graphic recorder systems
where a phenomenal record is made of an output signal.
347, Incremental Printing of Symbolic Information, 224 for
apparatus or processes for marking record receiver using
radiation energy (e.g., light or beam), subclasses 129+ for
electrostatic marking apparatus or processes including photo
scanning device.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 368 for
polarimeters which include electro-optical light rotation.
Subclass:
486
By grid or dipoles:
This subclass is indented under subclass 485. Subject matter
wherein electrical conductors in the form of a grid (i.e.,
each grid opening forms a half wavelength of the applied
light) or half wavelength dipoles embedded in the medium
produce polarization of the applied light.
Subclass:
487
By reflection or refraction (e.g., Brewster angle):
This subclass is indented under subclass 485. Subject matter
wherein a light beam is polarized as a result of either (1)
striking a surface and returning into the originating medium
or (2) redirection as it passes through media of differing
optical densities.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
486 for dipole and grid polarizers.
Subclass:
488
With particular medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 487. Subject matter
wherein details of the reflecting or refracting medium are
recited (e.g., physical composition, structure, specific
indexes of refraction, or thickness of layers).
(1) Note. Physical shape (other than layered mediums) or
arrangement of elements or mediums is not considered a
particular medium for this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
252, Compositions, subclass 585 for chemical compositions,
per se, which produce polarized light.
Subclass:
489
Polarization (direction or magnitude) varies over surface of
the medium (e.g., vectograph):
This subclass is indented under subclass 485. Subject matter
comprising a surface which transmits or reflects light and
whose ability to polarize light is not uniform across the
surface.
(1) Note. This variation in polarizing ability may be
continuous or discontinuous and may form any type of pattern.
For example, the different areas of a surface may form an
image or design as in a "vectograph".
Subclass:
490
By dichroic medium:
This subclass is indented under subclass 485. Subject matter
including an optical element which effects the degree of
polarization dependent upon the relative absorption therein
of the two components or vectors of light.
(1) Note. A dichroic element will transmit light of one
color and reflect light of the complementary color with
little light being absorbed. These elements are composed of
superimposed strata of dielectric material, which are
classified in subclass 580.
(2) Note. Included here are elements where the medium
comprises a lamination or a coating on a supporting structure
and where the supporting structure is significant or the
means to form the lamination or coating is significant.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
appropriate subclasses for processes of adhesively bonding
laminae.
427, Coating Processes, 162 for coating processes, per se,
where the product is an optical element.
Subclass:
491
Stain or dye:
This subclass is indented under subclass 490. Subject matter
wherein a coloring agent is absorbed by the polarization
medium to affect the polarization of the applied light beam.
Subclass:
492
Oriented particles:
This subclass is indented under subclass 490. Subject matter
wherein the polarization of the applied light is dependent
upon the spatial positioning of microscopic particles
embedded in the dichroic medium.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
486 for embedded dipoles.
490 for polarization caused by the molecular orientation of
the matrix material or of a reaction product.
491 for stain or dye molecules acting as oriented
particles.
Subclass:
493
Glare prevention by discriminating against polarized light:
This subclass is indented under subclass 485. Subject matter
wherein unwanted glare-producing light, having a particular
polarization, is eliminated by a polarizing structure.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
501 for two superimposed relatively adjustable polarizers
mounted as a unit and used to reduce or control light
intensity.
601 for glare reduction not utilizing a polarizer.
Subclass:
494
By birefringent element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 485. Subject matter
including an element having the property of dividing a ray or
beam of energy into two polarized rays or beams (known as the
ordinary and extraordinary rays), the directions of
polarization being at right angles to each other.
(1) Note. A birefringent material which has been treated
with a dichroic dye to absorb the ordinary or extraordinary
ray is no longer considered to be birefringent within the
meaning of this definition. A birefringent element in the
form of a Nicol prism where the unwanted ray is deflected is
classified here.
Subclass:
495
For beam deflection or splitting:
This subclass is indented under subclass 494. Subject matter
wherein the entire beam or a portion of the beam is caused to
change direction for positioning purpose or wherein the beam
is split into two or more portions.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
301 for polarized beam directional modulation.
487 for beam deflection and splitting using nonbirefringent
medium.
496 for prism structures which could be used for beam
splitting.
Subclass:
496
Prisms:
This subclass is indented under subclass 494. Subject matter
wherein the birefringent element is formed into a structure
bound in part by two plane faces that are not parallel and
combinations of the structure.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
831 for prisms, per se.
Subclass:
497
Using plural elements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 494. Subject matter
wherein beam polarization is achieved by multiple
birefringent elements.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
250 for plural mediums in electro-optic polarized light
modulation.
301 for plural mediums used to deflect the beam where at
least one of the mediums is field responsive.
371 and 386, for microscopes using polarized light which may
utilize birefringent elements.
455 for lenticular projection screens with birefringent
elements
496 and 497+, for prism structures made up of plural
elements and for plural element polarization.
Subclass:
498
Frequency filter or interference effects:
This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter
wherein plural elements act to pass a particular frequency or
band of frequencies, or wherein interference effects are used
to produce effects such as color or an interference pattern.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
370 for interference microscopes which may utilize
birefringent elements.
490 for color effects using dichroic medium.
634 for wavelength selective beam splitting systems.
885 for an absorption filter.
Subclass:
499
Using compensation techniques:
This subclass is indented under subclass 497. Subject matter
wherein at least one of the elements corrects for unwanted
effects, such as those due to temperature.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
249 for compensating systems in a polarized light
electro-optic modulator.
Subclass:
500
With particular material or mounting structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 494. Subject matter
wherein details of the birefringent material, such as the
type, size, shape, crystal cut, or treatment thereof or
detailed structures for mounting the material are recited.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
496 for polarization by a prism.
Subclass:
501
By relatively adjustable superimposed or in series
polarizers:
This subclass is indented under subclass 485. Subject matter
wherein the polarizers are positioned one on top of another
or arranged in a row and their positions are adjustable.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
500 for mounting structure of superimposed birefringent
elements.
Subclass:
502
With color filter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 485. Subject matter
where a polarizing structure is combined with structure to
selectively absorb or transmit specific light wavelengths.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
490 for similar subject matter where the color is produced
by a dichroic medium. (See (1) Note under subclass 490 for
definition of dichroic.)
498 for similar subject matter where the only color produced
is a result of interference between the ordinary and
extraordinary light rays.
Subclass:
503
EXTENDED SPACING STRUCTURE FOR OPTICAL ELEMENTS:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including (a) means for maintaining different
types of optical elements significantly separated in a fixed
or adjustable relationship along the optical axis or (b)
means for maintaining lenses significantly separated as in a
Galilean telescope or door peep.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
744 for afocal lenses (e.g., Galilean telescopes).
894 for optical apertures or tubes or transparent closures.
896 for miscellaneous optical devices.
Subclass:
504
Wide angle (e.g., door peep):
This subclass is indented under subclass 503. Subject matter
wherein an objective element is designed to give a wide field
of view, usually at least 120 degrees.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
744 for afocal lenses (e.g., Galilean telescopes).
819 for lens mounts.
Subclass:
505
With screen or reticle in real image plane:
This subclass is indented under subclass 503. Subject matter
including a real image display structure or a cross-hair or
emblem at a real image plane.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
369 for a microscope with a screen.
400 for a telescope with a screen.
422 for a variable magnification telescope including a relay
and a reticle.
424 for a telescope with a relay and reticle.
427 for a telescope with focusing or relatively sliding
barrels and a reticle.
428 for a telescope with reticle.
Subclass:
506
Extension of tubular element adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 503. Subject matter
including a sliding structure, a bellows, or a telescoping
structure for adjusting an optical barrel along the optical
axis relative to another structure.
(1) Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 362, Compound lens system and titled "Separation of
optical elements axially adjustable", "Variable
magnification" or including the word "focusing" may include
subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass.
Subclass:
507
PROTECTION FROM MOISTURE OR FOREIGN PARTICLE:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including structure to stop moisture or
foreign matter from coming into contact with optical elements
or means to remove moisture or foreign matter from optical
elements.
(1) Note. Storage or container, per se, for an optical
element is classified in Class 206, Special Receptacle or
Package, particularly subclasses 5+ for eyeglasses or
spectacles and subclasses 316.1+ for other optical or
photos:graphic devices or elements.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, 300.1 for
clean-ing machines involving air blast or suction.
134, Cleaing and Liquid Contact With Sol-ids, appropriate
subclasses.
427, Coating Processes, 162 for an optical element produced
with a coating process.
Subclass:
508
Optical element rotates:
This subclass is indented under subclass 507. Subject matter
where an optical element or a shield therefor is rotated or
otherwise moved to throw off moisture or other foreign
matter, usually by centrifugal force.
(1) Note. The optical element may be rotated by any motor
including one operated by air passing over vanes as in an air
operated turbine.
Subclass:
509
Fluid directed across optical element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 507. Subject matter
with structure to direct a fluid across an optical element to
blow or wash moisture, or other foreign matter off or to pull
such matter off by suction created by the moving fluid.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
508 for apparatus where fluid is directed to vanes, as in a
turbine, which rotates the optical element or a shield
therefor, such as a transparent disc in fron of an objective
lens.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, 300.1 for
cleaning machine involving air blast or suction.
Subclass:
510
Microscope drape:
This subclass is indented under subclass 507. Subject matter
including a thin flexible structure loosely encircling a
microscope to isolate the microscope from its surroundings.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
368 for microscope, per se.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
206, Special Receptacle or Package, subclass 305 and 316.1+
for a special container for an optical instrument.
Subclass:
511
Cap or cover:
This subclass is indented under subclass 507. Subject matter
wherein a usually flanged or flat member covers the end of a
barrel of an optical device in order to protect an unused
lens, located within a barrel, from dust or from damage by
impact with foreign objects.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
611 for a shade to deflect unwanted light from a lens.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
15, Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning, subclass 247
for a cover or cover holder.
439, Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for
movable or removable nonuse covering means.
Subclass:
512
Humidity or temperature control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 507. Subject matter
with means for maintaining a desired humidity level or
temperature or for increasing or decreasing the humidity
level or temperature from its ambient value.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
395 for a stage or slide carrier with temperature control.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
34, Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate
subclasses.
219, Electric Heating, subclass 219 for an electrically
heated mirror.
Subclass:
513
Sealing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 507. Subject matter
with means to seal the optical elements from the atmosphere
so that dust or moisture, etc., does not fall on them.
Subclass:
514
Mirror, prism or signal reflector:
This subclass is indented under subclass 513. Subject matter
wherein an element being sealed includes a mirror, prism, or
signal reflecting structure.
Subclass:
515
SIGNAL REFLECTOR:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein elements may be specular or diffusing
to reflect a light to an observer for signalling purposes.
(1) Note. The presence of a reflector usually is the
desired information com-unicated to an observer, i.e., any
light, as from an observer's automobile headlights, reflected
from the reflector makes the presence of the reflector, and
thus danger or need for caution, known to the observer;
however, in indented subclass 527, below, some of the
reflectors reflect light from a traffic signal light to an
observer or reflect light from a source to an observer merely
to determine if the source is operating.
(2) Note. The structure of signs with the nominal
recitation of a signal reflector are classified in Class 40.
In particular an "indicia" design or the conveyance of
specific information would be classifiable in Class 40.
(3) Note. Most of the patents in these subclasses relate to
highway traffic in the form of indicating the presence of an
approaching curve, vehicle, or pedestrian on a roadway.
(5) Note. Since Class 359 is considered superior to Class
116 (See Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class), the
use of a signal reflector as a signal source or indicator
will be clasified in Class 359, unless the details of the
signals and indicators are specified.
(6) Note. Track reflectors having utility with railroads
are classified in Class 246.
(7) Note. A nominal recitation, i.e., no optical
limitations, of a signal reflector combined with the
specifics of its support is classified in Class 248.
(8) Note. The patents of this and indented subclasses are
to use the signal reflector to attract attention as opposed
to being the source of illumination of Class 362.
(9) Note. A lens, as in a plastic tail light of an
automobile used to identify an automobile's presence to a
following automobile, is classified in Signal Reflectors
(subclasses 515+), rather than Lens (subclasses 642+).
(10) Note. A mirror, located along the side of the road to
cause a light flash for identification of the edge of the
road as an automobile approaches, is classified in Signal
Reflectors (subclasses 515+), rather than Mirror, (subclasses
838+) since a nominal recitation of a mirror claimed with
other structure is classified with the other structure.
(11) Note. The combination of an article of clothing and a
signal reflector is classified in this subclass since the
combination only is classified in Class 2, if not otherwise
classifiable.
(12) Note. The combination of an animal collar (i.e.,
nominal recitation of a collar or harness) together with a
signal reflector is classified with the signal reflector of
this and indented sub-classes, while a reflector claimed in
combination with more than a nominal collar is classified in
Class 119, subclass 858.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
514 for signal reflector sealing from mois-ture or foreign
particles.
838 for mirrors which reflect a substantial portion of
incident light, but the re-flected light is not used for
signalling purposes.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
36, Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 137 for light
reflecting or illumination at-tached to a shoe.
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, sub-class 208 for a
license plate and reflector, subclass 219 for translucent
mirrors with indicia, and subclasses 582+ for illuminated
signs which may include reflective elements.
116, Signals and Indicators, subclass 20 for helios:graphic
code signaling and subclasses 63+ for mechanical street
traffic signalling structure, such as a semphore, light
shutter, or pointer.
119, Animal Husbandry, subclass 858 for an animal collar
including a reflector.
246, Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 474 for railway
track reflectors which are disclosed as having special
utility with railroads.
248, Supports, 201 for brackets and subclasses 466+ for
mirror or picture type supports.
250, Radiant Energy, 483.1 for reflectors including
luminescent, fluorescent or phosphorescent material.
264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating
Processes, subclass 1.9 for reflective type.
301, Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles, subclass 37 for
protectors or trim members.
313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, 113 for an
electric lamp or discharge device with a reflector integral
therewith.
340, Communications: Electrical, appropri-ate subclasses for
traffic and vehicle signal lights, 815.4 for visual
indicator, and subclass 815.76 for lens type indicator.
342, Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and Devices
(e.g., Ra-dar, Radio Navigation), 5 for radar reflectors,
i.e., reflectors of radio frequency waves.
362, Illumination, for artificial illumination means, 459
contains illumination with vehicle structure, subclasses 296+
for projectors with reflec-tors, and subclasses 341+ for
constant reflectors.
404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, 9 includes
reflector support structure combined with road structure.
427, Coating Processes, 162 for optical element produced.
428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Ar-ticles, subclass 98
for structurally de-fined web or sheet.
Subclass:
516
Body carried:
This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter
including apparatus to enable a user (human or animal) to
carry the reflector.
(1) Note. A reflector carried by the hand or wrist but not
worn by the user, belongs in this subclass, rather than
subclass 517.
(2) Note. The combination of either a flashlight or a cane
with an attached reflector, which is normally carried by the
hand, belongs in this subclass.
(3) Note. The combination of an article of clothing and a
signal reflector belongs in this subclass not with the
apparel of Class 2, since the combination only belongs in
Class 2, if not otherwise classifiable.
(4) Note. The combination of an animal collar (i.e.,
nominal recitation of a collar or harness) together with a
signal reflector is classified with the signal reflector not
the collar of Class 119, subclass while a reflector claimed
in combination with more than a nominal collar is classified
in Class 119, subclass 858.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
517 for a signal reflector that is part of or attached to an
article worn on the hand or wrist of the user.
518 for reflectors that are an integral part of the clothing
used as apparel.
519 for reflectors that are worn over clothing, but not
held.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
36, Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 137 for light
reflecting or illumination attached to a shoe.
63, Jewelry.
116, Signals and Indicators, subclass 35 for motion and
direction indicators for vehicles.
119, Animal Husbandry, subclass 858 for an animal collar
including a reflector.
340, Communications: Electrical, subclass 321 for portable
self-contained (e.g., movie usher's signalling flashlight)
and subclass 475 for turn signals.
362, Illumination, subclass 103 for wearing apparel or body
support, subclass 104 for jewelry with wearing apparel or
body support.
Subclass:
517
Worn by hand or wrist:
This subclass is indented under subclass 516. Subject matter
wherein the reflector is a part of or attached to clothing or
a device both of which are worn by the wrist or hand.
(1) Note. A glove having a reflector is classified in this
subclass.
(2) Note. A wrist band having a reflector is classified in
this subclass.
(3) Note. A reflector carried by the hand or wrist, but not
worn, is classified in subclass 516.
(4) Note. Safety belts, pins, etc., wherein the sole
function of the apparatus is to mount a signal reflector for
safety purposes are classified in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
516 for reflectors that are carried by the body and not worn
by the user.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
2, Apparel, 158 for hand or arm covering.
36, Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 71.5 for preformed,
externally applied, wear-connecting attachments.
63, Jewelry, 3 for bracelets and subclasses 15+ for finger
rings.
362, Illumination, subclass 104 for jewelry with wearing
apparel or body support.
Subclass:
518
Permanently fixed to clothing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 516. Subject matter
wherein a reflector is attached to an article of clothing and
remains on the clothing when a person discontinues wearing
the clothing.
(1) Note. Signal reflectors that are part of the clothing a
person wears and the clothing serves other purposes than as a
mount for a reflector are classified in this subclass.
(2) Note. A belt, having a reflector, worn through the
loops of a pair of trousers functions as an article of
clothing and is classified and in this subclass.
(3) Note. Signal reflectors that are transparent spheres
permanently fixed to clothing by glue, transparency, etc.,
are classified in this subclass.
(4) Note. A helmet, hat, shoe, or boot is considered
clothing for this subclass, but Class 36, subclass 137 takes
light reflecting or illumination attached to a shoe.
(5) Note. A pin with a reflector is not permanently fixed
to clothing, but is classified in subclass 519.
(6) Note. A signal reflector permanently attached to an
animal collar, leash, or harness is classifed in this
subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
519 for safety belts, pins, etc., having a reflector and the
sole purpose of wearing the article is for safety reasons. A
safety belt is not worn through the loops of a pair of
trousers.
538 for minute transparent reflective spheres mounted on a
flexible substrate that is not clothing.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
2, Apparel, 158 for hand or arm covering.
36, Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 71.5 for preformed,
externally applied, wear-connected attachments.
63, Jewelry, 3 for bracelets and subclasses 15+ for finger
rings.
Subclass:
519
Worn over clothing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 516. Subject matter
wherein the reflector is mounted on apparatus that is placed
over the apparel of a user.
(1) Note. This would include a safety belt, a safety belt
harness, and pins that are worn solely for the reflecting
properties not as part of the normal dress of the person. A
safety belt is not used through the loops of a pair of
trousers.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
516 for a signal reflector that is held by the user rather
than worn.
518 for a belt used as an article of clothing for a pair of
trousers which also has a reflector integral or as part of
the belt.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
2, Apparel, 158 for hand or arm covering.
36, Boots, Shoes, and Leggings, subclass 71.5 for preformed,
externally applied, wear-connecting attachments.
63, Jewelry, 3 for bracelets and subclasses 15+ for finger
rings.
Subclass:
520
Moving:
This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter
where the signal reflector is in a continuous state of motion
to be more easily observed.
(1) Note. The continuous state of motion could be
vibration, oscillation, or rotation on a specified device
whether or not they are "claimed" as rotating etc.
(2) Note. The motion of reflectors resulting from vehicle
vibration, vehicle wheels, wind action, etc., are considered
to be an irregular nature for this subclass and not
periodic.
(3) Note. The beam deflection caused by a nonperiodic
moving reflector solely to present a clearer observation of
the reflector belong in this subclass not beam deflection by
the reflector to communicate some specific information via
the modulation produced by the signal reflector beam
deflection.
(4) Note. Rigidly mounted reflectors such as bicycle
reflectors mounted on the frame do not belong here but in
subclass 550.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
212 for a periodically moving reflector to produce light
beam deflection/scanning without modulation.
508 for rotating reflector to throw off moisture or foreign
particle.
526 for reflectors that are wobbly mounted on the support.
549 for reflectors rigidly mounted to a vehicle in order to
move exactly as the vehicle.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 208 for a
license plate and reflector, subclasses 427+ and 446+ for
display devices that simulate motion or a changing exhibitor,
subclasses 582+ for illuminated signs which may include
reflective elements.
116, Signals and Indicators, 28 for vehicle, subclasses 46+
for rotatable motion and direction indicators for vehicles,
and subclass 56 for vehicle-energy actuated.
246, Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 125 for electric
automatic highway signals, mine doors, and gates.
Subclass:
521
Pedal mounted:
This subclass is indented under subclass 520. Subject matter
wherein the reflector is attached to the pedal of a vehicle
that requires pedal movement for vehicle motion.
(1) Note. These patents are generally bicycle pedals but
are not limited only to bicycles.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
523 for spoke mounted moving reflectors.
524 for tire, valve stem, wheel, hub cap, or axle mounted
moving reflectors.
550 for reflectors rigidly mounted to a bicycle or
motorcycle.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
74, Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 560 for pedals
and subclasses 594.4 for pedals connected to a crank.
Subclass:
522
Rotating:
This subclass is indented under subclass 520. Subject matter
wherein the reflector movement is rotational about some
axis.
(1) Note. This includes reflectors that are rotated by the
gases expelled from the exhaust pipe of a vehicle.
(2) Note. The structure of signs with the nominal
recitation of a signal reflector are classified in Class 40.
In particular, an "indicia" design or the conveyance of
specific information would be classifiable in Class 40.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
508 for optical elements that are rotated for protection
from moisture or foreign particles.
520 for reflectors that appear to move but are stationary
and moving apertures in front of the reflectors make them
appear to be moving.
525 for wind driven rotating reflectors.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, 430 for rotatable
displays with special effects.
116, Signals and Indicators, 28 for vehicle, subclasses 46+
for rotatable motion and direction indicators for vehicles,
and subclass 56 for vehicle-energy actuated.
Subclass:
523
Spoke mounted:
This subclass is indented under subclass 522. Subject matter
wherein the reflector is attached onto one or more spokes
that position the rim from the hub.
(1) Note. This subclass includes bicycle and motorcycle
spokes as well as any other type of spoked wheel.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
521 for pedal mounted moving reflectors.
524 for tire, valve stem, wheel, hub cap, or axle mounted
moving signal reflectors.
550 for reflectors rigidly mounted on a bicycle or
motorcycle.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
301, Land Vehicles: Wheels, and Axles, subclass 37 for
wheel covers fastened to the spokes of a wheel.
340, Communications: Electrical, appropriate subclasses for
bicycle traffic and vehicle communications.
362, Illumination, 473 with a bicycle or motorcycle
supporting the illumination source.
Subclass:
524
Tire, wheel, valve stem, hub cap, or axle mounted:
This subclass is indented under subclass 522. Subject matter
wherein the reflector is attached to either a rotating tire,
valve stem, wheel, hub cap, or axle of a vehicle.
(1) Note. This also includes reflectors attached to or part
of a dust cover of a valve stem.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
521 for pedal mounted moving reflectors.
523 for spoke mounted moving reflectors.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 587 for tire
and wheel signs.
138, Pipes and Tubular Conduits, subclass 89.4 for inflation
stem dust covers.
301, Land Vehicles: Wheels, and Axles, subclass 37 for
wheel protectors or trim members, or wheel covers fastened to
the spokes of a wheel, and subclass 108 for wheel hub caps.
340, Communications: Electrical, appropriate subclasses for
bicycle traffic and vehicle communications.
362, Illumination, 473 with a bicycle or motorcycle
supporting the illumination source.
Subclass:
525
Wind driven:
This subclass is indented under subclass 522. Subject matter
wherein the rotation of the reflector, attached to a vehicle,
is controlled by wind.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 440 for
rotatable fluid operated display with special effects and
subclass 479 for rotatable fluid operated changing
exhibitor.
116, Signals and Indicators, digest 7 for fluid actuated.
446, Amusement Devices: Toys, 217 for fluid driven
rotatable blade (e.g., pinwheel).
Subclass:
526
Vibration:
This subclass is indented under subclass 520. Subject matter
wherein the signal reflector attracts attention by its own
random movement relative to its support.
(1) Note. This reflector is not driven by any motor or
other source of energy such as the wheel of a vehicle or the
wind.
(2) Note. The reflector is wobbly mounted with respect to
its support.
(3) Note. The reflector has additional movement from that
created by its support (i.e., it is suspended from its
support bracket).
(4) Note. Reflectors rigidly mounted to a support via a
helical or other spring belong in this subclass since they
will vibrate.
(5) Note. A reflector attached to a mudflap of a vehicle
would be classified here since the movement of the mudflap
having the reflector attracts attention.
(6) Note. Rigidly mounted reflectors such as bicycle
reflectors mounted on the frame do not belong here but in
subclass 550.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
520 for reflectors that are in a continuous state of motion
relative to their support.
549 for reflectors that are rigidly mounted on a moving
vehicle.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, 613 for vibratory
signs.
Subclass:
527
For a signal source remote from observer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter
including structure to reflect light from a signal
originating from a source remote from the observer, i.e., not
coming from a light source at the location of the observer.
(1) Note. This structure may be merely a plane mirror
mounted on an automobile hood to reflect light from an
overhead traffic signal to the driver or it may be a
reflector at a street intersection which reflects light from
the headlights of one car to the driver of another car
travelling in a direction approximately 90 degrees different
than that of the first car.
(2) Note. Road reflectors remote from the vehicle, to
reflect all of an automobile's headlight beams back to the
driver are not classified in this subclass since the source
of the vehicle headlight beams are at the location of the
observer.
(3) Note. The reflection of the light beams of one
vehicle's headlights to another vehicle would be classified
in this subclass.
(4) Note. A reflector which reflects a portion of the light
output of a vehicle's headlight or taillight to be observable
by the driver of the vehicle is classified in this subclass,
rather than Class 362, since the reflection is for
observation rather than illumination.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
529 for 3 corner retroreflectors which return a light beam
back to the source.
531 for unitary retroreflectors mounted on the road
surface.
546 for plural reflecting elements for a single sheet or
plate such as in some road reflectors.
551 for reflectors mounted on the roadway that reflect the
light from a vehicle back to the driver of the vehicle.
552 for reflectors mounted adjacent the roadway which
reflect the light beams from a vehicle's headlights back to
the driver of the vehicle.
838 for similar mirrors which are not dis-closed as signal
mirrors, which only have to reflect light, but which are
disclosed as reflecting images.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 559 for
illuminated sign external light source if indicia is
present.
246, Railway Switches and Signals, subclass 474 for track
reflectors. A railway and switch in combination with a
nominally recited signal reflector are also classified in
this class (246).
248, Supports, 476 for adjustable mirror or picture
position.
296, Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, subclass 97.1 for
glare or screen body and subclass 97.2 for specific structure
or properties for diffusing or reflecting light to reduce the
glare on the viewer's eyes.
362, Illumination, 341 for a reflector light modifier.
404, Road Structure, Process, or Appara-tus, subclass 16 for
reflectors used to detect the presence of traffic.
Subclass:
528
Light transmitting from source behind a reflector:
This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter
where the reflector is adapted to transmit light from a
source which is behind the surface of the reflector which is
normally viewed, such as in a tail-light reflector which
transmits light from a light bulb behind the reflector or
lens and also reflects a large amount of light which is
directed to the front surface of the reflector by an external
source such as the headlights of an approaching automobile.
(1) Note. The patents of this subclass use a signal
reflector combination with a light source behind the
reflector in order to attract attention of other vehicles,
either by the light source itself or reflection of the other
vehicle's light.
(2) Note. The use of a reflector to change (i.e.,
concentrate, disperse, collimate) the light from a source for
illumination purposes belong in Class 362 (e.g., the
reflector behind the light source of a headlight used to
direct the outgoing beam in a particular pattern).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
549 for a taillight that reflects incoming light from a
reflector behind the light source that transmits away from
the vehicle.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
362, Illumination, 459 for illumination with vehicle
structure, subclass 494 for mirror or reflector with vehicle
structure (e.g., rear view mirror), subclasses 296+ for a
light source and modifier including a reflector where the
reflector is used to modify the outgoing source light beam,
and subclasses 341+ for reflector light modifiers.
428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 31
for vehicle body ornament.
Subclass:
529
3-Corner retroreflective (i.e., cube corner, trihedral, or
triple reflector type):
This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter
wherein the light is reflected from three reflecting surfaces
and wherein after the three reflections, it moves in a
direction opposite to and parallel to its direction before
the three reflections.
(1) Note. The reflections may be external or internal,
i.e., the light may be reflected without entering the
material from which the reflector is made or the light may
enter one surface of the reflector, be reflected three times
internally, and exit through the same sur-face.
(2) Note. Single or plural 3-corner reflectors are
classified in this subclass but plural reflectors formed into
a single substrate are classified in subclass 530.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
527 for a structure which reflects light from a signal
source remote from an observer.
530 for plural 3-corner reflectors in a single substrate.
831 for prisms, per se.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
65, Glass Manufacturing, 357 for a mold with separating or
clamping.
72, Metal Deforming, 379.2 for deforming sheet metal.
204, Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 281
for electroforming mold or strips, plates, electrodes
apparatus for forming electrolytic elements.
228, Metal Fusion Bonding, 141.1 for the process of
shaping.
249, Static Molds, subclass 117 for container type molding
device.
264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes, subclass 1.9 for reflective composite or
multilayer optical article shaping or treating.
342, Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and
Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio Navigation), 7 for radio wave
cube corner reflectors.
425, Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:
Apparatus, subclass 403 for shaping surfaces, per se, and
subclass 808 for lens mold.
Subclass:
530
Unitary plate or sheet comprising plural reflecting
elements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 529. Subject matter
wherein the reflective elements, such as the individual
triple reflectors, are part of a single plate or sheet
comprising a plurality of the 3-corner reflective elements.
(1) Note. The reflective elements are a part of the
structure of the plate or sheet.
(2) Note. Many of these retroreflectors are used on
highways for road makers.
(3) Note. Plural reflectors combined into a single
substrate are classified in this subclass whereas plural
reflectors using multiple substrates are classified in
subclass 529.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
65, Glass Manufacturing, 357 for a mold with separating or
clamping.
72, Metal Deforming, 379.2 for deforming sheet metal.
204, Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 281
for electroforming mold or strips, plates, electrodes
apparatus for forming electrolytic elements.
228, Metal Fusion Bonding, 141.1 for the process of
shaping.
249, Static Molds subclass 117 for container type molding
device.
264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes, subclass 1.9 for reflective composite or
multilayer optical article shaping or treating.
342, Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and
Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio Navigation), 7 for radio wave
cube corner reflectors.
404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, subclass 14 for
lane marker impregnated with reflective material, subclass 16
for vibration inducing member including a reflector.
425, Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:
Apparatus, subclass 403 for shaping surfaces, per se, and
subclass 808 for lens mold.
Subclass:
531
Mounted on roadway:
This subclass is indented under subclass 530. Subject matter
wherein the reflector is positioned onto the vehicle road
surface in order to enable easier viewing of that portion of
the roadway.
(1) Note. A reflector sign, having a unitary plate of
3-corner reflectors, permanently fastened to a road surface
would belong in this subclass but the same reflector
counterbalanced within a recess in the roadway - ordinarily
up and visible but capable of retraction into the recess when
contacted by the vehicle wheel - is classified in Class 404.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
514 for signal reflector sealing from moisture or foreign
particle.
547 for a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements
mounted on or adjacent the roadway.
551 for a broad reflector mounted on the roadway.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 612 for
highway or street marker.
180, Motor Vehicles, subclass 168 having controlling
apparatus adapted to interact with stationary apparatus which
describes the course of the vehicle's travel.
404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, 9 for traffic
director where the reflector is not permanently fixed to the
road surface.
Subclass:
532
Mounted adjacent roadway:
This subclass is indented under subclass 530. Subject matter
wherein the reflector is positioned off of the roadway
surface but within viewing distance of the driver of a
vehicle in order to enable easier viewing of the edge of the
roadway.
(1) Note. A reflector sign permanently fastened to a road
surface would belong in this subclass but the same reflector
counterbalanced within a recess in the roadway - ordinarily
up and visible but capable of retraction into the recess when
contacted by the vehicle wheel is classified in Class 404.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
514 for signal reflector sealing from moisture or foreign
particle.
547 for a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements
mounted on or adjacent the roadway.
552 for a broadly recited reflector mounted adjacent the
roadway.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 612 for
highway or street marker.
116, Signals and Indicators, 63 for street traffic where the
device for giving signals are generally due to some movement
of some part or element from a normal or nonsignalling or
signal-controlled position (e.g., a semaphore).
180, Motor Vehicles, subclass 168 having controlling
apparatus adapted to interact with stationary apparatus which
describes the course of the vehicle's travel.
404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, 9 for traffic
director where the reflector is not permanently fixed to the
road surface.
Subclass:
533
Mounted on vehicle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 530. Subject matter
wherein the reflector is positioned on a vehicle.
(1) Note. This vehicle could be an airplane, boat,
automobile, train, etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
548 for discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary
mass mounted on a vehicle.
549 for broadly recited reflectors mounted on a vehicle.
Subclass:
534
Including a curved refracting surface:
This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter
including a surface which is curved and which refracts or
bends the light before or after it is reflected.
(1) Note. The reflector operates as a separate function and
is located behind the actual curved refracting surface.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
546 for reflecting elements formed as a unitary piece.
642 for lenses generally, and especially subclasses 727+ for
lenses including concave or convex reflecting surfaces.
Subclass:
535
Within individual indentations:
This subclass is indented under subclass 534. Subject matter
wherein the curved refracting surface is positioned either
within an indentation of the substrate or within a socket
created by a plurality of elements to hold it in place.
(1) Note. Multiple minute spheres used to retain a much
larger curved refracting optical element within a socket for
the larger element belong in this subclass.
(2) Note. These indentations can be produced by a platen
which forces refracting beads against a substrate to form
indentations, thus producing separate indentations for each
bead.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
543 for individual reflector (not microsphere) element
mount.
Subclass:
536
Minute transparent spheres:
This subclass is indented under subclass 534. Subject matter
where the elements which refract and reflect are tiny
transparent spheres, commonly called "little glass beads".
(1) Note. The elements may be partially or fully embedded.
The matrix may be attached to a surface of any shape such as
a spherical or a flat surface.
(2) Note. These spheres range in size between 3-6 mils
(i.e., 0.003 - 0.006 inches).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
539 for a mixture of spheres in a liquid binder (e.g., paint
or resin).
540 for spheres placed on top of a binder (e.g., resin,
asphalt, glue).
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
501, Compositions: Ceramic, subclass 34 for reflective
glass beads.
523, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 219 for
process of forming glass void.
Subclass:
537
Directional reflection (e.g., prevent viewing unless critical
angle of light is used):
This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter
wherein the reflective structure behind the spheres is
arranged to permit viewing of the image behind the spheres,
only if the incident light is transmitted to the spheres at
the desired critical angle.
(1) Note. The directional reflection of this subclass
permits viewing of the image only by those authorized (i.e.,
knowing the angle).
(2) Note. The image is not changed by the directional
reflection but observation is accomplished dependent upon
viewing at the proper angle.
(3) Note. A picture that is covered by a substrate
containing minute glass spheres to permit viewing of the
picture via the reflected light only if the incident light is
at a predetermined angle belongs in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
380, Cryptography, subclass 54 for modifying optical image
(e.g., transmissive overlay) by changing its visible
appearance.
Subclass:
538
On flexible substrate (e.g., flexible sheeting, bumper
sticker, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter
wherein the spheres are placed on a flexible material by
transfer, glue, etc., and this material can be used for an
reflective purpose.
(1) Note. Spheres embedded in a resin that remains flexible
(e.g., elastomeric composition) are classified in this
subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
518 for signal reflectors (e.g., transparent spheres, etc.)
permanently fixed to clothing (e.g., by glue, transparency,
etc.).
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
2, Apparel, for apparel, per se.
Subclass:
539
Mixture in liquid binder (e.g., paint, resin):
This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter
wherein the spheres are located within the mixture of paint
or resin and are simultaneously applied to the surface as a
complete mixture.
(1) Note. This mixture can be painted onto signs, vehicles,
or roadway surfaces.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
540 for spheres that are placed on top of a binder prior to
the hardening of the binder.
551 for reflective paint that does not have minute spheres.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
106, Compositions: Coating or Plastic, subclass 228 and 253
for a natural resin or derivative containing filler, dye, or
pigment.
523, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 527 for
glass DNRM nonreactive material mixed with a composition.
Subclass:
540
Placed on top of binder (e.g., resin, asphalt, glue, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter
wherein the binder is first placed on the surface and
subsequently, prior to hardening of the binder, the spheres
are placed thereon to ensure that they are fixed to the
surface via the binder.
(1) Note. This includes exposed spheres which are glued to
the surface, resulting in an exposed glass-sphere surface.
(2) Note. Spheres which are not completely surrounded by
the binder belong in this subclass.
(3) Note. A monolayer (single) of spheres on a binder
belong in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
539 for spheres which are completely surrounded by the
binder.
Subclass:
541
With single transparent coating between spheres and
atmosphere:
This subclass is indented under subclass 540. Subject matter
wherein a single coating, which is transparent to light,
surrounds and either (1) completely envelopes the normally
exposed surface of the sphere, (2) touches only a portion of
the spheres, or (3) is an interface for the minute spheres
where the spheres are confined but not touching the exposed
surface.
(1) Note. This single coating will cover the sphere
relative to the environment yet have no optical effect on the
light that would impinge on a normally exposed surface of the
sphere. If reference is made to protection of the reflector
from moisture or foreign particle it belongs in subclass
514.
(2) Note. A transparent coating used simply to hold the
spheres onto the binder is not considered a sealer as in
subclass 514.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
514 for a sealed signal reflector to protect it from
moisture or foreign particle.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 34
for light transmissive sheets with gas space therebetween and
edge sealed (e.g., double glazed storm window, etc.).
Subclass:
542
Plural refracting elements formed as a unitary mass:
This subclass is indented under subclass 534. Subject matter
including a unitary mass of transparent material which
comprises a plurality of curved refracting sur-faces.
(1) Note. This unitary mass performs refraction of the
incoming light prior to reflection by the reflector, and also
of the outgoing light after reflection.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
454 for projection screens having a unitary sheet of plural
refracting areas.
530 for plural cube corner reflectors which together make up
a unitary plate.
546 for discrete reflecting elements which comprise a
unitary mass.
Subclass:
543
With individual reflector element mount:
This subclass is indented under subclass 534. Subject matter
including means for mounting the individual optical elements
such as small socket-like mounts in which the elements are
inserted and held or further including means for mounting the
small socket-like mounts.
(1) Note. Reflector buttons that simply reflect light
falling on them, autocollimating, without the creation of a
single image of an object at a focal point are classified in
this subclass rather than the lens subclasses of this class.
(2) Note. Although reflector buttons are often called
"lenses" they are not classified in the lens subclasses of
this class unless they create a single image of an object at
a focal point.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
535 for minute transparent spheres within individual
indentations.
546 for a multifaceted single glass reflector which is
considered a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements.
642 for lenses, per se.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, 201 for a license
plate with a theft-preventive feature.
404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, 9 for reflector
support structure combined with road structure.
Subclass:
544
Including a snap, spring clip, or spring retainer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 543. Subject matter
wherein either the curved refracting surface or the
reflecting surface behind the refractor are individually
mounted on a support by being pushed into a retainer which
opens for entrance and closes around a portion of the element
when it is in the settled position or a coil spring holds
each element in place.
(1) Note. The snap or spring clip retainer could either
clamp onto the refractor/reflector or could be used to clamp
a retainer to a housing and the refractor/reflector force
fitted into the retainer. The combination of a
refractor/reflector and a retainer that is snapped into a
third device belong in this subclass.
(2) Note. A rubber slot into which the refractor or
reflector are pushed into for retention in the slot belong in
subclass 543.
(3) Note. Although the reflector buttons of this subclass
are often referred to as lenses, these have not been crossed
into lenses since these simply reflect the light falling on
them rather than create a single image of an object at a
focal point. These buttons are often referred to as auto
collimating.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
545 for a mount using a threaded member.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
248, Supports, subclass 27.3 for holding an instrument in a
panel by a biased clip.
267, Spring Devices, subclass 159 for a snap spring and
subclasses 166+ for coil springs.
Subclass:
545
Including a threaded member:
This subclass is indented under subclass 543. Subject matter
where the means for mounting includes a threaded member for
screw attachment and this can be used to mount the curved
refracting surface that is located in fron of the reflecting
surface.
(1) Note. Reflector buttons that simply reflect light
falling on them, autocollimating, without the creation of a
single image of an object at a focal point are classified in
this subclass rather than the lens subclasses of this class.
(2) Note. Although reflector buttons are often called
"lenses" they are not classified in the lens subclasses of
this class unless they create a single image of an object at
a focal point.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
411, Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
Lock-Threaded Fastener, 81 for threaded fastener and means
for restricting rotation thereof relative to coacting
substructure.
Subclass:
546
Discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary mass:
This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter
wherein a plurality of reflective elements are each part of a
unitary plate or sheet.
(1) Note. This unitary mass performs the actual reflection
of the incoming beam.
(2) Note. This includes a single glass reflector having
multiple facets.
(3) Note. The individual reflectors are arranged to reflect
light as if it came from one single reflector having a
particular characteristic.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
459 for a unitary sheet comprising plural reflecting
elements on a projection screen.
527 for reflectors that reflect headlight beams to the eyes
of the driver.
529 for retroreflective reflectors that reflect the light
directly to the source of the light.
530 for a plurality of triple reflectors which are each part
of a unitary plate or sheet.
542 for a plurality of signal reflectors with a curved
reflecting and a curved refracting surface which are each
part of a unitary plate or sheet.
Subclass:
547
Mounted on or adjacent roadway:
This subclass is indented under subclass 546. Subject matter
wherein the unitary mass is positioned either on or off of
the roadway surface within viewing distance of the driver of
a vehicle in order to enable an easier view of that portion
of the roadway or the edge of the roadway.
(1) Note. A reflector sign, having discrete reflecting
elements, permanently fastened to a road surface would belong
in this subclass but the same reflector counterbalanced
within a recess in the roadway - ordinarily up and visible
but capable of retraction into the recess when contacted by
the vehicle wheel is classified in Class 404.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
514 for signal reflector sealing from mois-ture or foreign
particle.
531 for a unitary plate of 3-corner reflectors mounted on
the roadway.
532 for a unitary plate of 3-corner retrore-flectors mounted
adjacent the roadway.
551 for a broad reflector mounted on the roadway.
552 for a broadly recited reflector mounted adjacent the
roadway.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 612 for
highway or street marker.
116, Signals and Indicators, 63 for street traffic where the
device for giving signals are generally due to some movement
of some part or element from a normal or nonsignalling or
signal-controlled position (e.g., a semaphore).
404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, 9 for traffic
director where the reflector is not permanently fixed to the
road surface.
Subclass:
548
Mounted on vehicle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 546. Subject matter
wherein the unitary mass is positioned on a vehicle.
(1) Note. This vehicle could be an airplane, boat,
automobile, train, etc.
(2) Note. This includes a single glass reflector having
multiple facets.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
533 for a unitary plate of 3-corner retroreflectors mounted
on a vehicle.
549 for broadly recited reflectors mounted on a vehicle.
Subclass:
549
Rigidly mounted on vehicle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter
wherein the reflector is rigidly attached to any type of
vehicle used to carry passengers.
(1) Note. This vehicle could be an airplane, boat,
automobile, train, etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
520 for reflectors that are in a continuous state of motion
relative to a vehicle.
526 for reflectors that attract attention by the random
movement with respect to the support.
533 for a unitary plate of 3-corner retroreflectors mounted
on a vehicle.
548 for discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary
mass mounted on a vehicle.
Subclass:
550
Bicycle or motorcycle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 549. Subject matter
wherein the vehicle is a two wheeled vehicle in the form of
either a bicycle or motorcycle.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
521 for pedal mounted reflectors.
523 for spoke mounted reflectors.
Subclass:
551
Mounted on roadway:
This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter
wherein the reflector is attached to the road surface itself
either in the form of individual reflector units fastened to
the road surface or reflective paint.
(1) Note. Reflective paint, without minute transparent
spheres, for highway mark-ing is classified in this
subclass.
(2) Note. A reflector sign (not having a unitary plate of
3-corner reflectors or a unitary mass of discrete reflecting
elements) permanently fastened to a road surface would belong
in this subclass but the same reflector counterbalanced
within a recess in the roadway - ordinarily up and visible,
but capable of retraction into the recess when contacted by
the vehicle wheel - is classified in Class 404.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
531 for a unitary plate of 3-corner retroreflectors mounted
on the roadway.
539 for paint containing minute transparent spheres.
547 for a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements
mounted on or adjacent the roadway.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
106, Compositions: Coating or Plastic, sub-classes 228 and
253 for a natural resin or derivative containing filler, dye,
or pigment.
523, Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers, subclass 527 for
glass DNRM nonreactive material mixed with a composition.
Subclass:
552
Mounted adjacent roadway:
This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter
wherein the reflector is permanently mounted next to the
roadway for viewing by the driver of an automobile and
generally reflecting the beams of automobile headlights.
(1) Note. A reflector sign permanently fastened to a road
surface would belong in this subclass but the same reflector
counterbalanced within a recess in the roadway - ordinarily
up and visible but capable of retraction into the recess when
contacted by the vehicle wheel is classified in Class 404.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
532 for a unitary plate of 3-corner retrore-flectors mounted
adjacent the roadway.
547 for a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements
mounted on or adjacent the roadway.
553 for a reflector which is portable, i.e., temporarily
placed.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, sub-class 612 for
highway or street marker.
116, Signals and Indicators, 63 for street traffic where the
device for giving signals are generally due to some movement
of some part or element from a normal or nonsignalling or
signal - controlled position (e.g., a semaphore).
180, Motor Vehicles, subclass 168 having controlling
apparatus adapted to interact with stationary apparatus which
describes the course of the vehicle's travel.
404, Road Structure, Process, or Apparatus, 9 for traffic
director where the reflector is not permanently fixed to the
road surface.
Subclass:
553
Emergency or temporary reflectors (i.e., portable self
standing):
This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter
wherein the reflectors are used as temporary barricades
placed on or adjacent the roadway, foldable or collapsible
reflectors for use when a car breaks down or directing
traffic.
(1) Note. These reflectors are not rigidily mounted but
simply placed on the surface (roadway or adjacent areas) to
warn oncoming traffic of a necessary change in driving
conditions along the roadway.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
529 for 3-corner retroreflectors.
532 for 3-corner retroreflectors which are permanently
adjacent the roadway.
534 for reflectors having a curved refracting surface.
546 for discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary
mass.
552 for reflectors which are permanently adjacent the
roadway.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
116, Signals and Indicators, subclass 63 for specific
mechanisms for folding and expanding a portable street
traffic signal and indicator with only a nominal recitation
of a signal reflector.
248, Supports, subclass 472 for a foldable mirror or picture
type.
Subclass:
554
IMAGE STABILIZATION:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein an optical element moves or changes
its optical characteristic to compensate for vibrations,
atmospheric turbulence, etc., to maintain a stable image.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
399 for telescopes.
401 for a telescope with antirotation.
402 for periscopes.
407 for binoculars.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
74, Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 5.22 for
gyroscopes combined with other structure.
250, Radiant Energy, subclass 201.1 for photocell control
that could include image stabilization.
Subclass:
555
By movable reflective structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 554. Subject matter
wherein the motion or turbulence compensating optical element
is a light reflecting device for redirecting a light beam and
movable such that the combined effects of motion and
reflection provides the desired compensation.
Subclass:
556
Having plural reflecting surfaces:
This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter
having a movable compensation reflector having multiple
reflective surfaces.
(1) Note. This subclass includes reflector binocular
devices wherein one side is stabilized relative to the other
side.
(2) Note. This subclass includes image stabilization of a
reflective telescope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
480 for binocular devices.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 149 for
gyroscope or pendulum stabilized optical element and subclass
250 for pendulum suspension of optical element or reticle
fiducial instruments.
Subclass:
557
By movable refractive structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 554. Subject matter
wherein image stabilization is accomplished via the movements
of a light bending (i.e., refracting) optical element.
(1) Note. Gyroscopically supported lenses to compensate for
motion belong in this subclass.
(2) Note. Compensation for the bending of periscopes also
belongs here if the optical elements are movable for the
compensation.
(3) Note. The refractive elements are moved individually or
as a unit to compensate for the instability of the image.
(4) Note. Motion picture cameras (Class 352) would take
precedence over this class but cross references for motion
picture camera lenses that are gyroscopically controlled for
image stabilization should go in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
33, Geometrical Instruments, subclass 268 for celestial
straightline light ray type.
89, Ordnance, subclass 41.09 for gyoscopically or pendulum
controlled motor operated ordnance training mechanism.
248, Supports, subclass 123.1 for counter balanced stand and
bracket.
348, Television, subclass 208 for camera image
stabilization.
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 140 for focus
control having gyroscopically controlled lenses.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 149 for
gyroscope or pendulum stabilized optical element angle
measuring or axial alignment.
Subclass:
558
DIFFRACTION:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a light beam is split and caused to
interfere with itself, which causes a change in the direction
of the beam.
(1) Note. Diffraction bands result from interference of one
part of a beam with another, as when the ray is deflected at
the edge of an opaque obstacle, passed through a narrow slit,
or deflected by an optical element such as a prism.
(2) Note. Diffraction usually, but not always, causes a
break-up of the light into bands or a spectrum.
Additionally, diffraction may also form a plurality of images
from an object or merely redirect it, as in light diffractive
scanners.
(3) Note. This subclass includes systems operating on
diffraction from a straight edge, a circular disk or
aperture, a slit or a grating; and also includes systems
operating on Fraunhofer diffraction (far field wherein the
incident light rays are parallel and the diffracted rays are
brought to a focus by a focusing means) or on Fresnel
diffraction (near field wherein the incident light rays arise
from a finite source and no focusing means are used for
rendering the diffracted rays parallel, or convergent).
(4) Note. Devices for producing moire fringes by shadow
casting through gra-ting-like elements are excluded from this
subclass.
(5) Note. All diffraction has interference but interference
does not require dif-fraction.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
577 for interference of light waves.
831 for prisms.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
65, Glass Manufacturing, subclass 59.1 for the process of
bonding and subclass 154 for bonding glass to metal.
156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
subclass 81 with melting or gasification of permanently
associated solid material in situ in airtight cavity.
204, Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy, subclass 192.26
for the coating, forming or etching with optical or
photoactive deposition material by glow discharge sputter
deposition.
264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping and Treating:
Processes, 1.1 for optical article shaping or treating.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 485,494, 499,
and 521 for diffraction light interference, and subclass 374
for moire fringe generation by shadow casting through
grating-like elements.
365, Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 124
for systems utilizing diffraction for selected masking of
information.
369, Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval, subclass 109
with diffraction radiation beam modification.
382, Image Analysis, 210 for pattern recognition using
spatial filtering (e.g., holography).
427, Coating Processes, 164 for transparent base optical
element production and subclass 166 for vapor depositing.
428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 167
for parallel ribs or grooves.
430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Pro-cess, Composition, or
Product Thereof, subclass 5 for radiation mask, subclasses
9+ for imaged product, subclass 32 for making an optical
device, subclass 323 for etching, and subclass 325 for
elevated pattern.
451, Abrading, 41 for a process of grinding glass or stone.
Subclass:
559
Using Fourier transform spatial filtering:
This subclass is indented under subclass 558. Subject matter
wherein an optical Fourier transform is taken of a diffracted
beam of light and a spatial filter is placed at the Fourier
transform plane to spatially limit the output optical wave to
those having Fourier transform coefficients passed by the
filter.
(1) Note. A spatial filter is generally an emulsion mask
having a transparent annular region in an otherwise opaque
region used to eliminate undesired radiation that diverges
from the optical axis beyond the confines of the transparent
region.
(2) Note. A spatial filter is sometimes referred to as a
mask used as an aperture to cause diffraction of the light
beam passing therethrough.
(3) Note. A Fourier transform of a wave function is the
amplitude representation of the components of each fre-quency
of a given wavefront.
(4) Note. Amplitude and phase information over a discrete
spatial area of the diffracted energy pattern is obtained by
placing a lens at one focal length from the aperture to
produce a "Fourier Transform", and the aperture at the second
focal plane of the lens creates a diffraction pattern.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
29 for Fourier transform holography.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
382, Image Analysis, 181 for pattern recognition where an
image analyzing system possesses the capability of
identifying discrete patterns, subclasses 210+ for spatial
filtering wherein the optical image of each pattern to be
recognized is transformed into a light amplitude distribution
that is proportional to the two dimensional Fourier Transform
of the pattern image, subclasses 276+ for mathematical image
transformation or pre-recognition processing transformation
of an image into another representation to facilitate the
acquisition or subsequent recognition of imaging patterns,
and subclasses 280+ for Fourier, Hadamard, or Walsh Transform
of an image prior to the recognition processing.
708, Electrical Computers: Arithmetic Processing and
Calculating, subclass 821 for Fourier transform computation
in electrical analog computers.
Subclass:
560
For convolution (cross-correlation):
This subclass is indented under subclass 559. Subject matter
wherein the optical Fourier transform spectrum is
mathematically convolved (cross-correlated) with the spectrum
of the spatial filter at the Fourier transform plane.
(1) Note. As opposed to the perfect match of the
correlation function in matched filtering systems, the
convolution function indicates a partial match between the
optical Fourier transform spectrums of object and spatial
filter.
(2) Note. A spatial filter is generally an emulsion mask
having a transparent annular region in an otherwise opaque
region used to eliminate undesired radiation that diverges
from the optical axis beyond the confines of the transparent
region.
(3) Note. The cross-correlation function is a measure of
the similarity between two signals when one is delayed with
respect to the other.
(4) Note. "Convolution" and "Cross-correlation" are
interchangeable terms.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
365, Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 106
for radiant energy.
708, Electrical Computers: Arithmetic Processing and
Calculating, subclass 816 for optical correlation and
convolution in electrical analog computers.
Subclass:
561
For correlation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 559. Subject matter
wherein the optical Fourier transform spectrum is
mathematically correlated with the spectrum of the spatial
filter at the Fourier transform plane.
(1) Note. Included in this subclass are the so-called
"matched filtering systems", wherein the Fourier transform
spectrum of an object is perfectly matched or correlated to a
spectrum presented at the Fourier transform plane (usually by
means of a previously generated spatial filter).
(2) Note. A spatial filter is generally an emulsion mask
having a transparent annular region in an otherwise opaque
region used to eliminate undesired radiation that diverges
from the optical axis beyond the confines of the trans-parent
region.
(3) Note. Correlation is a measure, expressed as a number
between minus one and plus one between two sets of data, of
the similarity of two signals.
(4) Note. Correlation is also a relationship between two
variables where the strength of the linear relationship is
indicated by the coefficient of correla-tion.
Subclass:
562
For changing zeroth order intensity:
This subclass is indented under subclass 559. Subject matter
wherein the spatial filter located at the Fourier transform
plane is designed to have a positive effect (i.e., blocks,
transparent, increase intensity, etc.) on the zeroth order
term in the Fourier series representative of the light wave
input.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
559 for spatial filtering at the Fourier transform plane.
Subclass:
563
With diffraction grating:
This subclass is indented under subclass 559. Subject matter
wherein a series of very fine, closely spaced parallel slits,
or of very narrow, parallel reflecting surfaces are included
in the optical system, either before or at the Fourier
transform plane in order to produce a successsion of spectra
when light is incident thereon at a specific angle.
(1) Note. An example of a diffraction grating is a glass
substrate carrying a layer of deposited aluminum that has
been pressure-ruled with a large number of fine equidistant
grooves, using a diamond edge as a tool.
(2) Note. Light falling on a diffraction grating is
dispered into a series of spectra on both sides of the
incident beam, the angular dispersion being inversely
proportional to the line spacing.
(3) Note. Phase gratings using Fourier transform filtering
also belongs in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
1 for holograms and holos:graphic systems.
560 for systems using a spatial filter placed at the Fourier
transform plane for convolution (cross-correlation).
561 for systems using a spatial filter placed at the Fourier
transform plane for correlation.
Subclass:
564
With photos:graphic media:
This subclass is indented under subclass 559. Subject matter
wherein a photos:graphic negative, transparency, plate, etc.,
is used at or near the Fourier transform plane to record the
data at that plane.
Subclass:
565
From zone plate:
This subclass is indented under subclass 558. Subject matter
comprising a plate of glass, usually a photograph, on which
there is a central spot surrounded by concentric annular
zones, alternately opaque and transparent, the radii of the
boundaries between the zones being proportional to the square
roots of the natural numbers 1,2,3, etc. It has the property
of forming a real image of a point on the axis, as does a
lens, but by a process of diffraction instead of refraction.
(1) Note. Zone plates are also known as "Fresnel zone
plates".
(2) Note. The diffraction occurs from a circular
diffraction grating of variable spacing having focal
properties, and also including means for forming such a
circular focal grating.
(3) Note. Phase zone plates are also included in this
subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
742 for Fresnel lenses.
Subclass:
566
From grating:
This subclass is indented under subclass 558. Subject matter
wherein diffraction occurs at an optical element having a
series of very close lines or fine slits.
(1) Note. The lines on the grating may be ruled grooves or
fine slits may be applied by other mechanical,
photos:graphic, holos:graphic, or chemical pro-cesses.
(2) Note. This subclass includes both amplitude and phase
gratings and also includes gratings having mounting means
therefor.
(3) Note. Excluded from this subclass are acoustic or other
compression wave diffraction gratings, see Search Class note
to subclass 358.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
1 for holos:graphic production of diffraction gratings.
285 for light control by causing a fluid or deformable
medium to act as a diffraction grating under the influence of
compressional waves.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
348, Television, subclass 291 for diffraction gratings which
are used for frequency separation in color television systems
("strip filters").
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 51 for devices
which utilize diffraction gratings in optical test devices
involving infrared or ultraviolet application, subclasses
300+ for spectroscopic instruments, including spectro:graphic
devices in subclasses 305 and 328 which utilize a diffraction
grating, subclass 334 for monochromators which use
diffraction gratings, subclasses 485, 494, 499, and 521 for
wavefront division by diffraction in interferometers, and
subclass 395 for optical test devices employing relatively
movable diffraction gratings.
385, Optical Waveguides, subclass 37 for an input/output
optical coupler using a grating.
Subclass:
567
For ornamental effect or display:
This subclass is indented under subclass 566. Subject matter
wherein the diffraction of light from the grating is purely
for an aesthetic or ornamental effect or for display
purposes.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, 427 for display
devices exhibiting special optical effects.
Subclass:
568
For diffractive subtractive filtering:
This subclass is indented under subclass 566. Subject matter
wherein diffraction gratings are used to diffractively remove
unwanted spectral wavelengths from polychromatic incident
light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
885 for optical filters in general and particularly subclass
888 for neutral or different density filters.
Subclass:
569
Including particular grating characteristic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 566. Subject matter
wherein the diffraction grating has one or more particular
structural characteristics, such as thickness, shape, line
spacing, aspect ratio, etc.
Subclass:
570
Nonplanar grating substrate (e.g., concave):
This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter
wherein the diffractive surface of the grating is of a shape
other than planar, for example, a concave diffraction
grating.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
534 for a signal refletor having a curved refracting
surface.
Subclass:
571
Echelette or blazed grating:
This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter
wherein the diffraction grating is an echelette (sawtooth)
type of grating or wherein the grating is designed for
maximum intensity at a desired region of the diffraction
spectrum.
(1) Note. Theoretically, the most efficient groove shape
for any grating is a right triangle. The inclination of its
hypote-nuse is called the blaze angle because it determines
the direction in which a diffracted beam has its greatest
efficiency. Such gratings are termed blazed.
(2) Note. A blazed diffraction grating is one having
properly shaped grooves to concentrate most of the energy
into a single spectral order.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
1 for blazed holograms.
Subclass:
572
Reflection grating (e.g., retrodirective):
This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter
wherein the grating reflects a desired wave while at the same
time allowing one or more waves to pass freely.
(1) Note. A reflection grating reflects the desired wave
whereas a "transmission" grating passes the diffracted light
through the grating in the same general direction as the
incident light.
(2) Note. Aluminizing of a grating will cause it to be a
reflecting grating.
(3) Note. Reflection back in the opposite direction to the
incident light would be considered retrodirective.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
529 for 3-corner retroreflectors (i.e., cube corner,
trihedral or triple reflector type).
838 for optical mirrors and other reflecting elements.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
342, Communications: Directive Radio Wave Systems and
Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio Navigation), subclass 7 for
radio frequency corner reflectors which are retrodirective.
Subclass:
573
Variable grating:
This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter
wherein the optical characteristics of the diffraction
grating can be altered by the application of an external
force.
(1) Note. Examples of variable gratings included in this
subclass are gratings comprised of electro-optical or
magne-to-optical stripe domains.
(2) Note. A stripe domain is a stripe-shaped region having
its own proper-ties, such as an ion-shiny electro-optic
stripe.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
95 for liquid crystal devices exhibiting variable
diffraction.
240 for temporal modulation of a light beam by changing the
bulk optical parameter.
301 for polarizer light wave spatial modulation.
483 for polarization without modulation.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
365, Static Information Storage and Retrieval, subclass 122
for polarization information masking using magneto-optical
devices.
Subclass:
574
With curved or geometrically shaped corruga-tion:
This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter
wherein the grating has at least one ridge or groove for the
light to impinge and the edges of the ridge or groove are
either nonlinear or form some geometrical shape by the
connection of plural lines.
(1) Note. The geometric corrugations are in the form of a
circle, parallelogram, rhombus, etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
575 for nonuniform corrugation width, spacing, or depth.
576 for a laminated or layered grating which usually has
parallel corrugations.
Subclass:
575
With nonuniform corrugation width, spacing, or depth:
This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter
wherein the grating has at least one ridge or groove for the
light to impinge and the width, depth, height, or spacing of
each ridge or groove varies along the corrugation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
574 for curved or geometrically shaped corrugations of a
grating.
576 for laminated or layered grating which usually has
parallel corrugations.
Subclass:
576
Laminated or layered:
This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter
wherein multiple layers of different optical materials are
formed into a single mass to form the optical grating.
(1) Note. The corrugations of this type of grating are
usually parallel to one another.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
574 for curved or geometrically shaped corrugations of a
grating.
575 for nonuniform corrugation width, spacing, or depth.
586 for laminated or layered articles which produce
nondiffractive interference.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes, subclass 1.7 for composite or multiple layer
optical article shaping or treating.
Subclass:
577
LIGHT INTERFERENCE:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein two light waves, as a result of their
relative phases, interact to produce a cancellation or
reinforcement of wave energy.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
370 for interference microscopes.
498 for such subject matter where the light is polarized.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclass 450 for optical
test devices which utilize light interference.
Subclass:
578
Electrically or mechanically variable (e.g., tunable,
adjustable):
This subclass is indented under subclass 577. Subject matter
including means for producing a change in a geometric or
optical characteristic of an interfering light wave or beam.
Subclass:
579
By nonmovable driving element (e.g., piezoelectric,
magnetostrictive):
This subclass is indented under subclass 578. Subject matter
including an element for causing motion of an optical
interference element without itself moving.
(1) Note. Piezoelectric and magnetostrictive driving
elements are classified in this subclass.
Subclass:
580
Produced by coating or lamina:
This subclass is indented under subclass 577. Subject matter
wherein the light interference occurs by applying multiple
light beams to either (1) a structure comprising a base
material impregnated by causing a coating material to extend
or penetrate into the material or into the interstices of a
porous, cellular or foraminous material or (2) a product
consisting of multiple layers of material.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
427, Coating Processes, 162 for coating processes, per se,
wherein the product is an optical element.
Subclass:
581
By transmissive coating on lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter
wherein a lens is provided with a transparent
reflection-reducing coating on surface of air-contacting
refracting portions.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
642 for lenses generally, and subclass 726 for lenses coated
with reflecting ele-ment.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
65, Glass Manufacturing, 30.1 and 31 for processes of
applying such a coating or surface to a glass preform.
Subclass:
582
Layer having specified nonoptical property:
This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter
wherein a layer of insulator or spacer is placed between
optical layers, the changes in thickness of this layer
control the location of the transmission bands in the
spectrum.
(1) Note. A layer of dielectric material placed
alternatively between reflective or transmissive layers is
classified in this subclass.
(2) Note. The location of the transmissive band is
dependent on the distance between the reflectors. As the
distance is made larger, the transmission bands move toward
the higher end of the spectrum, also the width of the
transmission bands and the distance between adjacent
transmission bands decrease.
Subclass:
583
Beam splitter or combiner:
This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter
wherein light interference is produced by partial-reflected
or by partial-transmitted layers.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
629 and 639+, for light dividing or combining by partial
reflection or refraction at beam splitting or combining
surface.
Subclass:
584
Reflector:
This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter
including a reflector or a reflective coating layer.
Subclass:
585
Including metal or conductive layer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter
including a metal or an electric-conductive layer.
(1) Note. The metal or conductive layer is used for static
electric elimination, radio frequency shielding, producing
space charges of electricity, or heating the coated glass to
prevent fogging by condensation.
Subclass:
586
Layers having specified index of refraction:
This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter
wherein the refraction index of each layer is specified.
Subclass:
587
Plural layer groups lateral in parallel light paths:
This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter
including layers which are parallel with the light paths.
Subclass:
588
Filter having four or more layers:
This subclass is indented under subclass 586. Subject matter
including light interference filter with four or more
layers.
Subclass:
589
Selective wavelength transmission or reflection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter
wherein the coated optical medium selectively reflects or
transmits light.
Subclass:
590
Having another filter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 589. Subject matter
having both an interference filter and another type of filter
(e.g., absorption filter).
Subclass:
591
BUILDING INTERIOR ILLUMINATION WITH REFLECTED, REFRACTED OR
PRE-DETERMINED ANGLE OF ENTRANCE OF OUTSIDE LIGHT:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including means to reflect or refract light to
the interior of a building from the exterior or to allow only
light from predetermined angles to enter the building.
(1) Note. The light is usually sun or natural light.
However, light from an incident artificial source which is
outside for some other purpose, such as a street light, may
be directed into the building.
(2) Note. For classification here, the direction of the
light must be changed to facilitate its entry into the
building or for controlling the direction of light. A mere
window pane which is flat on both sides is not here but is in
Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses
204+.
(3) Note. A combination of nominal fiber optics structure
with structure appro-priate to this subclass is classified
here. However, similar subject mattter with details to fiber
optic structure is classi-fied in Class 385, Optical
Waveguides.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
290 for fluids which may be chemically or physically altered
to control the amount of light passing through a panel.
483 for light control with polarizers.
601 for glare reducing structure.
885 for light filters.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 559 for
signs using external light source.
52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), 204.1 for windows.
See (2) Note above.
126, Stoves and Furnaces, 561 for solar heat collector.
165, Heat Exchange, subclass 48.2 for solar heating and
cooling.
362, Illumination, for artificial light directing, especially
317.
Subclass:
592
Unitary light transmitting member comprising plural
reflecting or refracting elements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 591. Subject matter
including a one piece mass of transparent material which has
a plurality of light reflecting or refracting surfaces.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
529 534+ and 546, for unitary plates with plural elements
used as signal reflectors.
619 for surfaces composed of lenticular elements.
Subclass:
593
Plural members in series:
This subclass is indented under subclass 592. Subject matter
including a plurality of unitary light transmitting members
arranged so that light travels sequentially from one member
to the other, the light being refracted or reflected by the
respective mem-bers.
Subclass:
594
Elements on two sides of member:
This subclass is indented under subclass 592. Subject matter
where there are a plurality of reflecting or refracting
surfaces on opposing sides of the transparent mass.
Subclass:
595
With internal reflections:
This subclass is indented under subclass 592. Subject matter
where light from certain angles is internally reflected,
i.e., the light is inside the transparent mass immediately
before and immediately after the reflection.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
593 and 594, above which also have patents that disclose
internal reflection.
598 for internal reflection in single optical elements.
Subclass:
596
Slats or strips:
This subclass is indented under subclass 591. Subject matter
including a plurality of, usually parallel, thin, flat or
long narrow members which reflect or refract light rays.
(1) Note. The slats or strips may be made of any material,
for example, metal, glass, or plastic. They may be
adjustable or stationary.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
227 for opaque means insertable on light path.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
160, Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, 130
for plural slats or strips used as closures which are not
specifically designed to reflect or refract light.
Subclass:
597
With reflection:
This subclass is indented under subclass 591. Subject matter
wherein light is reflected at least once from a surface upon
entering the building.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
596 for building interior illumination with reflecting slats
or strips.
609 for glare reduction in display windows.
838 for mirrors not specifically designed for building
interior illumination.
Subclass:
598
Internal reflection in single optical element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 597. Subject matter
where the reflection is internal, i.e., the light is inside
the transparent mass immediately before and immediately after
the reflection.
Subclass:
599
DIFFUSING OF INCIDENT LIGHT:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein light is scattered into many different
directions and is not intensely polarized when it illuminates
surfaces.
(1) Note. With diffused light, a high brightness level may
be achieved with minimal glare.
(2) Note. Diffusion patents are classified here whether it
is purposeful, incidental, or undesirable.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
577 for light interference.
591 for building or interior illumination with reflectors,
refractors, etc.
601 for glare or unwanted light reduction.
614 for glare or unwanted light reduction with absorption.
707 for a diffusing lens which produces an image having soft
or indistinct outlines.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 116 for
light diffusing with optical device or special ray
transmission envelope.
362, Illumination, 355 for diffusing type translucent or
transparent (e.g., "shade") light modifier with a light
source.
Subclass:
600
BARREL END EYE GUARD (E.G., SHIELD OR CUSHION, ETC.):
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein an eye end of a barrel is shaped to
conform to the engaging portion of a viewer's face for
providing a cushion to the optical apparatus or for shielding
the viewer's eyes from undesired radiation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
611 for a shade which restricts light which is lateral of
the optical path from striking an objective lens.
Subclass:
601
GLARE OR UNWANTED LIGHT REDUC-TION:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including structure to primarily reduce the
intensity of nonimaging light for an optical means or a
viewer's eyes.
(1) Note. Such intensity reduction may be performed by
blocking, absorbing, transmitting away, or reflecting an
undesired part of the light.
(2) Note. This and the indented subclasses include angle
discriminator, glare re-ducing mirror, mirror with glare
shield, and display window. For classification here, the
claims should include struc-ture which reduces glare, as
indicated therein or in the specification.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
229 for glare elimination by placing an opaque element in an
optical path.
290 for light control by altering an optical medium.
493 for glare prevention by means of polarizers.
580 for light interference coatings which reduce glare.
591 for natural or sun light directing for illumination.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
296, Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, 97.1 for vehicle glare
screens, per se.
348, Television, subclass 834 for cathode-ray tubes combined
with a glare reduction filter.
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
44 for glare reduction in spectacles.
Subclass:
602
With mirror (e.g., mirror with glare screen, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 601. Subject matter
including an image reflecting mirror which inherently reduces
the glare otherwise coming from its reflecting surface or
wherein the image reflecting mirror is combined with or
includes structure which reduces the glare otherwise coming
from its reflecting surface or from behind the mirror.
(1) Note. Anti-glare mirrors which modify the light
reflected from the face of the mirror are in the indented
subclasses 603+ below. This subclass (602) has shields which
primarilty control light from the sun and headlight which
comes from behind the mirror and would not strike the
reflecting face of the mirror.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
507 for moisture protection shield which could also be a
light shield.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
296, Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops, 97.1 for vehicle glare
screens, per se.
Subclass:
603
Anti-glare mirror:
This subclass is indented under subclass 602. Subject matter
with means to control the light going to and from the
mirror's reflecting face to eliminate or reduce the intensity
of the light going to a viewer's eyes.
(1) Note. Since any mirror may be adjusted to reflect given
rays of light away from an observer's eyes, the disclosure
must be relied on to determine if the purpose of using the
mirror is to eliminate glare.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
493 for glare prevention by means of polarizer.
602 for mirror combined with glare screen or shield where
the light to be controlled is other than that which would be
incident on the mirror face.
884 for coated mirror used for purposes other than glare
reduction.
Subclass:
604
Adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 603. Subject matter
including means to adjust part of the mirror or associated
glare reducing structure to modify the intensity of or
eliminate the light reaching the viewer's eyes.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
248, Supports, 466 for adjustable mirror supports.
Subclass:
605
Plural reflecting surfaces:
This subclass is indented under subclass 604. Subject matter
including a plurality of reflecting surfaces which may be
selectively positioned to reflect light to the viewer.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
608 for a semi-transparent panel placed in front of a mirror
to reflect some of the light, before it reaches the mirror,
away from the observer's eyes.
Subclass:
606
Prismoidal:
This subclass is indented under subclass 605. Subject matter
including a wedge shaped transparent body, usually silvered
on the rear surface, which reflects light to a viewer from
the front surface or from the rear surface through the
transparent body.
(1) Note. There are reflecting surfaces which are at an
angle to each other in subclass 605 above, but the reflective
surfaces are not on the same transpar-ent body.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
831 for prisms, per se.
Subclass:
607
Reversible:
This subclass is indented under subclass 605. Subject matter
including two mirror surfaces mounted back to back, one being
more highly reflective than the other, with means to select
the surface to be viewed from a given position.
(1) Note. The less reflective surface of these mirrors is
employed when the headlights of a following vehicle annoy the
driver of a car.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
840 in general for mirrors which are mounted back to back.
Subclass:
608
Translucent or other semitransmitting panel selectively
positioned in front of mirror:
This subclass is indented under subclass 604. Subject matter
including a translucent or other semi-transmitting panel
which may be positioned in front of the mirror to reduce the
amount of light reflected to the viewer.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
229 for an opaque panel selectively positioned in front of a
mirror to eliminate the light reflected from the mirror to a
viewer.
602 for glare shield positioned near a mirror to reduce
glare from light coming from behind a mirror which is not
incident on the mirror reflecting face.
605 for a semi-transparent mirror positioned in front of
another mirror.
884 for colored mirror or selective absorp-tion means with
mirror.
885 for absorption filter, per se.
Subclass:
609
Display window:
This subclass is indented under subclass 601. Subject matter
wherein the amount of glare or unwanted light reflected to a
viewer's eyes from glass, which is covering an opening in a
wall or the like for light transmission to enable the viewer
to look in or out, is reduced.
Subclass:
610
With blind for nonviewing eye:
This subclass is indented under subclass 601. Subject matter
wherein light to the nonviewing eye or the eye not using the
instrument is blocked.
Subclass:
611
Barrel end or lens mount shade:
This subclass is indented under subclass 601. Subject matter
including a tubular member which is secured to a barrel end,
a lens mounting, or a support and which extends from a face
of a lens, wherein the tubular axis is coaxial with the lens
axis.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
511 for a cap or cover which protects a lens when it is not
being used.
600 for barrel end eye guard, shield or cushion.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
2, Apparel, 15 for eyeshields and subclasses 431+ for
goggles included in a shield for eyes.
Subclass:
612
Collapsible or foldable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter
wherein a shade includes telescoping, flexible or hinged
portions to permit substantial reduction of the space
occupied by the shade when not in use.
Subclass:
613
Directional or angular discrimination:
This subclass is indented under subclass 601. Subject matter
wherein light from certain angles is deflected away from
imaging light.
Subclass:
614
With absorption means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 601. Subject matter
including a layer of coating material or a filter or screen,
which absorbs part of the light incident thereon.
(1) Note. The light absorbed may be of particular
wavelengths, e.g., color filter, etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
603 for antiglare mirror coated with light absorbing
material.
884 for mirror coated with light absorbing material.
Subclass:
615
LIGHT DISPERSION:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including a body having an index of refraction
that varies according to the wavelength for separation of the
spectral components of incident light.
(1) Note. A dispersive monochromator, which separates the
spectral components of incident light, is classified in this
subclass.
(2) Note. The optical system of a monochromator forms a
series, one for each wavelength, of its entrance slit in the
plane of the exit slit.
Subclass:
616
KALEIDOSCOPE:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including a plurality of reflecting surfaces
so arranged that objects viewed in the reflecting surfaces
appear as multiple images of the objects arranged in a
symmetrical pattern, relative motion between the objects and
the reflecting surfaces or between the reflecting surfaces
and observer changing the patterns.
(1) Note. The reflecting surfaces are usually elongated and
at an angle to each other which forms a V-shaped trough when
two mirrors are employed.
(2) Note. Kaleidoscopic image projectors which project a
real image on a viewing screen are classified in Class 353,
Optics: Image Projectors, if projection structure such as a
projecting lens, projection screen, projection light source,
or slide holder is claimed.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 1 and 2 for a
kaleiodoscopic image projector. See (2) Note above.
Subclass:
617
Including particles loosely housed for agitation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 616. Subject matter
including a chamber of loosely assorted objects, usually of
irregular shapes, transparent and varicolored, which may be
tumbled over each other by rotation of the chamber or moved
in other ways to give ever changing visual effects.
Subclass:
618
SINGLE CHANNEL SIMULTANEOUSLY TO OR FROM PLURAL CHANNELS
(E.G., LIGHT DIVIDING, COMBINING, OR PLURAL IMAGE FORMING,
ETC.):
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein either (1) a single light ray is used
to produce a plurality of groups of different optical axes
light rays, which may have different directions or be
parallel and displaced relative to one another, each
containing the same information as the single light ray or
(2) a single light ray is derived from a plurality of groups
of light rays having different optical axes in order to
include the same information contained in each of the
plurality of groups of light rays.
(1) Note. This subclass includes partially transmitting
reflector type beam splitters wherein each split channel
contains identical information.
(2) Note. This subclass includes a system comprising a
plurality of adjacent lenses which form a plurality of
similar rather than identical images as a result of
parallax.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
462 particularly subclasses 464+ for somewhat analogous
structure used in stereoscopic systems.
480 for systems including a single optical channel which
merges to or from a plural optical channel, where the plural
channel is used for binocular purposes.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, 66 for color cameras and
projectors.
353, Optics: Image Projectors, 30 for an image projector
which combines subject matter to form a composite image and
which may include the combining of light paths.
396, Photography, 305 for color cameras containing similar
structure.
Subclass:
619
By surface composed of lenticular elements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 618. Subject matter
comprising a body with a surface configured so as to form a
regular array of reflecting or transmitting elements, each
having a curved or figured surface.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
455 for lenticular projection screens.
463 for stereoscopic record with lenticular surface.
642 for lenses generally.
727 for lenses having concave or convex reflecting surfaces
with coatings.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
399, Electrophotography, 30 and 177+ for an optical element
in a photocopier projection arrangement.
Subclass:
620
Having particular composition:
This subclass is indented under subclass 619. Subject matter
wherein the configured body is composed of a specific
material.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
252, Compositions, subclass 501.1 for electrically
conductive or emissive light sensitive composition.
430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
Product Thereof, subclass 946 for a cross-reference art
collection of photos:graphically produced lenticular
elements.
501, Compositions: Ceramic, 900 for an optical glass
composition.
Subclass:
621
Plural lenticular plates:
This subclass is indented under subclass 619. Subject matter
having two or more elements with lenticular surfaces.
Subclass:
622
Serially disposed along optic axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 621. Subject matter
in which multiple elements with lenticular surfaces are
placed along a single light path.
Subclass:
623
Cylindrical lenslets:
This subclass is indented under subclass 622. Subject matter
in which the body is formed by an array of small cylindrical
elements.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
710 for cylindrical lenses.
Subclass:
624
Having crossed axes:
This subclass is indented under subclass 623. Subject matter
having nonparallel element or array axes.
Subclass:
625
Focusing or defocusing by noncurved surfaces (e.g.,
prismatic, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 619. Subject matter
wherein the elements of the array are planar surface
ele-ments.
(1) Note. Prismatic elements are classified in this
subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
831 for prism (including mount).
Subclass:
626
Particular focusing or defocusing characteristic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 619. Subject matter
in which the elements of the lenticular array cooperate to
produce an imaging effect upon a light beam incident
thereon.
Subclass:
627
Reflective:
This subclass is indented under subclass 619. Subject matter
wherein the direction of the component of incident light
normal to the surface of the lenticular body is reversed or
bent off.
Subclass:
628
Noncircular cross section:
This subclass is indented under subclass 619. Subject matter
wherein the lenticular elements have a cross section in the
plane of the surface which is not a circle.
Subclass:
629
By partial reflection at beam splitting or combining
surface:
This subclass is indented under subclass 618. Subject matter
including a surface which transmits and reflects substantial
portions of the incident light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
583 for a beam splitter which selectively separates the
incident light by interference in a coating or lamina of an
optical element.
Subclass:
630
Superimposing visual information on observer's field of view
(e.g., head-up arrangement, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 629. Subject matter
which forms a composite image by combining visual display
information with the light incident on an observer's field of
view.
Subclass:
631
Including curved reflector:
This subclass is indented under subclass 630. Subject matter
including a reflecting element having a surface with a
smoothly concave or convex configuration in the optical path
of the light that produces an image.
(1) Note. The curved configuration may be for focusing or
collimating reflected light rays.
(2) Note. Helmet mounted partial reflectors and curved
windsheild light com-bining systems are classified in this
subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
364 for compound lens system with curved reflective imaging
element.
726 for lenses with reflecting element.
831 for prisms, per se.
838 for mirrors, per se.
Subclass:
632
Rotatable heads-up device or combiner:
This subclass is indented under subclass 630. Subject matter
including structure to enable circular movement of light
combining element.
Subclass:
633
With additional reflector (e.g., serial reflections, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 630. Subject matter
having an image reflecting element additional to a partially
reflective light combiner or divider.
(1) Note. This additional reflecting element may be another
partially reflecting element.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
850 for a plural mirror optical system.
Subclass:
634
Wavelength selective (e.g., dichroic mirror, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 629. Subject matter
wherein an optical property of the partially reflecting light
combining or dividing element for a component of incident
light is wavelength dependent.
(1) Note. The term "optical property" is intended to
include transmittance and reflectance.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
583 for a dichroic beam splitter or combiner using layers
producing light interference.
838 for mirrors, per se.
Subclass:
635
Drawing or plotting aid:
This subclass is indented under subclass 629. Subject matter
including forming a composite image on a surface on which
visual information or other representation is manually
placed.
Subclass:
636
Including full reflection and transmission of a beam at
different portions of a beam divider:
This subclass is indented under subclass 629. Subject matter
wherein the partially reflective element has selected areas
of full light reflection interrupted by light transmissive
areas.
Subclass:
637
With path length or aberration correcting element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 629. Subject matter
which includes a device, circuit, or circuit component that
corrects an undesirable condition which affects a light
beam.
Subclass:
638
With partial reflection at a surface of a prism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 629. Subject matter
wherein the surface at which partial reflection takes place
is the surface of a prismatic element.
Subclass:
639
By refraction at beam splitting or combining surface:
This subclass is indented under subclass 618. Subject matter
including a surface which refracts substantial portions of
the incident light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
737 for lens with refracting element.
837 for prism with refracting surface.
Subclass:
640
Including prismatic element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 639. Subject matter
including a transparent optical element having at least two
polished plane faces, inclined relative to each other, to
cause refraction through the faces.
(1) Note. A prism is geometrically constructed of parallel
bases or ends and congruent polygons and sides that are
parallelograms in order to either (a) disperse light into a
spectrum or (b) reflect rays of light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
831 for prisms generally.
Subclass:
641
COLLIMATING OF LIGHT BEAM:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a bundle of light rays emanating from
a single point are made to be parallel to one another, as
opposed to converging or diverging rays.
(1) Note. A collimator reticle will produce collimated
light wherein the light appears to originate from an
infinitely distant real or apparent source.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
642 for lenses.
838 for mirrors.
Subclass:
642
LENS:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including either a single transparent mass of
refractive material having opposed refracting surfaces or a
plurality of such masses arranged along an optical axis with
their opposed refracting surfaces disposed transversely of
such axis, the said opposed surfaces being so shaped and
spaced that the mass or plurality of masses are capable of
producing, from light rays passing therethrough from an
object external to the mass or masses, a single image of that
object at a focal point.
(1) Note. The plurality of masses of material act upon
light rays proceeding from an object in a manner similar to
that in which the single mass of material acts upon such
rays; i.e., no real image is formed between the front most
and rear most axially spaced refracting surfaces of either
the single mass or the plurality of masses.
(2) Note. Of the opposed refracting surfaces provided on
each lens mass, one is usually spherical and the other is
usually spherical or planar, but there may be deviations from
such shapes in which any or all of the surfaces depart from
the spherical shape or the planar shape.
(3) Note. The lens masses referred to above will be
designated hereafter as lens "components" or lens "elements"
depending on the design of the lens.
(4) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or a grouped
plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces
either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation
with the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does
not enter into the lens computations, the two refracting
surfaces of the single mass and the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of the plurality of masses having at
least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from all other
adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.
The axial dimension of the air-spacing between either the
opposed surfaces of the single mass or the axially extreme
surfaces of the grouped plural-ity of masses and the other
adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens
must be of sufficient magni-tude to enter into the lens
computations in order to limit the axial extent of the lens
component.
(5) Note. The term "element" as applied to a lens
designates any single transparent mass of refractive material
having two opposed refracting surfaces, which surfaces are
disposed transversely of the optical axis of the lens and
spaced therealong, i.e., any one of the masses in the above
component definition regardless of its spacing from adjacent
refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.
(6) Note. A correcting plate such as that used in the
"Schmidt type lens" to correct the aberrations of a spherical
mirror is considered a lens component under this subclass
definition.
(7) Note. The optical system of a Galilean telescope is
considered a lens under this subclass definition, since no
image is formed between the objective and eyepiece of the
telescope.
(8) Note. This subclass also includes, especially in
subclasses 726+, 737, and 738+, combination of a lens or
lenses with other than nonlens optical elements which
reflect, control or deflect light passing through the lens
and which are not provided for above.
(9) Note. This subclass further includes in subclasses 811+
lens supports and mountings for maintaining the various lens
components in proper alignment and spacing for intended
operation of the lens.
(10) Note. Compound lens systems in which one lens is
employed to examine the image formed by another lens will be
found in this class, subclasses 362+.
(11) Note. This is the residual subclass for lenses. See
the search notes below for classes where lenses peculiar to
particular applications such as signalling, illu-minating,
and ophthalmic may be found.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
355 for lenses peculiarly adapted for opera-tion within the
nonvisible spectrum.
362 for compound lens systems. See also (11) Note above.
440 for scale-reading systems involving lenses.
462 for plural optical paths including lenses or lenses with
plural optical paths.
503 for lens-spacing structure.
591 for natural light directing systems.
611 for lens shades.
619 for surfaces composed of lenticular elements.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
159 for ophthalmic lenses or blanks.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, 124 for lens or
reflective image-former testing devices and subclasses 128+
for refraction test devices generally.
362, Illumination, 317 for illuminating refractor lenses.
425, Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:
Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for a molding apparatus
used to shape or reshape a nonmetal; see especially subclass
808 for a cross-reference digest of such apparatus including
a lens mold.
Subclass:
643
Eyepiece:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens creates a magnified virtual image of a rear
object.
(1) Note. The eyepiece in an optical instrument is the lens
or lenses nearest the viewer's eye.
Subclass:
644
Having four components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 643. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
650 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having four components.
660 for microscope objective having four components.
682 for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having
seven or less components.
715 for nonspherical lens system having four components.
734 for four component multiple compo-nent lenses with a
reflecting element.
747 for a telephoto lens having four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
771 for multiple component lenses having four components.
Subclass:
645
Having three components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 643. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises three sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having
seven or less components.
716 for nonspherical lens system having three components.
735 for three component multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
784 for multiple component lenses having three components.
Subclass:
646
Having two components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 643. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises two sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
717 for non spherical lens system having two components.
736 for two component multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
793 for multiple component lenses having two components.
Subclass:
647
Having one component:
This subclass is indented under subclass 643. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises one section (i.e., component),
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along
the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis,
and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along
the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering and
passing through all of such component is refracted to a focus
no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
718 for nonspherical lens system having one component.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
796 for a single component lens with multiple elements.
Subclass:
648
With field curvature shaping:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the curvature of the refractive surface controls the
altering of the curvature of the image or the production of
an image of a curved object field.
Subclass:
649
Projection type:
This subclass is indented under subclass 648. Subject matter
wherein an image of an image plane is caused to be visible at
an object plane.
Subclass:
650
Having four components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 649. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
644 for eyepieces having four components.
660 for microscope objective having four components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
715 for nonspherical lens system having four components.
734 for four component multiple compo-nent lenses with a
reflecting element.
747 for a telephoto lens having four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
771 for multiple component lenses having four components.
Subclass:
651
Having less than four components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 649. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises less than four sections (i.e.,
components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged
in series along the optical axis of the lens with their
optical centers in alignment thereon, their planes
perpendicular to such axis, and their axially extreme
refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of
such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
645 for eyepieces having three or less components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
716 for nonspherical lens system having three or less
components.
735 for three or less component multiple component lenses
with a reflecting element.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
784 for multiple component lenses having three or less
components.
796 for a single component lens with multiple elements.
Subclass:
652
With graded refractive index:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein a lens has an index of refraction which varies in
space.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, subclass 124 for optical waveguides
having a graded refractive index.
Subclass:
653
Having an axial gradient:
This subclass is indented under subclass 652. Subject matter
wherein the index of refraction varies along an optical
axis.
Subclass:
654
Having a radial gradient:
This subclass is indented under subclass 652. Subject matter
wherein the index of refraction varies in a direction at a
right angle to an optical axis.
Subclass:
655
In a variable media (e.g., gas, elastomer, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 654. Subject matter
wherein the chemical composition of the lens varies in a
spatial dimension.
Subclass:
656
Microscope objective:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the focal length of the lens is relatively short and
the lens produces a highly magnified real image.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces which may be used in conjunction with
microscope objectives.
Subclass:
657
Having seven components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 656. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises seven sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
708 for nonspherical surface variable magnification lenses
having more than six components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
745 for telephoto lenses having more than five components.
751 for wide angle lenses having seven components.
755 for multiple component lenses having seven components.
Subclass:
658
Having six components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 656. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises six sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
649 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four com-ponents.
682 for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having
seven or less components.
713 for nonspherical surface lens system having six
components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
745 for telephoto lenses having more than five components.
752 for wide angle lenses having six components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
756 for multiple component lens having six components.
Subclass:
659
Having five components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 656. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises five sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact, or in spaced
parallel relation with the spacing being of such small
magnitude that it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
714 for nonspherical surface lens system having five
components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
746 for telephoto lenses having five components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
763 for multiple component lenses having five components.
Subclass:
660
Having four components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 656. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis
and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along
the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering and
passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
644 for eyepieces having four components.
650 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having four components.
682 for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having
seven or less components.
715 for nonspherical lens system having four components.
734 for four component multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
747 for a telephoto lens having four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
771 for multiple component lenses having four components.
Subclass:
661
Having less than four components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 656. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises less than four sections (i.e.,
components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged
in series along the optical axis of the lens with their
optical centers in alignment thereon, their planes
perpendicular to such axis, and their axially extreme
refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of
such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
645 for eyepieces having three or less components.
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
716 for nonspherical lens system having three or less
components.
735 for three or less component multiple component lenses
with a reflecting element.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
784 for multiple component lenses having three or less
components.
796 for a single component lens with multiple elements.
Subclass:
662
High distortion lens (e.g., fQ, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the image formed by the lens is not in proportion to
the source of the image.
Subclass:
663
Telecentric system:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein all of the primary rays are parallel to the optical
axis in either object or image space.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
740 for particular diaphragms employed to produce the
telecentric result.
Subclass:
664
Spherical:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein one of the lens elements has two convex refractive
surfaces which are concentric and of equal curvature.
Subclass:
665
Fluid:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens has at least one component or one element
which uses a transparent liquid or gas as its refractive
material.
(1) Note. The lens components or elements under this
definition may comprise either a mass of fluid supported in a
capillary channel which has its refracting surfaces
freestanding and formed by surface tension or a mass of fluid
which is enclosed in and shaped by a transparent shell or
casing. In the latter form of component or element, the
fluid may be either a liquid or a gas, and in addition to
refraction, may perform other functions (e.g., cooling).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
886 for fluid filters.
894 for gas-filled telescope or microscope barrels.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
subclass 159 for spectacle lenses having a fluid-refractive
element.
Subclass:
666
With variable magnification:
This subclass is indented under subclass 665. Subject matter
wherein at least one refracting surface of the lens is
deformable to vary the focal length of the lens.
(1) Note. The refracting surface of the lens may be
accomplished by either applying mechanical force to the
periphery of the lens casing or varying the quantity of fluid
within the lens casing. In the type of fluid lens which has
a freestanding surface tension formed refracting surface, the
refracting surface may be deformed by impressing an electric
potential upon the fluid lens.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
subclass 169 for spectacle lenses of the fluid type having a
variable focal length.
Subclass:
667
With gas:
This subclass is indented under subclass 665. Subject matter
wherein the refractive material is a transparent gas.
Subclass:
668
Anamorphic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens has or produces unequal magnifications in
two planes that are at an angle (usually perpendicular) to
each other.
(1) Note. These lenses employ at least one element or
component having one or more cylindrical surfaces thereupon
to produce the unequal magnifications of the lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
710 for lenses having elements or components with one or
more cylindrical surfaces thereon.
Subclass:
669
With prism anamorphoser:
This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter
wherein the components that produce the unequal
magnifications in the lens are symmetrically refracting
prisms disposed with their refracting surfaces transversely
of the optical axis of the lens.
(1) Note. The prism components may be mounted either in a
fixed relation to the optical axis of the lens or each of
these components may be mounted to rotate about an axis
parallel to its refracting edge, in which latter case the
difference between the magnifications in the two planes is
variable.
(2) Note. See subclass 831 for the definition of a prism.
Subclass:
670
Variable magnification anamorphoser:
This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter
wherein the magnification factor of the lens is selectively
variable.
Subclass:
671
Having four or more components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises four or more sections (i.e.,
components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged
in series along the optical axis of the lens with their
optical centers in alignment thereon, their planes
perpendicular to such axis and their axially extreme
refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of
such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having four or more components.
648 for field curvature shaping lenses having four or more
components.
656 for microscope objectives having four or more
components.
708 for nonspherical surface lens systems having four or
more components.
726 for lens systems with reflecting elements having four or
more components.
745 for telephoto lenses having four or more components.
749 for wide angle lenses having four or more components.
754 for multiple component lenses in general which have four
or more components.
Subclass:
672
Selective magnification by exchanging or adding a lens
component:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein one or more components of a basic lens are
replaceable by one or more other components to produce in
combination with any remaining components of the basic lens
having substantially the same image plane as that of the
basic lens but having a different equivalent focal length
from that of the original basic lens.
(1) Note. The number of original components removed from
the basic lens may not always be the same as the number of
components which replace such original components, in which
case the exchange of components may result in the addition of
components to the original lens. This subclass includes
adding or subtracting lens components, while subclass 819
relates to the changing of the entire lens.
(2) Note. The prisms may be moved to vary the length in one
plane only, while in subclass 678 the prisms are moved to
vary the focal length in all planes.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
676 for variable magnification lenses generally.
678 for lenses wherein at least one component is formed of
symmetrically refracting prisms which are rotatable about
axes parallel to their refracting edges. See (2) Note
above.
737 for lenses combined with a nonlens refracting element
which is usually a wedge-shaped prism.
744 for a focal lens attachments to be used with lenses to
change the equivalent focal lengths of the lenses
754 for multiple component lenses.
821 for plural lenses in a common carrier selectively
operable. See (1) Note above.
Subclass:
673
To the front of a basic lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 672. Subject matter
wherein a lens component is exchanged or added to the
objective side (i.e., front) of a basic lens for selective
magnification.
Subclass:
674
To the middle of a basic lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 672. Subject matter
wherein a lens component is exchanged or added to the center
of a basic lens for selective magnification.
Subclass:
675
To the rear of a basic lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 672. Subject matter
wherein a lens component is exchanged or added to the image
side (i.e., rear) of a basic lens for selective
magnification.c
Subclass:
676
With variable magnification (e.g., zoom type):
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the equivalent focal length of the lens may be
continuously varied between predetermined limits.
(1) Note. The variation of the equivalent focal length of
the lenses of this generic subclass is accomplished by
axially shifting certain components of the lens relative to
other components.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
432 for variable magnification compound lens systems.
672 for lenses whose focal length may be selected by
exchanging, adding, or removing lens components.
694 for mechanisms that axially shift the lens components
whereby the continuous variation of the equivalent focal
length is accomplished.
754 for fixed focal length lenses.
823 for mechanisms that axially shift the lens components
for the purpose of axially adjusting the focal plane of the
lens.
Subclass:
677
Optically compensated:
This subclass is indented under subclass 676. Subject matter
wherein the lens is physically linked and dependently moved
to maintain an equivalent focal length.
Subclass:
678
Prism lens type:
This subclass is indented under subclass 676. Subject matter
where the lens includes prisms disposed along the optical
axis which are movable to vary the equivalent focal length of
the lens.
(1) Note. See subclass 831 for the definition of a prism.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
669 for lenses with prisms which are movable for varying the
focal length in only one plane.
Subclass:
679
With fixed conjugates:
This subclass is indented under subclass 676. Subject matter
wherein an object plane and its corresponding (i.e.,
conjugate) image plane are fixed and are located at finite
distances from the lens.
Subclass:
680
Reverse telephoto:
This subclass is indented under subclass 676. Subject matter
wherein the lens includes a negative group on the longer
conjugate side and a positive group on the shorter conjugate
side with the spacing between these groups being varied to
vary the overall focal length of the combination.
(1) Note. See subclasses 749+ for reverse telephoto lenses
that are not of variable focal length.
Subclass:
681
Having eight or nine components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter
wherein the reverse telephoto lens comprises eight or nine
sections (i.e., components), each containing two refractive
surfaces arranged in series along the optical axis of the
lens with their optical centers in alignment thereon, their
planes perpendicular to such axis and their axially extreme
refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of
such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact, or in spaced
parallel relation with the spacing being of such small
magnitude that it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components.
656 for microscope objective having more than seven
components.
708 for nonspherical surface variable magnification lenses
having more than six components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
745 for telephoto lenses having more than five components.
750 for reverse telephoto lenses with eight components.
754 for more than seven multiple component lenses.
Subclass:
682
Having seven or less components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter
wherein the reverse telephoto lens comprises seven or less
sections (i.e., components), each containing two refractive
surfaces, arranged in series along the optical axis of the
lens with their optical centers in alignment thereon, their
planes perpendicular to such axis and their axially extreme
refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of
such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact, or in spaced
parallel relation with the spacing being of such small
magnitude that it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having seven or less components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having seven or less components.
657 for microscope objectives having seven or less
components.
708 for nonspherical surface variable magnification lenses
having seven or less components.
733 for seven or less multiple component lenses with
reflecting element.
745 for telephoto lenses having seven or less components.
751 for wide angle lenses having seven or less components.
755 for multiple component lenses having seven or less
components.
796 for a single component with multiple elements.
Subclass:
683
With mechanical compensation:
This subclass is indented under subclass 676. Subject matter
wherein the lens includes at least a first lens group
including a variator movable for varying the focal length and
at least a second lens group including a compensator which
moves independently of the first group for compensating for
image plane deviation during focal length variation.
(1) Note. A group is an assembly of one or more components
used as a single unit to achieve a particular function such
as focussing, variating, compensating, or relaying.
(2) Note. Focusing is the action of converging light beams
to a minimum size spot of light.
(3) Note. Relaying is the action of transferring an input
light beam from a relay to another device without effecting
any change between the relay input and output light beam.
(4) Note. A component consists of either (1) a single
optical piece (i.e., element) comprising a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting
surfaces, which surfaces are disposed transversely of the
optical axis of the lens and spaced therealong or (2) a
plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces
either in full overall contact, or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
Subclass:
684
Other than first group moves for focusing (internal focus
type):
This subclass is indented under subclass 683. Subject matter
where other than the first assembly of components is moved
for focusing.
Subclass:
685
Nonlinear variator/compensator movements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 683. Subject matter
where the variator/compensator locus of movement is not a
straight line.
Subclass:
686
Four groups:
This subclass is indented under subclass 683. Subject matter
wherein four groups move independently of each other and at
least two at the groups function respectively as a variator,
movable for varing the local length, and a compensator which
moves independently of the first group for compensating for
image plane deviation during focal length variation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
689 for mechanical compensation with variable magnification
having three groups.
691 for mechanical compensation with variable magnification
having two groups.
Subclass:
687
+-++ Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 686. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent groups, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the left most sign representing the
group at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction of
the light travelling through the lens is the same as the
reading arrangement of the subclass title.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
774 for a +-++ arrangement in general multiple component
lens having four components.
Subclass:
688
+- -+ Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 686. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent groups, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the left most sign representing the
group at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction of
light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
775 for a +- -+ arrangement in general multiple component
lens having four components.
Subclass:
689
Three groups:
This subclass is indented under subclass 683. Subject matter
wherein three groups move independently of each other and at
least two of the groups function respectively as (1) a
variator movable of varying the focal length and (2) a
compensator which moves independently of the first group for
compensating for image plane deviation focal length
variation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
686 for mechanical compensation with variable magnification
having four groups.
691 for mechanical compensation with variable magnification
having two groups.
Subclass:
690
+-+ Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 689. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent groups, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the left most sign representing the
group at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction of
light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
691
Two groups:
This subclass is indented under subclass 683. Subject matter
wherein two groups move independently of each other and these
groups function respectively as (1) a variator movable for
varying the focal length and (2) a compensator which moves
independently of the first group for compensating for image
plane deviation during focal length variation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
686 for mechanical compensation with variable magnification
having four groups.
689 for mechanical compensation with variable magnification
having three groups.
Subclass:
692
+- Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 691. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens groups, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the left most sign representing the
group at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction of
light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
693
With macro-type focusing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 683. Subject matter
wherein the mechanical compensation permits focusing at very
close object distances without loss of definition and without
the need for front or rear attachments.
Subclass:
694
Adjusting mechanism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 676. Subject matter
comprising structure for changing the axial spacing between
components of the lens.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for the mechanical
adjusting structure. Where the optical relationship is set
forth in the claims, classification is in subclasses
676-693.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
823 for mechanisms that axially shift the lens components to
axially adjust the focal plane of the lens.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
396, Photography, 72 for mechanisms that axially shift the
components of the lens of a camera to accomplish a variation
in the equivalent focal length of such lens and camera
structure.
Subclass:
695
Three or more movable lens groups:
This subclass is indented under subclass 694. Subject matter
wherein the optics to be adjusted includes three or more
nonstationary combinations of lenses.
Subclass:
696
Motor driven:
This subclass is indented under subclass 694. Subject matter
wherein the adjusting mechanism includes an engine to power
any required adjustment.
Subclass:
697
Condition responsive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 696. Subject matter
wherein the motor driven adjusting mechanism is actuated by a
specific situation.
Subclass:
698
Auto focusing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 697. Subject matter
wherein the condition that is responded to is changing of
focal point.
Subclass:
699
Having cam device:
This subclass is indented under subclass 694. Subject matter
wherein the adjusting mechanism includes a curved surface
that causes changes in movement.
Subclass:
700
Cam groove type:
This subclass is indented under subclass 699. Subject matter
wherein the cam device is a slot.
Subclass:
701
Cam ring type or zoom ring type:
This subclass is indented under subclass 699. Subject matter
wherein the cam device is a circular adjustment mechanism.
Subclass:
702
With adjustment lock:
This subclass is indented under subclass 694. Subject matter
wherein the adjustment is stopped to prevent movement.
Subclass:
703
With specified mount:
This subclass is indented under subclass 694. Subject matter
wherein the axial spacing between lens components is adjusted
and the structure to hold the components in place is
specified.
Subclass:
704
Having detail of barrel:
This subclass is indented under subclass 703. Subject matter
wherein the specified mount includes specifies of the
cylindrical case which holds the lens components in
position.
Subclass:
705
With macro type focusing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 694. Subject matter
wherein the adjusting mechanism permits focusing at very
close object distances without loss of definition and without
the need for front or rear attachments.
Subclass:
706
With specified ring:
This subclass is indented under subclass 705. Subject matter
having a specified circular band.
Subclass:
707
Diffusing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens produces an image having soft or indistinct
outlines.
(1) Note. The lens diffusion characteristics may be
effected by any one of the following: (a) frosting the lens
surface, (b) shifting the lens components relative to each
other, (c) placing aspheric surfaces adjacent or on one or
more components of the lens, (d) adding a transparent plate
or additional lens component to the lens, (e) undercorrecting
the lens, (f) introducing aberration to the lens, etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
601 for glare-reducing optical systems.
Subclass:
708
Including a nonspherical surface:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein at least one of the refracting surfaces of the lens
departs from a spherical shape.
(1) Note. One or more of the components of the lens may be
formed of symmetrically refracting prisms.
(2) Note. The surfaces here are continuous curves and may
be aspheric.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
668 for anamorphic lenses having cylindrical components
which magnify more in one plane than in another plane at an
angle thereto, particularly subclass 669 for such lenses in
which at least one of the components is formed of prisms
whereby the lens has a different magnification in one plane
from that which it has in a plane at right angles to the
first mentioned plane.
678 for lenses wherein at least one component of the lens is
formed of symmetrically refracting prisms which are rotatable
about axes that are parallel to their refracting edges to
vary the power of the lens.
725 for panoramic lenses.
728 for lenses having nonspherical reflecting surfaces.
742 for echelon lenses.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
65, Glass Manufacturing, 37 for methods of lens making and
subclass 61 for methods of shaping glass surfaces.
102, Ammunition and Explosives, 200 for toroidal lenses
combined with fuses, primers, and igniting devices utilizing
radiation energy.
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
subclass 168 for spectacle lenses having refracting surfaces
which depart from the spherical form.
Subclass:
709
Conical:
This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter
wherein the nonspherical surface has a shape bounded by a
closed planar base and the surface formed by connecting line
segments between every point on the perimeter of this base
with a common point.
Subclass:
710
Cylindrical:
This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter
wherein the nonspherical lens surface has a shape bounded by
two parallel planes and a surface generated by a line tracing
a closed curve where the line is parallel to an initial
position.
Subclass:
711
Toroidal:
This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter
wherein the nonspherical lens surface has a shape generated
by the revolution of any closed plane curve about a
nonintersecting axis lying in its plane.
Subclass:
712
Paraboloidal:
This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter
wherein the nonspherical lens surface has a shape formed by
revolving about an axis of symmetry a set of points equally
distant from a fixed point and a fixed line.
Subclass:
713
Having six components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises six sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis
and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along
the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering and
passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
649 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components.
658 for microscope objectives having six components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
745 for telephoto lenses having more than five components.
752 for wide angle lenses having six components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
756 for multiple component lens having six components.
Subclass:
714
Having five components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises five sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
649 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components.
659 for microscope objectives having five components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
746 for telephoto lenses having five components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
763 for multiple component lenses having five components.
Subclass:
715
Having four components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis
and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along
the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering and
passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
644 for eyepieces having four components.
650 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having four components.
660 for microscope objective having four components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
734 for four component multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
747 for a telephoto lens having four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
771 for multiple component lenses having four components.
Subclass:
716
Having three components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises three sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis
and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along
the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering and
passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
645 for eyepieces having three components.
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
735 for three component multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
784 for multiple component lenses having three components.
Subclass:
717
Having two components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises two sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
646 for eyepieces having two components.
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
736 for two component multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
793 for multiple component lenses having two components.
Subclass:
718
Having one component:
This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises one section (i.e., component),
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along
the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in
alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis,
and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along
the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering and
passing through all of such component is refracted to a focus
no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
647 for eyepieces having one component.
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
726 for a single component lens with a reflecting element.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
796 for a single component lens with multiple elements.
Subclass:
719
Objective for laser (e.g., optical disc, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 718. Subject matter
wherein the lens component is used in conjunction with a
laser.
Subclass:
720
Asymmetric (e.g., prismatic or eccentric, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the center of mass of the lens is laterally spaced
from the optical axis of the lens.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for both prismatic lenses
which have at least one component formed with a wedge prism
or the equivalent thereof between its opposed refracting
surfaces, and eccentric lenses in which at least one
component is formed as a segment of a symmetrical lens.
(2) Note. A substantial portion of the lenses under this
definition are for mounting on automobile windshields to
facilitate viewing of traffic lights by the operator of the
automobile.
Subclass:
721
Plural focal length:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens has a plurality of light transmitting zones
or areas of different focal lengths.
(1) Note. This subject matter includes the lens plus means
to exclude light from passing through certain areas or zones
while permitting light to pass through other zones or areas
of the lens whereby a selection of focal length is provided.
(2) Note. See subclass 745 - (2) Note for the definition of
focal length.
Subclass:
722
Selective wavelength transmitting or blocking:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
where the lens or structure combined with the lens exhibits
spectrally differential transmission.
(1) Note. In the lenses of this and the indented subclass
the means which gives the lens its particular
light-transmitting properties may be either an integral part
of the lens, i.e., the particular material from which the
lens and the components are made, or a separate plate having
opposed parallel plane surface disposed transversely of the
optical axis of the lens, such plate being formed of a
material which favors or hinders light transmission in a
selected area of the spectrum more than it does in any other
area of the spectrum.
(2) Note. The term spectrum as employed in this definition
refers to light having wavelengths between 3850 and 7600
angstrom units, that is, visible light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
350 for lenses having significant characteristics in the
infrared or ultraviolet spectrum.
885 for light filters, per se.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correction,
subclass 163 for spectacle lenses with light-filtering
means.
362, Illumination, subclass 317 for refractors in the form
of lenses not otherwise classified.
Subclass:
723
With separate filter:
This subclass is indented under subclass 722. Subject matter
including a specific differentiating structure distinct from
the lens elements.
Subclass:
724
Annular zonal correcting:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises one or more annular components
which are used either to correct aberrations present in an
annular zone of the lens or of another lens or to increase
the depth of focus of either lens.
(1) Note. This subclass provides for both the combination
of the lens being corrected and its annular correcting lens
for the annular correcting lens, per se.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
741 for lenses with multipart elements.
Subclass:
725
Panoramic:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens is capable of receiving light rays from the
entire horizon simultaneously and producing from such rays a
single image of the entire horizon.
(1) Note. The lens must be capable of receiving light rays
from all portions of the entire horizon simultaneously. See
this class, subclass 726 for lenses combined with a
reflecting means for sequentially directing rays from
fractional portions of the horizon through the lens, but
which cannot receive rays from the entire horizon
simultaneously.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
504 for lenses maintained in an extended spacing structure
to provide a wide field of view.
749 and 754, for lenses having a particularly wide field of
view, but less than the requirement of the above definition.
Subclass:
726
With reflecting element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens system includes a reflective surface
transverse to the light path.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
503 for extended spacing structure employing diverse
refractive and reflective elements.
Subclass:
727
Including concave or convex reflecting surface:
This subclass is indented under subclass 726. Subject matter
wherein the lens system includes a transparent refractive
element and a curved reflective surface which coact to
provide a single lens of both refractive and reflective
components, i.e., a catadioptric lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
364 for lenses having both refracting and reflecting
components combined with an ocular or viewing system.
838 for reflectors and reflecting systems.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
348, Television, 744 for catadioptric lenses combined with
cathode-ray tubes.
396, Photography, appropriate subclasses for catadioptric
lenses combined with significant camera structure.
Subclass:
728
With aspheric surface (e.g., Schmidt lens, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 727. Subject matter
in which one of the refracting or reflecting surfaces departs
from the spherical shape (e.g., a Schmidt type lens).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
364 for catadioptric lenses combined with an ocular or
viewing system.
708 for other aspheric-type lens.
Subclass:
729
With concave and convex reflectors in series:
This subclass is indented under subclass 728. Subject matter
where the lens system includes both concave and convex
reflecting elements consecutively receiving light.
Subclass:
730
Reflectors in series:
This subclass is indented under subclass 727. Subject matter
where the lens system includes a second reflector receiving
light rays reflected by a first reflector.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
503 for extended spacing structure employing diverse
refractive and reflective elements.
Subclass:
731
With concave and convex reflectors in series:
This subclass is indented under subclass 730. Subject matter
where the lens system includes both concave and convex
reflecting elements consecutively receiving light.
Subclass:
732
For producing a double pass:
This subclass is indented under subclass 726. Subject matter
where a reflective surface mirror reflects light which has
passed through a lens back through the same lens.
Subclass:
733
Multiple component lenses:
This subclass is indented under subclass 726. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises multiple sections (i.e.,
components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged
in series along the optical axis of the lens with their
optical centers in alignment thereon, their planes
perpendicular to such axis, and their axially extreme
refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of
such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having multiple components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lens having
multiple components.
656 for microscope objective having multiple components.
680 for reverse telephoto lens of variable focal lengths.
708 for a nonspherical lens having multiple components.
745 for telephoto lens having multiple components.
749 for reverse telephoto lens having multiple components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
Subclass:
734
Four components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 733. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
644 for eyepieces having four components.
650 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having four components.
660 for microscope objective having four components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
715 for nonspherical lens system having four components.
747 for a telephoto lens having four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
771 for multiple component lenses having four components.
Subclass:
735
Three components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 733. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises three sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
645 for eyepieces having three components.
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
716 for nonspherical lens system having three components.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
784 for multiple component lenses having three components.
Subclass:
736
Two components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 733. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises two sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
646 for eyepieces having two components.
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
717 for nonspherical lens system having two components.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
793 for multiple component lenses having two components.
Subclass:
737
With diverse refracting element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens is combined with a nonlens light-refracting
element through which element the light must pass during the
normal operation of the lens.
(1) Note. The refracting element is employed to redirect
the optical axis of the lens (e.g., prisms).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
503 for extended spacing structure employing diverse
refractive light deflectors.
669 for amorphous refracting elements in the form of
prisms.
Subclass:
738
With light limiting or controlling means:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
comprising the combination of a lens and means associated
therewith to limit or control, without regard to wavelength,
the amount of intensity of the light that passes through the
lens.
(1) Note. The subject matter under this definition includes
lamina between lens elements, coatings on the faces of
elements, and pigment in the material of the lens elements
themselves, all of which do not favor the transmission of any
one particular wavelength of light over any other wavelength
present in the light.
(2) Note. This class (359) provides for optical diaphragms
and shutters, per se, in subclasses 227+. Lenses combined
with shutters generally are provided for in subclass 738 and
lens combined with diaphragms generally are in indented
subclass 739. However, camera shutters and diaphragms, per
se, are classified in Class 396, Photography, subclasses 452+
and 505+ respectively, the indicated use in cameras or camera
background being sufficient for classification there as
opposed to Class 359. Class 396 also provides for lenses
broadly or specifically combined with camera shutter or
diaphragm details, it being emphasized that such combinations
involving noncamera shutters or diaphragms are classified in
subclasses 738+ of this class (359) as indicated above. The
combination of a lens broadly or specifically claimed and a
camera shutter or diaphragm broadly claimed (as well as
shutters or diaphragms generally) are classified in this
subclass (738). Projectors with shutters or diaphragms are
provided for in Class 353, Optics: Image Projectors,
subclasses 75, 88+, and 97.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
227 for means to control the intensity or amount of light
that passes along a certain path. See also (2) Note above.
611 for barrel end or lens mount shade to prevent glare or
to reduce unwanted nonimaging light.
722 for a lens with means which favors the transmission or
blocking of particular wavelengths of light.
888 for means to control the density of light flow through a
predetermined area without regard to the wavelength of the
light.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
353, Optics: Image Projectors, 88 for an image projector
having a shutter.
396, Photography, 452 for camera shutters, and see (2) Note
above.
Subclass:
739
Diaphragm:
This subclass is indented under subclass 738. Subject matter
in which the light-controlling means is in the form of an
opaque screen having a variable aperture therein, such screen
being disposed in the path of the light beam passing through
the lens in such a position axially of the lens to either
restrict the amount of light that reaches the lens or
restrict the amount of light transmitted by the lens.
(1) Note. The subject matter under this definition includes
opaque screens in which the aperture is of annular shape and
located either within the screen or at the periphery
thereof.
(2) Note. Mere recitation of a diaphragm is inadequate for
classification here. This subclass and subclass 740 are
limited to special shapes or locations of diaphragms.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 75 and 97 for an
image projector having a diaphragm.
396, Photography, 505 for camera diaphragms, and see (2)
Note above.
Subclass:
740
Between lens components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 739. Subject matter
wherein the diaphragm is located between components of the
lens.
Subclass:
741
With multipart element:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein a lens element is formed of a plurality of elements
arranged side by side, transverse to the optical axis, and
cooperating to form a single image.
(1) Note. The subject matter under this definition differs
from the subject matter provided for in subclasses 754+ in
that the various parts of the component or element in
subclasses 754+ are in series along the optical axis of the
component or element, while the various parts of the
component or element of this subclass are in edge to edge
relation, transversely of the optical axis.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
619 for lenticular lenses where each element forms a
spatially separate image of a single element.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
126, Stoves and Furnaces, subclass 698 for lenses employed
in solar heating.
Subclass:
742
Echelon (e.g., Fresnel lens, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 741. Subject matter
wherein at least one of the refracting surfaces of the lens
is discontinuous, being formed of a plurality of stepped
refracting surfaces connecting at their adjacent edges by
other surfaces which extend substantially parallel to the
intended direction of light travel through the lens, the
surfaces being so shaped and arranged that they form in
conjunction with the opposed refracting surface of the lens,
a plurality of lenses all of which have a common focus.
Subclass:
743
Having curvilinear lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 742. Subject matter
wherein the general shape of the lens surface is concave or
convex on either side or on both sides.
Subclass:
744
Afocal (e.g., Galilean telescopes, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the components of the lens are so shaped and spaced
along the optical axis of the lens that the total refracting
power of the lens is zero, i.e., parallel light rays, upon
entering the lens and passing through all components thereof
are so refracted that they emerge from the lens as parallel
rays.
(1) Note. These lenses may be attachments to be used with
other lenses to change the equivalent focal lengths of the
latter lenses.
Subclass:
745
Telephoto:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens is designed with the effective focal length
equal to or greater than the distance from the first
refracting surface to the focal plane.
(1) Note. This lens system is physically shorter than its
rated focal length.
(2) Note. The focal length is the distance from the
principle focus (focus of parallel rays of light) to the
surface of a mirror or the optical center of a lens.
(3) Note. A focal point is the point at which a lens or
mirror will focus parallel incident radiation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lens.
656 for microscope objective.
672 for selective magnification.
676 for variable magnification.
680 for reverse telephoto lens.
708 for a nonspherical lens.
733 for multiple component lenses having a reflecting
element.
749 for reverse telephoto lens.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
Subclass:
746
With five components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 745. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises five sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components.
659 for microscope objectives having five components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
714 for nonspherical surface lens system having five
components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
763 for multiple component lenses having five components.
Subclass:
747
With four components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 745. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
644 for eyepieces having four components.
650 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having four components.
660 for microscope objective having four components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
715 for nonspherical lens system having four components.
734 for four component multiple compo-nent lenses with a
reflecting element.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
771 for multiple component lenses having four components.
Subclass:
748
With less than four components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 745. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises less than four sections (i.e.,
components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged
in series along the optical axis of the lens with their
optical centers in alignment thereon, their planes
perpendicular to such axis, and their axially extreme
refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of
such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
645 for eyepieces having three or less components.
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
716 for nonspherical lens system having three or less
components.
735 for three or less component multiple component lenses
with a reflecting element.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
784 for multiple component lenses having three or less
components.
796 for a single component lens with multiple elements.
Subclass:
749
Reverse telephoto:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens is designed with the effective focal length
equal to or less than the distance from the last refracting
surface to the focal plane, i.e., the back focal length is
equal to or greater than the effective focal length.
(1) Note. This is also known as a retrofocus lens and it
consists of an ordinary objective with a negative component
near its focal point, thus forming a large back focus
relative to its focal length.
(2) Note. The focal length is the distance from the
principle focus (focus of parallel rays of light) to the
surface of a mirror or the optical center of a lens.
(3) Note. A focal point is the point at which a lens or
mirror will focus parallel incident radiation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lens.
656 for microscope objective.
680 for reverse telephoto lens of variable focal lengths.
708 for a nonspherical lens.
733 for multiple component lenses having a reflecting
element.
745 for telephoto lens.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
Subclass:
750
With eight components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 749. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises eight sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components.
656 for microscope objective having more than seven
components.
681 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
eight components.
708 for nonspherical surface variable magnification lenses
having more than six components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
745 for telephoto lenses having more than five components.
754 for more than seven multiple component lenses.
Subclass:
751
With seven components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 749. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises seven sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such,
axis and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components.
657 for microscope objectives having seven components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
708 for nonspherical surface variable magnification lenses
having more than six components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
745 for telephoto lenses having more than five components.
755 for multiple component lenses having seven components.
Subclass:
752
With six components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 749. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises six sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components.
658 for microscope objectives having six components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
713 for nonspherical surface lens system having six
components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
745 for telephoto lenses having more than five components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
756 for multiple component lens having six components.
Subclass:
753
With five or less components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 749. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises five or less sections (i.e.,
components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged
in series along the optical axis of the lens with their
optical centers in alignment thereon, their planes
perpendicular to such axis, and their axially extreme
refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of
such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having five or less components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having five or less compo-nents.
659 for microscope objectives having five or less
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having
five or less components.
714 for nonspherical surface lens system having five or less
components.
733 for five or less multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
746 for telephoto lenses having five or less components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
763 for multiple component lenses having five or less
components.
796 for a single component lens with multiple elements.
Subclass:
754
Multiple component lenses:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises multiple sections (i.e.,
components), each containing two refractive surfaces arranged
in series along the optical axis of the lens with their
optical centers in alignment thereon, their planes
perpendicular to such axis, and their axially extreme
refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of
such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having multiple components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lens having
multiple components.
656 for microscope objective having multi-ple components.
680 for reverse telephoto lens of variable focal length.
708 for a nonspherical lens having multiple components.
733 for multiple component lenses having a reflecting
element.
745 for telephoto lens having multiple components.
749 for reverse telephoto lens having multiple components.
Subclass:
755
Seven components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 754. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises seven sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four com-ponents.
657 for microscope objectives having seven components.
682 for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having
seven or less components.
708 for nonspherical surface variable magnification lenses
having more than six components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
745 for telephoto lenses having more than five components.
751 for wide angle lenses having seven components.
Subclass:
756
Six components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 754. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises six sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components.
658 for microscope objectives having six components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
713 for nonspherical surface lens system having six
components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
745 for telephoto lenses having more than five components.
752 for wide angle lenses having six components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
Subclass:
757
First component positive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 756. Subject matter
wherein the component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e.,
the first component hit by the light as the light begins
travelling through the lens, is a convergent lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
757 for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent).
759 for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first two components are positive(i.e.,
conver-gent).
764 for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first componset is positive (i.e., convergent).
767 for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e.,
convergent).
772 for a multiple component lens having four components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e.,
conver-gent).
Subclass:
758
+ - + + - + Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 757. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the left most sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
759
First two components positive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 757. Subject matter
wherein the first two components at the entrant face of the
lens, i.e., the first two components hit by the light as the
light begins travelling through the lens, are convergent
lenses.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
757 for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first com-ponent is positive (i.e., convergent).
764 for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent).
767 for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e.,
convergent).
772 for a multiple component lens having four components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e.,
convergent).
Subclass:
760
+ + - - + + Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 759. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
761
First component negative:
This subclass is indented under subclass 756. Subject matter
wherein the first component at the entrant face of the lens,
i.e., the first component hit by the light as the light
begins travelling through the lens, is divergent.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
770 for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first com-ponent is negative.
781 for a multiple component lens having four components
wherein the first component is negative.
Subclass:
762
First two components negative:
This subclass is indented under subclass 761. Subject matter
wherein the first two components at the entrant face of the
lens, i.e., the first two components hit by the light as the
light begins travelling through the lens, are divergent
lenses.
Subclass:
763
Five components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 754. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises five sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
643 for eyepieces having more than four components.
648 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components.
659 for microscope objectives having five components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
714 for nonspherical surface lens system having five
components.
733 for more than four multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
746 for telephoto lenses having five components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
Subclass:
764
First component positive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 763. Subject matter
wherein the component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e.,
the first component hit by the light as the light begins
travelling through the lens, is a convergent lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
757 for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first com-ponent is positive (i.e., convergent).
759 for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e.,
conver-gent).
767 for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e.,
conver-gent).
772 for a multiple component lens having four components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e.,
conver-gent).
Subclass:
765
+ - - + +Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 764. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
766
+ - + - + Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 764. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
767
First two components positive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 764. Subject matter
wherein the first two components at the entrant face of the
lens, i.e., the first two components hit by the light as the
light begins travelling through the lens, are convergent
lenses.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
757 for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent).
759 for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e.,
conver-gent).
764 for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent).
772 for a multiple component lens having four components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e.,
convergent).
Subclass:
768
+ + - - +Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 767. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
769
+ + - + + Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 767. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
770
First component negative:
This subclass is indented under subclass 763. Subject matter
wherein the first component at the entrant face of the lens,
i.e., the first component hit by the light as the light
begins travelling through the lens, is divergent.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
761 for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first component is negative.
781 for a multiple component lens having four components
wherein the first component is negative.
Subclass:
771
Four components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 754. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis
and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along
the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering and
passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
644 for eyepieces having four components.
650 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having four components.
660 for microscope objective having four components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
715 for nonspherical lens system having four components.
734 for four component multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
747 for a telephoto lens having four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
Subclass:
772
First component positive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 771. Subject matter
wherein the component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e.,
the first component hit by the light as the light begins
travelling through the lens, is a convergent lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
757 for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent).
759 for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e.,
conver-gent).
764 for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent).
767 for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e.,
conver-gent).
Subclass:
773
+ - + - Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 772. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
774
+ - + + Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 772. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
687 for a + - + + arrangement in a mechanical compensation
variable magnification lens.
Subclass:
775
+ - - + Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 772. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
688 for a + - - + arrangement in a mechanical compensation
variable magnification lens.
Subclass:
776
With multiple element component:
This subclass is indented under subclass 775. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises a single section (i.e., component)
having a plurality of optical pieces (i.e., elements)
arranged in laminated series along the light path or optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces
either in full overall contact or so closely spaced that such
spacing does not enter into the lens computations.
(1) Note. Each "component" contains two refractive
surfaces, arranged in series along the optical axis of the
lens with their optical centers in alignment thereon, their
planes perpendicular to such axis and their axially extreme
refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of
such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
(2) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact, or in spaced
parallel relation with the spacing being of such small
magnitude that it does not enter into the lens computations.
(3) Note. The "component" two refracting surfaces of the
single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
the plurality of masses, have at least a portion thereof
axially air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens.
(4) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
(5) Note. The term "element" as applied to a lens
designates any single transparent mass of refractive material
having two opposed refracting surfaces, which surfaces are
disposed transversely of the optical axis of the lens and
spaced therealong, i.e., any one of the masses in the above
component definition regardless of its spacing from adjacent
refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
355 for lenses constructed of materials that transmit
ultraviolet and infrared light.
724 for lenses with annular zonal correcting elements.
741 for lenses with multipart elements or components.
786 for a three component multiple compo-nent lens wherein
the first component contains multiple elements.
787 for a three component multiple compo-nent lens wherein
the second compo-nent contains multiple elements.
788 for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the third component contains multiple elements.
796 for a lens having a single component with multiple
elements.
797 for a lens having a single component with three or more
elements.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
65, Glass Manufacturing, 37 for processes of securing lens
elements together.
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
subclass 159 for opthalmic lenses or blanks.
428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 415,
417, and 426+ for a nonstructural stock material product in
the form of a composite web or sheet embodying a layer of
glass or quartz next to another layer of material which may
also be quartz or glass (subclasses 427 and 428).
Subclass:
777
Infinite radius:
This subclass is indented under subclass 776. Subject matter
wherein at least one mass of refractive material has at least
one flat surface perpendicular to an optical axis.
Subclass:
778
Having a biconvex single element component:
Subject matter under 776 wherein at least one element
consists of a single mass of refracting material having a
curved or rounded outward surface at the entrance and exit
ends.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
789 for a three component lens having a first biconvex
component in the + - + component arrangement.
790 for a three component lens having a third biconvex
component in the + - + component arrangement.
Subclass:
779
+ + - + Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 772. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
780
+ + + - Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 772. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
781
First component negative:
This subclass is indented under subclass 771. Subject matter
wherein the first component at the entrant face of the lens,
i.e., the first component hit by the light as the light
begins travelling through the lens, is divergent.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
761 for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first component is negative.
770 for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first component is negative.
Subclass:
782
- + + - Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 781. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
783
-+ + + Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 781. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
784
Three components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 754. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises three sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
645 for eyepieces having three components.
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having
seven or less components.
716 for nonspherical lens system having three components.
735 for three component multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
Subclass:
785
+-+ Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 784. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
786
With multiple element first component:
This subclass is indented under subclass 785. Subject matter
wherein the first convergent component contains multiple
masses of refractive material; each mass having two opposed
refracting surfaces disposed transversely of the optical axis
of the lens and spaced therealong.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
741 for lenses with multipart elements or components.
776 for a four component multiple compo-nent lens wherein
the first + compo-nent contains multiple elements.
787 for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the second component contains multiple elements.
788 for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the third component contains multiple elements.
796 for a lens having a single component with multiple
elements.
797 for a lens having a single component with three or more
elements.
Subclass:
787
With multiple element second component:
This subclass is indented under subclass 785. Subject matter
wherein the second divergent component contains multiple
masses of refractive material; each mass having two opposed
refracting surfaces disposed transversely of the optical axis
of the lens and spaced therealong.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
741 for lenses with multipart elements or components.
776 for a four component multiple compo-nent lens wherein
the first + compo-nent contains multiple elements.
786 for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the first component contains multiple elements.
788 for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the third component contains multiple elements.
796 for a lens having a single component with multiple
elements.
797 for a lens having a single component with three or more
elements.
Subclass:
788
With multiple element third component:
This subclass is indented under subclass 785. Subject matter
wherein the third convergent component contains multiple
masses of refractive material; each mass having two opposed
refracting surfaces disposed transversely of the optical axis
of the lens and spaced therealong.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
741 for lenses with multipart elements or components.
776 for a four component multiple compo-nent lens wherein
the first + compo-nent contains multiple elements.
786 for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the first component contains multiple elements.
787 for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the second component contains multiple elements.
796 for a lens having a single component with multiple
elements.
797 for a lens having a single component with three or more
elements.
Subclass:
789
With first component biconvex:
This subclass is indented under subclass 785. Subject matter
wherein the first convergent component has a curved or
rounded outward surface at the entrance and exit ends.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
778 for a four component lens having a single biconvex
element in the + - - + component arrangement.
790 for a three component lens having a third biconvex
component in the + - + component arrangement.
Subclass:
790
With third component biconvex:
This subclass is indented under subclass 785. Subject matter
wherein the third convergent component has a curved or
rounded outward surface at the entrance and exit ends.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
778 for a four component lens having a single biconvex
element in the + - - + component arrangement.
789 for a three component lens having a first biconvex
component in the + - + component arrangement.
Subclass:
791
++- Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 784. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
792
+++ Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 784. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
793
Two components:
This subclass is indented under subclass 754. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises two sections (i.e., components),
each containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers
in alignment thereon, their planes perpendicular to such
axis, and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced
along the optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering
and passing through all of such components are refracted to a
focus no more than one time.
(1) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(2) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(3) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
646 for eyepieces having two components.
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components.
717 for nonspherical lens system having two components.
736 for two component multiple component lenses with a
reflecting element.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
754 for multiple component lens systems generally.
Subclass:
794
++ Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 793. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
795
+- Arrangement:
This subclass is indented under subclass 793. Subject matter
wherein the plus and minus signs indicate convergent and
divergent lens components, respectively.
(1) Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of the
lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the
component at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title.
Subclass:
796
Single component with multiple elements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens comprises a single section (i.e., component)
having a plurality of optical pieces (i.e., elements)
arranged in laminated series along the light path or optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces
either in full overall contact or so closely spaced that such
spacing does not enter into the lens computations.
(1) Note. Each "component" contains two refractive
surfaces, arranged in series along the optical axis of the
lens with their optical centers in alignment thereon, their
planes perpendicular to such axis, and their axially extreme
refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that
parallel light rays upon entering and passing through all of
such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
(2) Note. The term "component" as applied to a lens
designates either (1) a single transparent mass of refractive
material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting
surfaces either in full overall contact or in spaced parallel
relation with the spacing being of such small magnitude that
it does not enter into the lens computations.
(3) Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component"
comprising a single mass or the two axially extreme
refracting surfaces of a "component" comprising a plurality
of masses have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be
present in the lens.
(4) Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing between
either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or
the axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of
sufficient magnitude to enter into the lens computations in
order to limit the axial extent of the lens component.
(5) Note. The term "element" as applied to a lens
designates any single transparent mass of refractive material
having two opposed refracting surfaces, which surfaces are
disposed transversely of the optical axis of the lens and
spaced therealong, i.e., any one of the masses in the above
component definition regardless of its spacing from adjacent
refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
355 for lenses constructed of materials that transmit
ultraviolet and infrared light.
647 for eyepieces having one component.
651 for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components.
661 for microscope objective having less than four
components.
682 for variable magnification reverse tele-photo having
seven or less components.
718 for nonspherical lens system having one component.
724 for lenses with annular zonal correcting elements.
741 for lenses with multipart elements or components.
748 for a telephoto lens having less than four components.
753 for wide angle lenses having five or less components.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
65, Glass Manufacturing, subclass 387 for processes of
forming an optical fiber directly connected to a lens;
subclasses 37+ for processes of securing glass lens elements
together.
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
subclass 159 for opthalmic lenses or blanks.
428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, subclass 415,
417, and 426+ for a nonstructural stock material product in
the form of a composite web or sheet embodying a layer of
glass or quartz next to another layer of material which may
also be quartz or glass (subclasses 427 and 428).
Subclass:
797
Three or more elements:
This subclass is indented under subclass 796. Subject matter
wherein the single component of the lens is made up of three
or more masses of refractive material; each having two
opposed refracting surfaces, which surfaces are disposed
transversely of the optical axis of the lens and spaced
therealong.
Subclass:
798
With viewed object or viewed field illumination:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
including a light source for illuminating the area viewed
through or covered by the lens, or including structure such
as a reflector or a prism for directing natural or artificial
light on the area viewed, or wherein the lens is adapted to
collect and direct natural or artificial light on the area
viewed or covered.
(1) Note. A mere transparent or exposed portion is not
sufficient for classification here. A light source or light
directing or guiding means is necessary.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
385 for compound lens system spacing means with object
illumination.
591 for natural light directing systems.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
362, Illumination, 253 for lights combined with structure
not otherwise classifiable; and subclasses 257+ and
especially subclasses 268 and 311 for projectors which may
include focusing lenses in the light path.
Subclass:
799
Illuminating beam coaxial with lens axis:
This subclass is indented under subclass 798. Subject matter
wherein the axis of the illuminating beam is parallel with
the optical axis of the lens over at least a part of these
axes.
(1) Note. The beam may pass through the lens or the beam
may have an annular cross section and surround the lens;
however, the beam axis and lens axis are coincident. Most of
the art in this subclass relates to a microscope objective
and the illuminating structure for the viewed object.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
385 for microscope stages with substage illumination, the
beam usually being coaxial with the barrel.
Subclass:
800
Illumination through lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 798. Subject matter
wherein at least part of the
illumination passes through at least part of the lens or
through at least one component of a multiple component lens.
Subclass:
801
With viewed object support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 798. Subject matter
wherein an object which is being
viewed through the lens is supported by a device which is
connected to the lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
811 for lenses combined with supports for viewed objects
generally.
Subclass:
802
Magnifier:
This subclass is indented under subclass 798. Subject matter
wherein the lens makes an enlarged
image of a viewed object.
Subclass:
803
Hand held:
This subclass is indented under subclass 802. Subject matter
wherein the device is held in a human hand while in use.
Subclass:
804
With viewed object support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
including structure for supporting an object to be viewed in
the optical path of the lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
801 for lenses combined with viewed object supports and
including illumination of the viewed object.
811 for lens supports generally.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses
for lenses broadly combined with supports for cards,
pictures, or signs. See also (1) Note under subclass 806.
Subclass:
805
On lens supporting handle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 804. Subject matter
including a lens supporting handle which also functions as a
support for the object being viewed or which supports
structure which in turn supports the object being viewed.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
803 and 812, for lenses with handles generally.
Subclass:
806
Relatively movable informatory sheet and lens (e.g., reading
machine, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 804. Subject matter
including structure for supporting a sheet or tape of
printed, pictorial, or other informatory matter together with
structure for moving or guiding movement of the sheet or tape
horizontally relative to the lens, or of the lens
horizontally relative to the sheet or tape for viewing
different portions of the sheet or tape.
(1) Note. Class 40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
provides for the combination of a lens broadly together with
structure for supporting a card, picture, or sign relative to
the lens for viewing therethrough. However, where the claims
recite any optical limitations such as lens shape or forcing
(as by an adjustable lens support) together with a sheet or
tape support as defined above classification is in this
subclass (806). Where the supporting structure presents only
a portion of a line of printed matter or an entire line or
limited number of lines together with provision for moving
additional lines or line portions into lens view, the lens
being only broadly claimed as in optical reading machines
classification is in this subclass (806). Where the lens
broadly claimed is only utilized to examine or view a portion
of the exhibit, there being relative movement between the
lens and the exhibit classification is here in this subclass
(806). Class 40 provides generally for viewing the entire
single exhibit (or the entire framed portion of an exhibit
which is presented for viewing as in map holders) of the
card, sign or picture through the lens, with provision for
changing the entire exhibit as in subclasses 446+ thereunder.
Magnifiers adapted for attachment to a sheet for viewing a
portion thereof are classified under subclass 804 of this
class or in this subclass (806), if relative motion is
provided, regardless whether the lens is claimed broadly or
specifically.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
466 for stereoscopic viewers.
801 for lenses relatively movable with respect to sheets and
tapes together with illumination of the sheet or tape.
813 for lenses movable in the lens plane.
823 for lens mountings with axial adjustment as for
focusing.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
40, Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, especially 446 for
changeable exhibitors. See also (1) Note above. See
subclasses 341 and 342+ for a copy holder wherein the copy is
movable relative to a viewing locus.
Subclass:
807
Flat opaque document or picture:
This subclass is indented under subclass 804. Subject matter
wherein the viewed document is flat and viewed by reflected
light.
Subclass:
808
With lens casing:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
including structure substantially surrounding the lens as for
protection purposes.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
503 for tubes and barrels for compound lens systems.
581 for lenses with coatings for some optical effect.
809 for lenses combined with cases which encase devices
other than the lens.
811 for lenses with supports.
Subclass:
809
Combined with diverse art tool, instrument or machine:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
wherein the lens is claimed in combination with a tool,
instrument or machine, each of which is nonoptical in nature,
and which combination is not classifiable with the tool,
instrument, or machine.
(1) Note. For classification in this subclass, the tool,
instrument, or machine must be at least nominally claimed.
However, if the lens constitutes a perfecting feature of the
tool, instrument or machine, the claiming of significant
structure of the tool, instrument or machine is sufficient to
classify the combination with the art to which the tool,
instruments, or machines relates. Examples of tools,
instruments, or machines combined with lenses and classified
here are rulers, compasses, dividers, tweezers, thermometers,
pencils, and sewing machines. Where the lens is claimed in
combination with a support which is in turn disclosed as
being attachable to an unclaimed tool, instrument, or
machine, classification is with the lens and support in
subclasses 811+ below.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
440 for lenses combined with structure including a scale or
indicator.
448 581, 726+, 737, and 738, for lenses combined with other
optical structure such as prisms, mirrors, and light valves.
798 for lenses combined with viewed object illuminating
structure.
811 for lenses with supports. See also (1) Note above.
Subclass:
810
Operation viewed through lens:
This subclass is indented under subclass 809. Subject matter
wherein the lens is so positioned with respect to the tool,
instrument, or machine that the operation or functioning of
the tool, instrument, or machine may be viewed through the
lens.
Subclass:
811
With support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter
including structure to maintain the lens in space or in
relation to some other object such as a barrel or tube in
either a fixed position or in a fixed path of movement or in
a limited area of movement.
(1) Note. Subject matter classifiable here must include the
lens at least broadly in combination with the support, or a
lens support alone which is peculiarly adapted to lens
mounting without general utility, as in the lens mounting
subclasses of 819+. Class 248, Supports, provides for
supports generally even though disclosed with a lens, but not
peculiar thereto.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
391 for object stages or carriers.
503 for lens spacing structure with supports therefor.
803 for lenses with support for the viewed object.
808 for lenses with casing or protection means.
809 for lenses claimed with diverse art tools, instruments
or machines which may also be supports.
812 for lenses with handles.
892 for optical filters with supports.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
248, Supports, 127 for stands and subclasses 200+ for
brackets.
Subclass:
812
With additional handle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 811. Subject matter
including a support for the lens together with an additional
handle for moving the lens to and from its support position.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
409 for opera glass handles.
805 for lenses with a viewed object support on the lens
supporting, handle.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
16, Miscellaneous Hardware, 110 for handles generally.
Subclass:
813
Lens movable in its plane:
This subclass is indented under subclass 811. Subject matter
wherein the support includes relatively movable portions such
as a track or slide to permit movement of the lens in its
plane (which is perpendicular to its lens axis), while
restricting other movements of the lens.
(1) Note. Other structure separate from the above defined
relatively movable portions may be included even in the
support to provide for nonplanar movement and yet not
preclude classification here.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
441 for lens combined with scales, the lens being movable
over the scale.
806 for lenses combined with a relatively movable
informatory sheet.
Subclass:
814
Electromagnetic motive power:
This subclass is indented under subclass 813. Subject matter
wherein the lens is moved by a source of power driven by an
electric or magnetic device.
Subclass:
815
Body or apparel attached or carried:
This subclass is indented under subclass 811. Subject matter
wherein the support is shaped or otherwise adapted to engage
portions of the body or apparel thereof to position the lens
with respect to the body of the user.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
362 for body or apparel carried compound lens spaced means.
812 for lenses with handles.
Subclass:
816
Monocular loupe type:
This subclass is indented under subclass 815. Subject matter
wherein the support is shaped to position the lens before the
eye so that the lens moves with the head of the user.
(1) Note. The support may be adapted to engage the head
directly or to be attached to spectacle frames.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
481 for binocular type loupes.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
subclass 158 for loupes combined with eyeglasses and
subclasses 159+ for ophthalmic lenses and blanks.
Subclass:
817
Foldable or collapsible:
This subclass is indented under subclass 811. Subject matter
wherein one part of the supporting structure may be folded
with respect to another part or wherein the supporting
structure may be folded with respect to the lens to reduce
the space occupied by the lens and its support.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
406 for collapsible periscopes.
408 for collapsible or foldable binoculars.
474 for collapsible stereoscopic viewers.
Subclass:
818
With clamp or grip:
This subclass is indented under subclass 811. Subject matter
wherein the support includes opposing surfaces for detachably
engaging therebetween the supporting object for maintaining
the support positioned with respect to the object.
(1) Note. The engaging surfaces may be spring or screw
actuated. These surfaces do not engage the lens as in
subclasses 819+ below, but rather the structure to which the
support may be attached.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
804 for lenses including a support for the object being
viewed.
809 for lens and their supports attached to diverse art
tools, instruments, or machines by a clamp or grip.
819 for lens mountings wherein the support engages the
lens.
Subclass:
819
Lens mounts:
This subclass is indented under subclass 811. Subject matter
including structure engaging the rim portion around
substantially the entire circumference or rim of the lens or
its components to secure the lens to supporting structure or
to secure the components in proper spaced relation without
obstructing the optical axis.
(1) Note. More commonly the structure here classified is a
ring gripping the periphery of the lens with a thread for
screwing into a barrel or wall of some optical instrument,
such as a telescope, microscope, or camera. A plurality of
these rings gripping respective lens components together with
the ring supporting structure to maintain the components in
proper spaced relationship is classified here. The mount
must engage the lens over substantially the entire rim. A
mere screw or clamp engaging a portion of the lens rim is not
classified here, but in subclass 811 above. The mere
inclusion of the telescope, microscope, or camera barrel
broadly in the claim does not preclude classification here.
(2) Note. Class 396, Photography, appropriate subclasses
for a lens mounting in combination with significant camera
structure. Examples of such significant terms are film
track, film plane, film holder, camera casing, camera
housing, camera body with recess, camera cone, camera
chamber, shutter, etc. The mere recitation of a camera wall
or mounting plate or focal plane is not sufficient to remove
lens mounting structure from this subclass (819).
(3) Note. Class 362, Illumination, in subclasses 455+
provide for illuminating lens mounts. For classification
there, significant illuminating structure would be claimed or
the indicated use of the mounted lens would be for
illuminating purposes as opposed to the general optical use
in this subclass (819). Class 353, Optics: Image
Projectors, in subclasses 24, 96, and 100+ provide for lens
mounts in projectors, and for classification where
significant projector structure is recited such as slide
holder, illuminating source, or projector housing.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
507 for lens mounts with moisture or dust sealing.
892 for filter mountings.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, 405 for flanged pipe joints.
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for
lens holders and supports together with motion picture
structure as required by Class 352.
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclass 24, 96, and 100+ for
a lens mount in an image projector. See (3) Note above.
362, Illumination, 455 for illuminating lens holders and
supports. See also (3) Note above.
396, Photography, appropriate subclasses for camera structure
with lens mounting structure and see (2) Note above.
Subclass:
820
With temperature compensation or control:
This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter
wherein the mounting includes or is combined with structure
to offset or minimize the effect of temperature change.
(1) Note. The structure classified here may be lens
supporting material whose dimensions remain unchanged over a
range of temperature change or heating structure for
offsetting temperature changes otherwise occurring or for
reducing moisture accumulation or heat insulating structure.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
362 for compound lens systems with desiccating means.
507 for mirrors with moisture prevention.
554 for mirrors with distortion prevention.
823 for lens mountings with axial adjustment.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
219, Electric Heating, subclass 521 for electrical heaters
including a support for the material to be heated.
396, Photography, 7 for aerial cameras.
Subclass:
821
Plural lenses in common carrier selectively operable (e.g.,
turret type, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter
including mounting structure for a plurality of lenses and
which permits any one of the lenses to be moved in and out of
the optical path, together with structure for moving the
lenses in and out of the optical path.
(1) Note. Usually the lenses are mounted on a common
carrier and operated as a unit.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
381 and 421, for compound lens systems with selective power
obtained by a common carrier having a plurality of lenses
selectively operable.
672 for lenses of selective focal length by exchangeable
lens components or by the addition of such component. See
also (1) Note under this subclass.
Subclass:
822
Adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter
wherein a parameter of the lens
(e.g., focal length, etc.) is selectively varied.
Subclass:
823
With axial adjustment (e.g., adjustable focus, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter
including structure for moving or permitting motion of the
lens along its optical axis or for moving or permitting
motion along the optical axis of at least two of the lens
components relative to one another.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
694 for adjusting mechanisms for variable focal length
lenses.
813 for supports for movement of the lens in its plane.
820 for lens mountings permitting axial movement of the lens
in response to temperature change.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
396, Photography, 89 for focusing lens structure in cameras.
See (2) Note under subclass 819 above for lines between this
classs and Class 396 relating to camera lens mount.
Subclass:
824
Electromagnetic or piezoelectric drive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 823. Subject matter
wherein the structure for moving or
permitting motion of the lens along its optical axis or for
moving or permitting motion along the optical axis of at
least two of the lens components relative to one another
includes a source of mechanical motive power which is driven
by electrical means.
Subclass:
825
Focusing ring:
This subclass is indented under subclass 823. Subject matter
wherein there is a circular band for adjusting the position
of a point at which light rays converge.
Subclass:
826
Sliding barrels:
This subclass is indented under subclass 823. Subject matter
wherein there are at least two cylindrical tubes, one of
which fits and slides in an axial direction partially inside
other.
(1) Note. Excluded from this subclass are barrels which are
threaded.
Subclass:
827
Detachably attached (e.g., plate, barrel, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter
wherein the mounting or plate or barrel to which the mounting
is to be secured includes structure such as a snap
connection, bayonet joint, screw threads, or like
interengaging parts which permit ready securing and removal
of the mounting from the plate or barrel.
(1) Note. The mounting here is often one of several
interchangeable camera lens mounts while the plate is the
camera wall.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
821 for plural lenses selectively operable in a common
carrier.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
285, Pipe Joints or Couplings, subclass 189 for pipe to side
or plate joints.
Subclass:
828
Bayonet coupling:
This subclass is indented under subclass 827. Subject matter
wherein the mounting is a quick coupling device comprising
pins on the sides of a male connector portion to engage
corresponding slots in a socket where connection is
accomplished by rotating two parts under pressure.
Subclass:
829
With threads:
This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter
having a projecting helical rib.
Subclass:
830
With ring:
This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter
having a circular band for holding, connecting, packing,
sealing, etc.
Subclass:
831
PRISM (INCLUDING MOUNT):
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including a transparent optical element having
at least two plane surfaces inclined relative to each other,
from which light is reflected or through which light is
refracted.
(1) Note. A prism may be employed for refracting or
reflecting light. Prism reflections are considered to be
internal reflections; that is, the light is inside the prism
body both before and immediately after the reflection.
(2) Note. A prism mount structure engaging the prism to
secure it to other structure such as a barrel without
obstructing the optical axis is included in this subclass.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
290 for prisms with means to change the refractive index.
431 for compound lens systems with prisms for telescopes.
592 for refracting elements employed in natural light
directing systems.
606 for prismoidal anti-glare mirrors.
615 for prisms which disperse light.
618 for plural path optical systems which divide or combine
light paths.
737 for lenses with prisms.
819 for lens mountings.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, 51 for optical test
devices having prisms used in the infrared or ultraviolet
range alone or in combination with visible light.
Subclass:
832
Fluid filled:
This subclass is indented under subclass 831. Subject matter
wherein the prism contains a liquid, vapor, or gas.
Subclass:
833
With reflecting surface:
This subclass is indented under subclass 831. Subject matter
wherein at least one surface reflects light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
838 for mirrors, per se.
Subclass:
834
Plural reflecting surfaces:
This subclass is indented under subclass 833. Subject matter
comprising two or more reflecting surfaces.
Subclass:
835
For binocular or porro-prism:
This subclass is indented under subclass 834. Subject matter
wherein a prism is made up of two right angle prisms placed
at right angles to each other that can be used in a
binocular.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
375 for a binocular microscope using a compound lens
systems.
407 for binocular telescope.
480 for binocular devices.
Subclass:
836
Roof or roof-angle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 834. Subject matter
comprising surfaces that revert and invert the image and, at
the same time, will deviate the line of sight through a 90
deg. angle.
Subclass:
837
With refracting surface:
This subclass is indented under subclass 831. Subject matter
wherein at least one surface refracts light.
Subclass:
838
MIRROR:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter including a structure which reflects a
substantial portion of the light incident thereon in a
regular pattern.
(1) Note. A nominal mirror claimed in combination with
other structure is classified with the other structure.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
212 for reflectors subject to periodic mo-tion.
223 for reflectors specifically designed for changing the
direction of reflected beams.
515 for light beam reflectors used for
signalling (e.g., retroreflectors).
603 for antiglare means for mirrors.
629 for reflectors used in light dividing or combining
systems.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
74, Machine Element or Mechanism, subclass 502.1 for a
flexible mirror moving mechanism.
126, Stoves and Furnaces, 684 for working fluid solar
collectors with concentrating reflectors.
248, Supports, 466 for mirror type supports or supports
wherein a mirror is only nominally recited.
362, Illumination, 296 and 317+ for light sources combined
with reflectors.
472, Amusement Devices, particularly subclass 63 for an
illusion caused by a mirror and see the Search Notes
thereunder.
Subclass:
839
With a transmitting property:
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
including a mirror area which partially transmits and
partially reflects light rays or including a plurality of
light transmitting and light reflecting areas interspersed.
(1) Note. Included here are one-way mirrors.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
630 for a transparent reflector used for light dividing or
combining purposes.
633 for a transparent reflector with successive reflectors.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
472, Amusement Devices, subclass 58 for a stage or illusion
device using a transparent reflector.
Subclass:
840
Back to back:
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
comprising two immediately adjacent and oppositely directed
mirrors which are rigidly connected.
(1) Note. This type of mirror is often referred to as a
double mirror.
Subclass:
841
Retractable vehicle mirror:
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
including a mirror mounted on a vehicle and movable from an
in-use position to a stored position or to a position closely
adjacent the vehicle.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
872 for a mirror movable relative to a support, in general.
Subclass:
842
Mounted on vehicle having handlebars (e.g., bicycle,
motorcycle, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
wherein the mirror is mounted on a vehicle which has
handlebars for steering and a frame with a seat supporting
the operator.
(1) Note. The mirror may be mounted on the handlebar or the
vehicle frame.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
871 for a mirror with support, in general.
Subclass:
843
Automatically adjustable in response to vehicle position,
control, or indicator:
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
wherein a mirror mounted on a vehicle changes position by
movement of the vehicle, or condition of a vehicle or
indicator control mechanism, or indicator.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
872 for a mirror movable relative to a support in general.
Subclass:
844
On adjustable diverse vehicle portion or acces-sory:
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
comprising a mirror mounted on a vehicle attachment which is
movable relative to the vehicle.
(1) Note. An example of such a vehicular attachment is a
sun visor.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
875 for a mirror controlled by a rigid handle extending to
or near the mirror pivot.
Subclass:
845
Fluid cooled mirror:
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
including a fluid to absorb heat that would otherwise cause
thermal distortion of the reflective surface.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
165, Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for generic
thermal energy removal by circulating fluid.
Subclass:
846
Including specified control or retention of the shape of a
mirror surface:
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
including structure for maintaining a precise shape of a
reflective surface or for reversibly changing the shape of a
reflective surface.
Subclass:
847
Membrane mirror in mechanical contact only at its edge:
This subclass is indented under subclass 846. Subject matter
including a very thin flexible reflective structure that is
supported only at its periphery.
Subclass:
848
With structure to minimize internal mirror stress:
This subclass is indented under subclass 846. Subject matter
including supporting a mirror so as to minimize internal
mirror stress which might otherwise distort the shape of the
reflective surface.
(1) Note. This subclass includes light weight mirror
structures designed to minimize sagging stress.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
845 for thermal mirror stress reduction by circulating
fluid.
883 for laminated or layered mirror support structure in
general.
Subclass:
849
Including a plurality of adjustable mirror supports:
This subclass is indented under subclass 846. Subject matter
including multiple mirror supports adjustable to change the
shape of a reflective surface.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
847 for an adjustable membrane mirror.
872 for a mirror movable relative to a support.
Subclass:
850
Plural mirrors or reflecting surfaces:
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
comprising multiple mirrors or mirror surfaces.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
839 for plural mirrors in series wherein at least one of the
mirrors has a transmitting property.
Subclass:
851
Composite or echelon mirrors or light concentrating array:
This subclass is indented under subclass 850. Subject matter
comprising a plurality of mirrors or mirror surfaces
cooperating to form a unified image or to concentrate light
in a focal area or along a focal line or comprising several
substantially identical mir-rors for concentrating light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
868 for mirrors with one continuous reflecting surface of
varied radius.
Subclass:
852
With a line focus:
This subclass is indented under subclass 851. Subject matter
including a plurality of mirrors or mirror surfaces which
concentrate light in a linear pattern.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
867 for a single mirror providing a line focus.
869 for a concave mirror of varied radius.
Subclass:
853
Light concentrating (e.g., heliostat, etc.), con-cave, or
paraboloidal structure:
This subclass is indented under subclass 851. Subject matter
which forms incident radiation into a convergent beam, has a
concave configuration, or has a cross section forming a
parabola in at least one direction.
Subclass:
854
Identical side mirrors adjustable with respect to a central
mirror:
This subclass is indented under subclass 850. Subject matter
including adjustable identical mirrors on opposite sides of a
central mirror.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
872 for a single mirror adjustable relative to a support.
Subclass:
855
Identical adjacent mirrors identically supported:
This subclass is indented under subclass 850. Subject matter
including plural identical mirrors located close together and
having substantially identical support structure.
Subclass:
856
With successive reflections:
This subclass is indented under subclass 855. Subject matter
wherein a substantial portion of the light is reflected at
least two times in series.
(1) Note. Included here is a folded optical path.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
857 for mirrors with reflections in series not involving a
transmitting property nor identical adjacent mirrors
identically supported.
Subclass:
857
With successive reflections:
This subclass is indented under subclass 850. Subject matter
wherein a substantial portion of the light is reflected at
least two times in series.
(1) Note. Included here is a folded optical path.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
633 for serial reflections in a head-up type system where
visual information is superimposed on an observer's field of
view.
856 for identical adjacent mirrors identically supported
with reflections in series.
Subclass:
858
Including curved mirror surfaces in series:
This subclass is indented under subclass 857. Subject matter
comprising a curved mirror surface which receives the light
from itself or another curved mirror surface.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
365 for compound lens systems with curved mirrors in
series.
Subclass:
859
With concave and convex mirrors in series:
This subclass is indented under subclass 858. Subject matter
including a concave mirror and a convex mirror cooperating to
sequentially reflect the light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
366 for compound lens systems with concave and convex
mirrors in series.
731 for a lens with concave and convex reflectors in
series.
Subclass:
860
To view observer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 857. Subject matter
wherein the plural reflections are arranged to provide a view
of a portion of the observer.
Subclass:
861
With three or more successive reflections:
This subclass is indented under subclass 857. Subject matter
wherein a substantial portion of the light is reflected at
least three times in series.
Subclass:
862
Including an adjustable mirror:
This subclass is indented under subclass 857. Subject matter
including structure for varying the position of at least one
mirror.
Subclass:
863
Including a curved mirror:
This subclass is indented under subclass 862. Subject matter
including a mirror with a smooth nonplanar reflective
surface.
Subclass:
864
Including adjacent plane and curved mirrors:
This subclass is indented under subclass 850. Subject matter
including a flat mirror and a smooth nonflat mirror close
together.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
866 for segmented mirrors for wide angle coverage.
868 for mirror surfaces of varying curvature.
Subclass:
865
Relatively adjustable:
This subclass is indented under subclass 850. Subject matter
having structure to vary the position of one mirror relative
to another mirror.
Subclass:
866
Wide angle segmented mirrors:
This subclass is indented under subclass 850. Subject matter
including plural angled mirrors or mirror surfaces with the
intersection of the surfaces or their extensions forming
discontinuities to provide a wide field of view.
Subclass:
867
Concave cylindrical or providing a line focus:
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
including a cylindrically concave reflecting surface or
structure for providing a linear focus.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
852 for composite or echelon mirrors providing a line
focus.
Subclass:
868
With mirror surface of varied radius:
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
including a nonspherical continuously curved reflecting
surface.
(1) Note. The mirror surface may be parabolically or
elliptically shaped.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
846 for mirror surfaces of varied radii with means for
controlling the shape of such surfaces.
857 for mirror surfaces of varied radii with successive
reflections.
858 for curved mirrors in series, one of which may include a
mirror surface of varied radius.
Subclass:
869
Concave:
This subclass is indented under subclass 868. Subject matter
wherein a nonspherical continuously curved reflecting surface
includes a smooth surface indented away from the direction of
an incident light beam.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
852 for composite or echelon mirrors providing a line
focus.
867 for a concave cylindrical mirror providing a line
focus.
Subclass:
870
Fracture resistant (e.g., shatterproof, etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
including structure to retain mirror pieces in position upon
breakage.
(1) Note. Included herein are mirrors with an adhesive or
film preventing movement of the broken elements.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
846 for shape retention or control of a mirror surface.
Subclass:
871
With support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
including structure for supporting a mirror.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
248, Supports, 466 for mirror type support structures or
supports wherein a mirror is only nominally recited.
Subclass:
872
Mirror movable relative to support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 871. Subject matter
including structure for moving a mirror relative to a support
structure.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
843 for mirrors automatically adjustable with vehicle
position.
844 for mirrors on a relatively movable vehicle portion or
accessory.
854 for identical side mirrors adjustable with respect to a
central mirror.
862 for plural mirrors with successive reflections including
an adjustable mirror.
865 for relative adjustable plural mirrors.
Subclass:
873
With rotary to linear motion converting mirror adjustment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 872. Subject matter
including conversion of rotary motion into linear motion to
thereby move a mirror.
Subclass:
874
With rotation of mirror about perpendicular axes:
This subclass is indented under subclass 873. Subject matter
including structure for rotating a mirror about axes that are
at right angles to each other.
(1) Note. The axes need not be axes of symmetry.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
876 for mirrors with structure for rotation about
perpendicular axes not involving rotary to linear motion
conversion.
Subclass:
875
With a rigid handle extending to or near a mirror pivot:
This subclass is indented under subclass 872. Subject matter
including a rigid handle extending to a mirror pivot or to an
intermediate pivot with a short linkage extending in turn to
a mirror to provide short range operation.
(1) Note. This subclass includes a rigid handle which
extends through a vehicle wall to provide direct pivotal
movement to mirrors.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
844 for mirror controls extending through a vehicle door.
Subclass:
876
With rotation of mirror about perpendicular axes:
This subclass is indented under subclass 872. Subject matter
including structure for rotating a mirror about axes that are
at right angles to each other.
(1) Note. The axes need not be axes of symmetry.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
874 for mirrors with rotary to linear motion converting
mirror adjustment for rotation about perpendicular axes.
Subclass:
877
With switch or motor controlling mirror move-ment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 872. Subject matter
including a switch or motor which is activated to provide
power to move a mirror.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
873 and 876, for mirror supports with rotary to linear
mirror adjusting structure or structure permitting rotation
about perpendicular axes, respectively.
Subclass:
878
Fluid pressure actuated:
This subclass is indented under subclass 877. Subject matter
including an element applying an adjusting force to the
mirror which is actuated by a force applying gas or liquid.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
137, Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for generic
devices actuated by fluid pressure.
Subclass:
879
Body or apparel mirror support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 872. Subject matter
which includes structure for supporting the mirror on a body
portion or the clothing or accessories worn or carried by a
person.
Subclass:
880
Having support or apparel engaging head or neck:
This subclass is indented under subclass 879. Subject matter
including structure to support a mirror from the head or neck
portion of the body of the operator or clothing engaged
therewith.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
128, Surgery, 21 for surgical diagnostic testing
reflectors.
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
subclass 50 for eyeglasses combined with a rear-view
reflector.
Subclass:
881
With mirror supporting column or sliding adjustment:
This subclass is indented under subclass 872. Subject matter
including a supporting shaft or structure for providing
relative sliding movement between a mirror and support
structure therefor.
Subclass:
882
With handle:
This subclass is indented under subclass 871. Subject matter
including a rigid, solid extension connected to the mirror,
support, or enclosure.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
875 for a mirror with rigid handle extending to a mirror
pivot.
Subclass:
883
Laminated or layered mirror support:
This subclass is indented under subclass 871. Subject matter
including a plurality of laminations or layers backing the
mirror to support the mirror.
(1) Note. Laminated or layered mirror supports specifically
designed to minimize internal mirror stress are classified in
this class, subclass 848.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Ar-ticles, appropriate
subclasses for structurally defined laminates in general.
Subclass:
884
With selective absorption or transparent over-coating:
This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter
including a mirror which absorbs particular visible
wavelengths or includes an overcoating without absorbing
properties.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
577 for interference coatings or lamina.
839 for a mirror having a transmitting property.
885 for absorption filters.
Subclass:
885
ABSORPTION FILTER:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter which absorbs a portion of the incident ray
energy and transmits the remainder.
(1) Note. For classification here, some structure other
than a material having filtering properties is required. For
example, a plurality of superimposed filtering layers which
cooperate to give some desired optical effect would be
sufficient for classification here. See Class 252,
Compositions, subclasses 299.01+ for liquid crystal
containing filter compositions and subclasses 582+ for other
filter compositions and Class 428, Stock Material or
Miscellaneous Articles, for filter stock material.
(2) Note. Included here are not only those devices which
may be selective with regard to the visible spectrum (i.e.,
colored), but also those devices which may be nonselective in
the absorption of light energy (i.e., neutral density type).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
350 for filter which operates significantly in the
ultraviolet or infrared spectrum; particularly, subclass 358
for fluid filter and subclasses 359+ for multilayer filter.
502 for polarizers combined with color filter means.
577 for dichroic or interference filter, particularly,
subclass 588 for filter having four or more layers and
subclass 590 for combining with another filter.
601 for glare reducing means which may include filter
means.
722 for lens having selective wavelength transmitting or
blocking properties and subclass 723 for a lens combined with
a separate selective element.
884 for mirrors having selective light reflecting properties
or combined with elements having such properties.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
2, Apparel, 12 for eye shades which may include a filter.
250, Radiant Energy, 503.1 for an invisible radiation
modifying member generally.
252, Compositions, 299.01 for liquid-crystal compositions
and subclasses 582+ for other optical filter compositions and
for optical articles defined only in terms of the composition
of which they are composed.
313, Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices, subclass 112 for
electric lamps and electronic tubes which have a light filter
structurally combined therewith.
333, Wave Transmission Lines and Networks, subclass 167 for
electrical filters generally.
343, Communications: Radio Wave Antennas, 909 for radio
wave filters, per se.
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
44 for spectacles or spectacle type goggles with filtering
lenses, and subclasses 163+ for ophthalmic lenses or blanks
with light filtering means.
356, Optics: Measuring and Testing, particularly 402 for
shade or color filter devices which use one or more color
filters additively or sequentially or at the same time
particularly subclasses 234+ and 416+ for photometers of the
light absorbing type for neutral filters of the sequentially
additive or of the continuously variable type.
362, Illumination, for illuminating devices in combination
with a filter, 1 for daylight lamps; subclasses 3+ for
photos:graphic safe light lanterns; subclasses 166+ for
signal lanterns with color screens and for hand lanterns with
color screens; and subclass 293 for light projectors having
a colored light screen.
378, X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices, 156 for X-ray
filters.
380, Cryptography, subclass 54 for this subject matter used
in a device for revealing concealed information.
396, Photography, 544 for camera attachments which may
include a filter.
424, Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body Treating Compositions, 59
for a sun or radiation screening or sun tanning composition
intented for topical application to a living body.
427, Coating Processes, 162 for coating processes, per se,
wherein the product is an optical element.
428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate
subclasses for a single or plural layer web or sheet which
may inherently possess light filtering properties due to the
material thereof; coated filters comprising plural layers
and defined only by the compositions of the layers are found
in Class 428, 411.1 and especially subclasses 426+ wherein
one layer is glass.
430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
Product Thereof, subclass 507 and 510+ for filter.
Subclass:
886
Fluid:
This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter
wherein the filtering material is in gas, liquid, or vapor
form.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
665 for fluid type lenses.
832 for fluid filled prisms.
Subclass:
887
Sequentially additive:
This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter
comprising two or more surfaces of different selectivity
which are intended to sequentially affect a sensing element
(which may be the human eye) at such a rate that their
effects are combined in an optically additive way.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
348, Television, subclass 743 for video display color
sequential with moving color filters.
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 45 and 66+ for
similar subject matter used in the motion picture art.
Subclass:
888
Neutral or graded density:
This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter
wherein the filter or a portion thereof absorbs ray energy
independently of wavelength and the corresponding
transmittance may be uniform or variable.
(1) Note. Where the density differences of various areas
are incidentally due to the fact that the areas are of
different colors, the subject matter is not classified here
but in some other appropriate filter subclass.
Subclass:
889
Movable in or out of optical path:
This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter
wherein one or more filters may be selectively moved into and
out of an optical path.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
887 for filter movable in and out of an optical path in a
predetermined pattern resulting in the sequential addition of
colors.
888 for such subject matter where the filter is of the
neutral density type or has graded optical densities.
Subclass:
890
Superimposed or series:
This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter
wherein two or more filters are disposed so that ray energy
may pass through all the filters in series.
Subclass:
891
Filters in optical parallel (e.g., colors side-by-side,
etc.):
This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter
having a plurality of differently colored filters arranged in
such a fashion that ray energy passing through one filter
does not pass through any other filter and the resultant
filtered rays are uniformly equidistant.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
618 for similar subject matter used with light dividing and
combining systems.
887 where colored ray energies are sequentially additive.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
352, Optics: Motion Pictures, subclass 45 and 66+ for
similar subject matter used in the motion picture art.
396, Photography, 305 for similar camera color image forming
using monochrome film.
Subclass:
892
With support or frame:
This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter
comprising means for mounting a filter.
(1) Note. See search class notes below for supports of
general application, and for frame structure in terms of a
panel, closure, etc.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
611 for barrel end shades which may have filters therein.
811 for support means for lenses.
819 for lens mounting means.
831 for mounting means for prisms.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly 474,
633+, and 782+ for rigid panel structure and frames
therefore.
160, Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or Panel, 371
for frames for flexible panels or closures.
248, Supports, for supports of general application.
Subclass:
893
SCREEN (E.G., HALFTONE SCREEN, ETC.):
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter having at least a plate with a multiplicity of
apertures, opaque dots, patterns, or crossed lines which are
intended to break up imaging light.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
355, Photocopying, subclass 80 for light diffusing in
localized areas.
396, Photography, subclass 545 for light diffusing and
masking provided for by that class.
430, Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, of
Product Thereof, 6 for chemically defined screens and the
process for making the same and subclasses 396+ for process
of using the same.
Subclass:
894
OPTICAL APERTURE OR TUBE, OR TRANSPARENT CLOSURE:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter wherein a structure transmits light energy
where all transmitted rays travel in essentially straight
lines (i.e., without intentional deviation as, for example,
by reflection, refraction or diffraction) and without
significant attenuation (i.e., without being filtered).
(1) Note. This subclass includes certain specialized
viewing devices which involve no intentional deviation of
light rays such as, for example, certain underwater viewing
devices. It also includes apertures, transparent closures,
etc., with no significant optical element classifiable in the
preceding subclasses, but some optical feature going beyond,
for example, windshields in Class 296, subclasses 84.1+. This
might be, for example, means to compensate for the offsetting
of ray energy in passing through a transparent closure.
(2) Note. This definition does not exclude subject matter
where certain rays are transmitted and certain other rays are
completely blocked.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
227 for movable apertured plates which control light.
480 for binocular viewing devices.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
385, Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical
wave-guides which utilize total internal reflection.
Subclass:
895
Submerged object viewer:
This subclass is indented under subclass 894. Subject matter
wherein an optical tube permits clear viewing of an
under-water article.
Subclass:
896
MISCELLANEOUS:
This subclass is indented under the class definition.
Subject matter not provided for in any preceding subclass.
CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
Subclass:
900
METHODS:
Cross-reference art collection of optical methods.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
819 for lens mountings.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
65, Glass Manufacturing, 37 for lens making involving the
working or treating of glass.
156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
99 for optically transparent glass lens sandwich making,
which may include a grinding step.
264, Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes, 1.1 for optical article shaping or treating such
as molding.
351, Optics: Eye Examining, Vision Testing and Correcting,
subclass 177 for methods of making ophthalmic lenses or
blanks not otherwise classifiable and subclass 178 for
methods of securing these lenses in their mountings.
451, Abrading, 42 for a lens grinding method. See the
reference to Class 156 below.
Subclass:
901
ACOUSTIC HOLOGRAPHY:
Cross-reference art collection of patents having to do with
holos:graphic techniques using sound vibrations.
Subclass:
902
HOLOGRAPHIC INTERFEROMETER:
Cross-reference art collection of patents having to do with
using holography in instruments that use light interference
phenomena for precise determinations of wavelength, spectral
line structure, very small displacements, and indices of
refraction.
Subclass:
903
WITH MAGNET:
Cross-reference art collection of patents wherein the optical
element has a magnet for temporarily attaching it to any
object containing ferrous material.
(1) Note. This would include an optical element mounted on
a magnet for placement on a refrigerator door wherein the
sole purpose is for ornamental use.
Information Products Division -- Contacts
Questions regarding this report should be directed to:
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office
Information Products Division
PK3- Suite 441
Washington, DC 20231
tel: (703) 306-2600
FAX: (703) 306-2737
email: oeip@uspto.gov
Last Modified: 6 October 2000